DIGITAL CAMERA

Instruction Manual

EN Model No. : IM030

Thank you for purchasing our digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera, please
read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life.
Be sure you have read and understood the contents of “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, before
using this product. Keep these instructions available for future reference.
We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important
photographs.
The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development
stages and may differ from the actual product.
If there are additions and/or modifications of functions due to firmware update for the camera, the
contents will differ. For the latest information, please visit our website.
 Table of Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

User Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Installing PC Software/Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

About This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

How to find what you want to know. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

How to read this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Names of parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Unpacking the box contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Attaching the Strap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Inserting and removing the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Inserting the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Removing the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Charging the Battery using the supplied USB-AC adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Charging the Battery Using an Optional BCS‑5 Battery Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Inserting and Removing Memory Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Inserting the card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Removing the card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Usable cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Attaching and removing lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Attaching a lens to the camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Removing Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Using the monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Turning the camera on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Sleep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Initial setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Information displays while shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

2 Table of Contents
 Switching between displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Switching the information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Shooting still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Types of shooting modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Shooting with touch screen operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter speed (P: Program AE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Program Shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Choosing aperture (A: Aperture-Priority AE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Choosing shutter speed (S: Shutter-Priority AE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M: Manual Exposure). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Bulb/Time Photography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Lighten Blending (B: Live Composite Photography). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Letting the camera choose the settings (AUTO mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Shooting in scene mode (SCN mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Types of scene modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Shooting a Panorama. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Using art filters (ART mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Types of art filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Using [Partial Color]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial (C Custom mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Saving Settings (Assign to Custom Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Using Custom Modes (C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Recording Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Recording movies in photo shooting modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Recording movies in movie mode (n). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Touch Controls (Silent Controls). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Shooting Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Shooting Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Direct Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

3 Table of Contents
 Direct Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Controlling exposure (Exposure Compensation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Adjusting Exposure Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Resetting Exposure Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

AF Target Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF (Super Spot AF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Locking Exposure (AE Lock). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Self-Timer Options (l Custom Self-timer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Shooting without the vibration caused by shutter button operations (Anti-Shock H). . . . . . . . . . 105

Shooting without shutter sound (Silent I). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Pro Capture Photography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution (High Res Shot). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

The Super Control/LV Super Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

The Super Control and LV Super Control Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Using the Super Control and LV Super Control panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Settings Available in the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Adjusting Focus Manually During Autofocus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Using Starry Sky AF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Setting a focus position for PreMF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Positioning and Sizing the AF Target (AF Area). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Choosing how the camera measures brightness (Metering). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Face priority AF/Eye priority AF (I Face Priority). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Adjusting color (WB (white balance)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

One-touch white balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

N Keep Warm Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

4 Table of Contents
Making fine adjustments to white balance (WB Compensation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Reducing camera shake (Image Stabilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Setting the image aspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Photo File and Image Size Options (KX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

The Movie Quality Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Filming High-Speed Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies (Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Using a flash (Flash photography). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Attaching Compatible Flash Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Removing Flash Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Flash Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Flash Mode and Shutter Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Adjusting flash output (Flash intensity control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Processing options (Picture Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Picture mode options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Adjusting overall color (Color Creator). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Making fine adjustments to sharpness (Sharpness). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Making fine adjustments to contrast (Contrast). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Making fine adjustments to saturation (Saturation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Making fine adjustments to tone (Gradation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Applying filter effects to monochrome pictures (Color Filter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Adjusting the tone of a monochrome image (Monochrome Color). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Adjusting i-Enhance effects (Effect). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Setting the color reproduction format (Color Space). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Changing the brightness of highlights and shadows (Highlight&Shadow Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Customizable Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Available Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Using multi function options (Multi Function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

5 Table of Contents
 Adjusting Zoom During Filming (Movie A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Information display during playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Playback image information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Switching the information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Viewing photographs and movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Viewing photographs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Watching movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Finding Pictures Quickly (Index and Calendar Playback). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Zooming In (Playback Zoom). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Rotating Pictures (Rotate). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Protecting Pictures (0). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Deleting Pictures (Erase). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Selecting RAW+JPEG Pictures for Sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Selecting Multiple Pictures (Share Order Selected, 0, Erase Selected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Print order (DPOF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Creating a print order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Removing all or selected pictures from the print order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Adding Audio to Pictures (c). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Audio Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Playback Using Touch Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Full-Frame Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Index/Calendar Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Basic menu operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Using Shooting Menu 1/Shooting Menu 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Shooting Menus 1 and 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Restoring Default Settings (Reset). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Saving Settings (Assign to Custom Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Processing options (Picture Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

6 Table of Contents
 Photo File and Image Size Options (KX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Digital Zoom (Digital Tele-converter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Shooting automatically with a fixed interval (Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

High Resolution Shooting Settings (High Res Shot). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light (Live ND Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Varying settings over a series of photographs (Bracketing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Using Bracketing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images (HDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Recording multiple exposures in a single image (Multiple Exposure). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Keystone correction and perspective control (Keystone Comp.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Setting anti-shock/silent shooting (Anti-Shock H/Silent I). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Using the Video Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

The Video Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Choosing an Exposure Mode (n Mode (Movie Exposure Mode)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (n Flicker Scan). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials (n Dial Function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Sound Recording Options (Movie c). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Using the Playback Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

The Playback Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Automatically Rotating Portrait-Orientation Pictures for Playback (n). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Retouching Pictures (Edit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Retouching RAW Pictures (RAW Data Edit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Retouching JPEG Pictures (JPEG Edit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Combining Pictures (Image Overlay). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating Movie Stills (In-Movie Image Capture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Trimming movies (Movie Trimming). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Removing Protection from All Pictures (Reset Protect). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Cancelling a share order (Reset share Order). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Using the Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

The Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Formatting the card (Card Setup). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

7 Table of Contents
 Deleting all images (Card Setup). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Using “My Menu”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Adding Items to My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Managing “My Menu”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Using the Custom Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

The Custom Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

abcd AF/MF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

a AF/MF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

b AF/MF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

c AF/MF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

d AF/MF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

B Button/Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

B Button/Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

gh Release/g/Image Stabilizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

g Release/g/Image Stabilizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

h Release/g/Image Stabilizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

ijkl Disp/o/PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

i Disp/o/PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

j Disp/o/PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

k Disp/o/PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

l Disp/o/PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

mno Exp/ISO/BULB/A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

m Exp/ISO/BULB/A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

n Exp/ISO/BULB/A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

o Exp/ISO/BULB/A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

F A Custom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

F A Custom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

G X/WB/Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

G X/WB/Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

8 Table of Contents
pq Record/Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

p Record/Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

q Record/Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

I EVF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

I EVF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

rs K Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

r K Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

s K Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Combined Auto and Manual Focus (K AF+MF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button (K AEL/AFL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

C‑AF Tracking Sensitivity (K C‑AF Sensitivity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

C‑AF Starting Focus Target (K C‑AF Center Start). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

C-AF Center Target Priority (K C-AF Center Priority). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Choosing the AF Home Position (Y Set Home). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

AF-Target Selection (Y Select Screen Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Enabling AF-Target Selection Wrap (Y Loop Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

AF Target Size and Positioning (t Target Mode Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Matching AF-Target Selection to Camera Orientation (K Orientation Linked Y). . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Lens Focus Range (AF Limiter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Fine-Tuning Autofocus (AF Focus Adj.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Deleting Saved Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Enabling Fine-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Manual Focus Assist (MF Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Adjusting Focus During Exposures (Bulb/Time Focusing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials (K Dial Function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Burst Shooting Options (gL Settings/gH Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Reducing Flicker (Flicker Reduction). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Reducing Flicker in Live View (Anti-Flicker LV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Reducing Flicker in Photographs (Anti-Flicker Shooting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Choosing the control panel displays (K Control Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

9 Table of Contents
 Displaying On-Screen Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Live Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Adding information displays (G/Info Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

q Info (Playback information displays). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

q8 Info (Magnified playback information display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

LV-Info (Shooting information displays). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

LV OFF-Info (Shooting information displays). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

G Settings (Index/calendar display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Choosing the Playback Zoom Ratio (q8 Default Setting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Viewing camera images on TV (HDMI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Choosing a USB Connection Mode (USB Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Live Bulb Update Frequency (Live Bulb). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Live Time Update Frequency (Live Time). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Choosing the Shutter Speed (Composite Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (K Flicker Scan). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Fine-Tuning Exposure (Exposure Shift). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Shutter speeds when the flash fires (AX-Sync./ASlow Limit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Combinations of JPEG image sizes and compression rates (X Set). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Saving lens info (Lens Info Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Selecting the display style of the viewfinder (EVF Style). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Viewfinder display when shooting using the viewfinder (Style 1/Style 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Viewfinder Info Display Options (q Info Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Button Hold Options (Press-and-hold Time). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Correcting Fisheye Distortion (Fisheye Compensation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Connecting the Camera to External Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Connecting to External Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Precautions for Using Wi‑Fi and Bluetooth®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Disabling the Camera’s Wireless Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Connecting the Camera to a Smartphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Connecting to Smartphones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Pairing the Camera and Smartphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

10 Table of Contents
 Wireless Connection Standby Setting for When the Camera Is On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Wireless Settings for When the Camera Is Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Transferring images to a smartphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Automatically uploading images while the camera is off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Shooting remotely with a smartphone (Live View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Shooting remotely with a smartphone (Remote Shutter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Adding position information to images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Resetting wireless LAN/Bluetooth® settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Changing the password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Connecting the Camera to a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Copying pictures to a computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Installing the PC software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Using the Camera as a Webcam (Webcam). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Using the Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Names of parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Wired connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Wireless connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Deleting pairing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Shooting from the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Data transfer indicator of the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

MAC address of the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Precautions for using the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Connecting the Camera to TVs or External Displays (HDMI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing Pictures on a TV (HDMI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

HDMI Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Connecting the Camera to a TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Using a TV Remote (HDMI Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

11 Table of Contents
 Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

K Shooting Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

n Video Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

q Playback Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

e Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

C Custom Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Memory Card Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Memory Card Capacity: Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Memory Card Capacity: Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Information about Dust and Water Resistant Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Using your USB-AC adapter abroad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Interchangeable lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Lens and camera combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

MF Clutch Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Camera Displays for Lens SET and CALL Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Optional Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Grip (ECG-5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Designated External Flash Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Wireless remote control flash photography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

Other external flash units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Principal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Cleaning and storing the camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Cleaning the camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Inspecting and Cleaning the Image Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

12 Table of Contents
 Shooting tips and information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

The camera does not turn on even when a battery is loaded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

A dialog prompting you to choose a language is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

The number of AF targets is reduced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

The date and time has not been set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Set functions are restored to their factory default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Pictures are “washed out”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in the picture taken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Functions that cannot be selected from menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Functions that cannot be set from the super control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

The subject appears distorted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Lines appear in photographs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Only the subject is displayed and no information is shown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Focus mode cannot be changed from MF (manual focus). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Nothing is displayed on the monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Error codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Lithium-ion battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

USB-AC adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

General Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

SWARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

SCAUTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

SNOTICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

13 Table of Contents
Introduction
Before You Begin
Read and Follow Safety Precautions
To prevent incorrect operation resulting in fire or other damage to property or harm to yourself or to
others, read “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” (P. 459) in its entirety before using the camera.
While using the camera, consult this manual to ensure safe and correct operation. Be sure to keep the
manual in a safe place once it is read.
Our company will not be held liable for violations of local regulations arising from use of this product
outside the country or region of purchase.

Wireless LAN and Bluetooth®

The camera features built-in wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features outside the country
or region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations; be sure to check with local authorities
before use. Our company will not be held liable for the user’s failure to comply with local regulations.
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in areas where their use is prohibited. g “Disabling the
Camera’s Wireless Functions” (P. 357)

User Registration
Be sure to register your purchase. Visit our website for information on registering your products.

14 Before You Begin

Installing PC Software/Apps
OM Workspace
This computer application is used to download, view, and edit photos and movies recorded with the
camera. It can also be used to update the camera firmware. The software can be downloaded from our
website. Be prepared to provide the camera serial number when downloading the software.

OM Image Share
Download pictures marked for sharing to your smartphone. You can also operate the camera remotely
and take pictures from a smartphone. Visit our website for information about the application.

15 Before You Begin

About This Manual

How to find what you want to know

You can use the following methods to find what you want to know in this manual.

Search method Where to look

Search based on what you want to do g “Table of Contents”

Search based on names of buttons and parts of the camera g “Names of parts” (P. 18)

Search based on menus and terms displayed on the monitor g “Default Settings” (P. 390)

16 About This Manual

How to read this manual
Symbols in this manual
The following symbols are used throughout this manual.

p Indicates an operation performed using the front dial (a).

m Indicates an operation performed using the rear dial (b).

Indicates an operation performed by pressing the buttons (respectively the up, down,
FGHI
left, and right arrow buttons) on the arrow pad (c).

C Cautions and limitations.

B Tips and other helpful information for using the camera.

g References to other pages in this manual.

a
b

17 About This Manual

Names of parts
1 10
2 11
3
12
4
13
5 14
15 22
6
16 23
7
17
24
8 18
25
19
9 20
21

1 Mode dial lock (P. 43) 14 gY (sequential shooting/self-timer) button

2 Rear dial (P. 182, P. 244, P. 275, P. 319) (P. 101)
3 Shutter button (P. 43) 15 Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator (P. 101, P. 273)
4 R (movie)/4 button (P. 82, P. 192, P. 233, 16 Microphone jack cover
P. 275) 17 Remote cable terminal cover
5 F (exposure compensation) button (P. 89) 18 Connector cover

6 Front dial (P. 182, P. 244, P. 275, P. 319) 19 Strap eyelet (P. 21)

7 Lens attachment mark (P. 29) 20 Lens release button (P. 30)

8 Preview button (P. 169) 21 Lens lock pin

9 Mount (Remove the body cap before attaching 22 Microphone jack (A commercially available

the lens.) microphone can be connected. ø3.5 stereo mini

10 Mode dial (P. 43) plug) (P. 246)
11 Stereo microphone (P. 196, P. 246) 23 Remote cable terminal (P. 439)

12 ON/OFF lever (P. 22) 24 HDMI connector (type D) (P. 233, P. 337)

13 U (LV) (P. 40) 25 Micro-USB connector (P. 24, P. 371)

18 Names of parts
 7
8
9
1 10
11

3 12
13
4
14
5 15
6 16
17

22
18

23
19

20
21

1 Diopter adjustment dial (P. 40) 12 INFO button (P. 41, P. 181)
2 Monitor (touch screen) (P. 37, P. 40, P. 46, 13 OK button (P. 111, P. 182, P. 200)
P. 179, P. 198, P. 295) 14 Arrow pad (P. 182)
3 Viewfinder (P. 40, P. 349) 15 q (playback) button (P. 182)
4 Eye sensor (P. 40, P. 293) 16 D (erase) button (P. 189)
5 Eyecup (P. 438) 17 CHARGE (battery charge) lamp (P. 24)
6 MENU button (P. 200) 18 Connector cover
7 Hot shoe (P. 147, P. 432) 19 Tripod socket
8 AEL/AFL/0 (protect) button (P. 100, P. 299, 20 Battery compartment cover (P. 22)
P. 188) 21 Battery compartment lock (P. 22)
9 Fn lever (P. 233, P. 321) 22 Card compartment cover (P. 27)
10 Speaker 23 Card slot (P. 27)
11 ISO button (P. 98)

19 Names of parts
Preparation
Unpacking the box contents
At purchase, the package contains the camera and the following accessories.
If anything is missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased the camera.

Body cap 1 EP‑15 eyecup 1

Camera

Hot shoe cover 1

Strap USB cable CB‑USB12

DIGITAL CAMERA

Basic Manual

Lithium-ion battery BLS‑50 ENGLISH .................2 HRVATSKI ...........106 РУССКИЙ ............206

FRANÇAIS ............13 MAGYAR ............. 116 SLOVENČINA......217
ESPAÑOL ..............24 ITALIANO ............126 SLOVENŠČINA ...227
DEUTSCH..............35 LIETUVIŲ.............136 SVENSKA............237
БЪЛГАРИЯ ...........45 LATVIEŠU ...........146 TÜRKÇE ..............247
ČESKY...................55 NEDERLANDS ....156 Ὶ㜴皀䴭℀皁...........257
DANSK ..................65 NORSK ................166 Ὶ㜴皀修℀皁...........269
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΆ ............75 POLSKI................176 ไทย ......................279
EESTI.....................86 PORTUGUÊS ......186
SUOMI ...................96 ROMÂNIA ............196

Model No. : IM030

USB-AC adapter F‑5AC

Basic Manual

Warranty Card

1 The body cap, eyecup, and hot shoe cover come attached to or inserted in the camera.

C The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery before use (P. 24).

20 Unpacking the box contents

Attaching the Strap

1. Before attaching the strap, remove the end from the keeper
loop and loosen the strap as shown.

2. Pass the end of the strap through the strap eyelet and back
through the keeper loop.

3. Pass the end of the strap through the buckle

and tighten as shown.

Attach the other end of the strap to the other eyelet.

After attaching the strap, pull on it firmly to ensure that it will not come loose.

21 Attaching the Strap

Inserting and removing the battery

Inserting the battery

1. Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF

position.

1 ON/OFF lever

2. Open the battery compartment cover. 2

2

1
1 Battery compartment lock
2 Battery compartment cover

3. Insert the battery.

Use only BLS‑50 batteries (P. 20, P. 439).

1 Direction indicating mark

4. Close the battery compartment cover.

22 Inserting and removing the battery

BIt is recommended to set aside a backup battery for prolonged shooting in case the battery in use
drains.
BSee also “Batteries” (P. 426).

Removing the battery

Turn off the camera before opening or closing the battery
compartment cover. To remove the battery, first push the battery
lock knob in the direction of the arrow and then remove.

1
1 Battery lock knob

C Contact an authorized distributor or service center if you are unable to remove the battery. Do not
use force.
C Never remove batteries or memory cards while the card write indicator (P. 37) is displayed.

23 Inserting and removing the battery

Charging the Battery using the supplied USB-
AC adapter
C The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery before use.

1. Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF

position.

2. Connect the USB cable and USB-AC adapter and plug the adapter in.

BRefrain from using anything other than the USB cable (CB‑USB12) supplied with the camera
or sold separately.

1 1 USB-AC adapter (supplied)

2 2 AC outlet
3 USB cable (supplied)

1 4 Micro-USB connector

2
3
3

The CHARGE lamp lights while charging is

in progress. Charging takes about 4 hours.
The lamp goes out as the batteries reach
full charge. Remove the USB cable from the
camera.

C If a charging error occurs, the CHARGE lamp will blink. Disconnect and reconnect the USB
cable.

Charging the Battery using the supplied USB-AC

24 adapter
BCharging stops when the battery temperature is too high. It will resume after the battery
temperature falls.
BFor safety reasons, charging may take longer, or the battery may not reach full charge, when the
battery is charged in a high-temperature environment.

C The USB-AC Adapter

Be sure to unplug the USB-AC adapter for cleaning. Leaving the USB-AC adapter plugged in
during cleaning could result in injury or electric shock.

Charging the Battery using the supplied USB-AC

25 adapter
Charging the Battery Using an Optional BCS‑5
Battery Charger

1. Charge the battery.

1 2 3 1 Charging indicator
2 Direction indicating mark (J)
3 Lithium-ion battery
4 Lithium-ion charger

1 5 AC cable
3 6 6 AC outlet

4 2
5

Charging indicator

Charging in progress Lights orange

Charging complete Off

Charging error Blinks orange

(Charging time: Approximately 3 hours 30 minutes)

Unplug the charger when charging is complete.

Charging the Battery Using an Optional BCS‑5

26 Battery Charger
Inserting and Removing Memory Cards

Inserting the card

In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards”. The following types of SD memory card
(commercially available) can be used with this camera: SD, SDHC, and SDXC.
Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use or after being used with other cameras or
computers. g “Formatting the card (Card Setup)” (P. 264)

1. Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF position.

2. Open the card compartment cover.

3. Insert the card.

Slide the card in until it locks into place.

C Do not forcibly insert a damaged or deformed card. Doing

so may damage the card slot.

1 Terminal area

4. Close the card compartment cover.

Close it securely until you hear it click.
2

27 Inserting and Removing Memory Cards

Removing the card
Press the card in to eject it. Pull out the card.

C Never remove batteries or memory cards while the card write

indicator (P. 37) is displayed.

Usable cards
In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards”. The
following types of SD memory card (commercially available) can
be used with this camera: SD, SDHC, and SDXC. For the latest
information, please visit our website.

SD card write protect switch

The SD card body has a write protect switch. Setting the switch
to “LOCK” prevents data being written to the card. Return the LOCK

switch to the unlock position to enable writing.

C When recording movies, use an SD card that supports an SD speed class of 10 or higher.
C A UHS‑II or UHS‑I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better is required when:
- a resolution of [4K] or [C4K] is selected in the [nX] menu, or
- a bit rate of [A‑I] (All-Intra) is selected in the [nX] menu.
BThe data in the card will not be erased completely even after formatting the card or deleting the
data. When discarding, destroy the card to prevent leakage of personal information.
BAccess to some playback functions and the like may be restricted when the write-protect switch is in
the “LOCK” position.

28 Inserting and Removing Memory Cards

Attaching and removing lenses

Attaching a lens to the camera

For information on interchangeable lenses, see “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 428).

1. Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF position.

2. Remove the rear cap of the

lens and the body cap of the
camera.
1

1
2 2

3. Align the lens attachment mark (red) on the camera with the
alignment mark (red) on the lens, then insert the lens into the
camera’s body.

1 Lens attachment mark

4. Rotate the lens clockwise until it clicks into place.

C Do not press the lens release button.

C Do not touch internal portions of the camera.

29 Attaching and removing lenses

 5. Remove the front lens cap.

1
1
2 1 2

Removing Lenses

1. Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF position.

2. Hold the lens release button and rotate the lens as shown.
2

30 Attaching and removing lenses

Using the monitor
Rotate the monitor for ease of viewing. The angle of the monitor can be adjusted according to
conditions at the time of shooting.

180° 90°

270°

Gently rotate the monitor within its range of motion. Attempting to rotate the monitor beyond the
limits shown below could damage the connectors.

The camera can be configured to display a mirror image of the view through the lens or
automatically zoom power zoom lenses all the way out when the monitor is rotated for self
portraits. g “Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist)” (P. 336)

31 Using the monitor

Turning the camera on

1. Set the ON/OFF lever to the ON position.

When the camera is turned on, the monitor will turn on.
To turn the camera off, return the lever to the OFF position.

Battery level
Battery icon and battery level are
displayed.
v (green): The camera is ready to
shoot.
w (green): The battery is not full.
x (green): The battery is low.
y (blinks red): Charge the battery.

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

BThe Fn lever can be configured to turn the camera on and off. g C Custom Menu B > [Fn
Lever/Power Lever] (P. 275)

32 Turning the camera on

Sleep Mode
If no controls are used for a set period, the camera will automatically enter suspend operation to
reduce the drain on the batteries. This is referred to as “sleep mode”.
When the camera enters sleep mode, the monitor will turn off and operation will be suspended.
Pressing the shutter or q button reactivates the camera.
If no operations are performed for a set period after the camera enters sleep mode, the camera will
turn off automatically. The camera can be reactivated by turning it on again.

C The camera may require additional time to recover from sleep mode when [On] (enabled) is
selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-off Standby]. g “Wireless Settings for When
the Camera Is Off” (P. 362)
C The delay before the camera goes to sleep or turns off automatically can be selected in the
C Custom Menu. At default settings, the camera will go to sleep after one minute and turn off
automatically after four hours. g C Custom Menu s > [Sleep], [Auto Power Off] (P. 296)

33 Turning the camera on

Initial setup
After turning the camera on for the first time, perform the initial setup by choosing a language and
setting the camera clock.

C The file name is also included with the date and time information. Be sure to set the correct date
and time before using the camera. Some functions cannot be used if the date and time have not
been set.

1. Press the OK button when the initial setup dialog is displayed

prompting you to choose a language. Please select your language.
Veuillez choisir votre langue.
Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache.
Por favor, selecciona tu idioma.

2. Highlight the desired language using the front or rear dial or

Česky
W
Nederlands English
the FGHI buttons. Suomi Français Deutsch
Italiano Norsk
Polski Português(Pt) Русский
Español Svenska
Türkçe

Set

3. Press the OK button when the desired language is highlighted.

Česky
W
Nederlands English
Suomi Français Deutsch
Italiano Norsk
Polski Português(Pt) Русский
Español Svenska
Türkçe

Set

If you press the shutter button before pressing the OK button, the camera will exit to
shooting mode and no language will be selected. You can perform the initial setup by
turning the camera off and then on again to display the initial setup dialog and repeating the
process from Step 1.
The language can be changed at any time from the menu. g “What to Do If You Can’t
Read the Display” (P. 36)

34 Initial setup
 4. Set the date, time, and date format. X

Use the HI buttons to highlight items. Y M D Time

Use the FG buttons to change the highlighted item. 2022 Y/M/D
The time is displayed using a 24-hour clock.

Cancel

The clock can be adjusted at any time from the menu. g e Setup Menu > [m Settings]
(P. 262)

5. Press the OK button.

6. Highlight a time zone using the FG buttons and press the OK button.
Press the INFO button to enable or disable daylight saving time.

7. Press the OK button to set the clock.

BDate and time information is recorded on the card together with the images.
BIf the battery is removed from the camera and the camera is left for a while, the date and time may
be reset. If this happens, set the date and time using the menu. g e Setup Menu > [m Settings]
(P. 262)
BYou may also need to adjust the frame rate before shooting movies. g “Frame Size, Rate, and
Compression (nX)” (P. 141)

35 Initial setup
What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display
If you see unfamiliar characters or words in other languages, you may not have selected the language
you intended. Follow the steps below to choose another language.

1. Press the MENU button to เมนูถา่ ยภาพ 1

รีเซ็ ต / โหมดกําหนดเอง
view the menus.
11

2 โหมดภาพ
MENU KK YF
ส ัดส่วนภาพ 4:3
ดิจท
ิ ัลเทเลคอน ปิ ด
j/Y o
ระยะเวลาต่อภาพ/Time Lapse ปิ ด
กล ับ ตงค่
ั= า

2. Highlight the e (setup) tab

1 ตงค่
ั าการ์ด
เมนูตงค่
ั า

using the FG buttons and 2 X การตงค่

ั า
ไทย
press the OK button. W
j±0 k±0
s
ตรวจดูภาพ ปิ ด
การตงค่
ั า Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
เวอร์ช ันเฟิ ร์มแวร์
กล ับ ตงค่
ั า

3. Highlight [W] using the FG buttons and press the OK

ตงค่
ั าการ์ด
เมนูตงค่
ั า

button.
1

2 X การตงค่
ั า
W ไทย
s j±0 k±0
ตรวจดูภาพ ปิ ด
การตงค่
ั า Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
เวอร์ช ันเฟิ ร์มแวร์
กล ับ ตงค่
ั า

4. Highlight the desired language using the FGHI buttons

Česky
W
Nederlands English
and press the OK button. Suomi Français Deutsch
Italiano Norsk
Polski Português(Pt) Русский
Español Svenska
Türkçe

Back Set

36 What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display

Shooting
Information displays while shooting
Monitor display during still photography

8 9 10 11 20 21 22 26 27 28 29
BKT HDR FLK SET CALL

1 2 3 4 5 12 13 14 15 23 24
T W
1 ND8
LV 28 mm

6 7 16 17 18 19 41 25
58 FP RC BKT 99 FLK T W
28 mm
57 # S-IS AUTO 30 S-IS AUTO
56 p 31
WB WB
55 S-AF AUTO 32 AUTO
ISO-A
54 200 o 33 o
59
53 #-2.0 4:3 34 4:3
52 YF 35 YF
51 4K
hg
4K
30p 36 30p
50 +2 60
49 C AEL -3 +7 37 +7
1:02:03
48 P 250 F5.6 +2.0 1023 P

47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38

62
G 61
250 F5.6 +2.0

Monitor display during movie mode

4 63
±0 64 65 66 67
L BT. T W
R 709 off
28 mm
70 TC 00:00:00:12 DF M-IS 1 M-IS 1

WB WB
C-AF AUTO AUTO
ISO-A
200
M
M
4K 68 4K
30p 30p
+2
-3 +7 71
n
REC 0:00:12 69
250 F5.6 +2.0 1:20:47

37 Information displays while shooting

1 Card write indicator (P. 23, P. 28) 33 Drive mode (single-frame/sequential
2 Active Bluetooth® connection (P. 359) shooting/self-timer/vibration reduction/silent
3 Active connection to remote control (P. 377) photography/Pro Capture/High Res Shot)
4 Wireless LAN connection (P. 359) (P. 101, P. 137)
5 Pro Capture active (P. 107) 34 Aspect ratio (P. 138)
6 Super FP flash (P. 432) 35 Image quality (photos) (P. 139, P. 207)
7 RC mode (P. 434) 36 Record mode (movies) (P. 141, P. 242)
8 Bracketing (P. 216) 37 Available recording time (P. 424)
9 HDR (P. 224) 38 Number of storable still pictures (P. 422)
10 Handheld starlight (P. 68) 39 Highlight & shadow control (P. 166)
11 Multi focus shot (P. 68) 40 Top: Flash intensity control (P. 153)
12 Multiple exposure (P. 227) Bottom: Exposure compensation (P. 89)
13 P Keystone compensation (P. 230) 41 Level gauge (P. 42)

14 Fisheye Compensation (P. 353) 42 Exposure compensation value (P. 89)

15 Live ND shooting (P. 213) 43 Aperture value (P. 48, P. 51, P. 53, P. 55)

16 s S‑OVF 1 (P. 169, P. 176) 44 Shutter speed (P. 48, P. 51, P. 53, P. 55)

17 Digital tele-converter (P. 208) 45 Histogram (P. 42)

18 Time lapse shooting (P. 209) 46 Preview (P. 167)

19 Face priority/Eye priority (P. 126) 47 AE lock (P. 100, P. 299)

20 Anti-flicker shooting (P. 325) 48 Shooting mode (P. 43)

21 AF Targeting Pad 49 Custom mode (P. 79, P. 77)

50 Active connection to webcam (P. 374)
g C Custom Menu c > [AF Targeting
51 Bluetooth location tracking active (P. 374)
Pad] (P. 273)
52 Touch operation (P. 46)
22 Touch screen lock (P. 169)
53 Flash intensity control (P. 153)
23 Zoom operation direction/focal length
54 ISO sensitivity (P. 98, P. 117)
24 Internal temperature warning (P. 450)
55 AF mode (P. 118)
25 Flash (blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
56 Metering mode (P. 124)
charging completed) (P. 147)
57 Flash mode (P. 147, P. 149)
26 AF confirmation mark (P. 43)
58 Battery level (P. 32)
27 SET Function (P. 430)
59 Live guide recall (P. 64)
28 CALL Function (P. 430)
60 Flicker scan (P. 240, P. 343)
29 Dust reduction (P. 444)
61 Live view boost (P. 280)
30 Image stabilizer (P. 134)
62 Focus distance indicator (P. 317)
31 Picture Mode (P. 154, P. 206)
32 White balance (P. 129)

1 Shown in viewfinder only.

38 Information displays while shooting

63 Audio recording level 2 (P. 84, P. 246) 68 Movie (exposure) mode (P. 238)
64 Recording level meter (P. 246) 69 Recording time (displayed during recording)
65 a View assist (P. 83)
g Video Menu > [n Display Settings] 70 Time code

(P. 233) g Video Menu > [n HDMI Output]

66 Movie sound (P. 246) (P. 233)
67 Recording indicator (red border) 71 Silent control tab (P. 84)
g Video Menu > [Red Frame during
RREC] (P. 233)

2 Displayed only while audio recording level is being adjusted.

39 Information displays while shooting

Switching between displays
The camera uses an eye sensor to automatically switch between the monitor and viewfinder displays.
The monitor live view display and viewfinder also show information on camera settings. Options are
available for controlling display switching and choosing the information shown.

Framing photos in the monitor Framing photos in the viewfinder

1 2
1 Monitor 2 Viewfinder

S-IS AUTO S-IS AUTO

ISO-A ISO-A
200 200

YF YF
4K 4K
30p 30p

1:02:03 1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023 P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

Live view is displayed on the monitor. The viewfinder turns on automatically when you
bring it to your eye. When the viewfinder is lit up,
the monitor turns off.

If the viewfinder is not in focus, put your eye to the viewfinder 1

and focus the display by rotating the diopter adjustment dial.

2
1 U (LV) button
2 Diopter adjustment dial

Pressing the U (LV) button switches the display in the monitor from live view to the super control
panel. Putting your eye to viewfinder displays the view through the lens. The monitor turns off.
Shooting information can be viewed by pressing the INFO button when the super control panel is
displayed (P. 41).

BDisplay switching and viewfinder display options are available in the camera menus.
g C Custom Menu I > [EVF Auto Switch], [EVF Style] (P. 293)

40 Switching between displays

Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during
shooting using the INFO button.
INFO

1 2

S-IS AUTO

INFO
ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

INFO INFO

S-IS AUTO S-IS AUTO

INFO
ISO-A ISO-A
200 200

1:02:03 1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023 P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

4 3
1 Basic Information 3 Histogram display (Custom1)
2 Image Only 4 Level Gauge display (Custom2)

The information display screens can be switched in either direction by rotating the dial while
pressing the INFO button.
The items shown in the Custom 1 and Custom 2 displays can be chosen using [G/Info Settings] >
[LV-Info] (P. 333).
The information shown in movie (n) mode can differ from that displayed in still photography
mode. g n Video Menu > [n Display Settings] > [n Info Settings] (P. 233)
To choose the items displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway, highlight [Image Only]
in the [LV-Info] menu and press I.

41 Switching between displays

 Histogram display
A histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image is 1

displayed. The horizontal axis gives the brightness, the vertical axis 2
the number of pixels of each brightness in the image. Areas above 3 4
the upper limit at shooting are displayed in red, those below the 1 More 3 Dark
lower limit in blue, and those within the spot metering range in 2 Less 4 Bright
green. You can choose the upper and lower limits. g C Custom
Menu k > [Histogram Settings] (P. 281)

Highlights and Shadows

Highlights and shadows, defined according to the upper and lower limits for the histogram display,
are shown in red and blue. You can choose the upper and lower limits. g C Custom Menu k >
[Histogram Settings] (P. 281)

Level gauge display

The orientation of the camera is indicated. The “tilt” direction is indicated on the vertical bar and the
“horizon” direction on the horizontal bar.
The level gauge is intended as a guide only.
Calibrate the gauge if you find it is no longer truly plumb or level. g C Custom Menu r >
[Level Adjust] (P. 295)

Shooting Information
Shooting information can be viewed by pressing the INFO button when the super control panel
(P. 111) is displayed. Press the INFO button again to return to the super control panel.
Shooting information can be hidden using the [G/Info Settings] > [LV OFF-Info] option in
C Custom Menu i (P. 333).

2022.10.16 12:30:00
ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0
Natural
S ±0 ±0
INFO P 1/
250 F5.6 ISO
AUTO 1600
S-AF ±0 Normal WB
#
Off F 0.0 AUTO
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto
o p
4K
YF S-AF Off
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023 YF 1023

1 2
1 Super control panel
2 Shooting information

42 Switching between displays

Shooting still pictures
Use the mode dial to select the shooting mode, and then shoot the
1
image.

1 Indicator
2 Mode icon

Types of shooting modes

For how to use the various shooting modes, see the following.

P Program AE (P. 48)

A Aperture-priority AE (P. 51)

S Shutter-priority AE (P. 53)

M Manual exposure (P. 55)

Bulb/time (P. 58)

B
Live composite (P. 62)

0 AUTO (P. 64)

SCN Scene (P. 67)

ART Art filter (P. 74)

C Custom (P. 79)

BFor information on the n position on the mode dial, see “Recording movies in movie mode
(n)” (P. 83).

43 Shooting still pictures

1. Press the mode dial lock to unlock it, and then turn to set the mode you wish to use.

When the mode dial lock has been pressed down, the mode dial is locked. Each time you
press the mode dial lock, it switches between locked/released.

2. Frame the shot.

C Be careful that your fingers or the camera strap do not obstruct the lens or AF illuminator.

Landscape position

Portrait position

44 Shooting still pictures

 3. Adjust the focus.
Position the AF frame over your subject.
S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

1
1 AF frame

Lightly press the shutter button down to the first position

(press the shutter button halfway).

The AF confirmation mark (N) will be displayed, and a green 2

frame (AF target) will be displayed in the focus location. T W
28 mm
S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

1
1 AF target
2 AF confirmation mark

C If the camera is unable to focus, the AF confirmation mark will flash (P. 445).
C The AF frame varies with the option chosen for AF-target mode. Change the area (P. 91) and
position (P. 95) of the AF target as required.
C The AF frame is not displayed when [q] is chosen for AF-target mode (P. 91).

4. Release the shutter.

Press the shutter button all the way (fully).
The camera will release the shutter and take a picture.

BYou can focus and take pictures using touch controls. g “Shooting with touch screen
operations” (P. 46)

45 Shooting still pictures

Shooting with touch screen operations
You can tap the subject to focus and take a photograph.
S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

Tap a subject to focus and automatically release the shutter. This option is not available in
T mode B (bulb), in n (movie) mode, or when [R AF] or [R AF J] is selected for AF
mode (P. 118).

U Shooting with touch screen operations is disabled.

Tap to display an AF target and focus on the subject in the selected area. You can use
V the touch screen to choose the position and size of the focus frame. Photographs can be
taken by pressing the shutter button.

Tap to choose the subject used for focus when multiple portrait subjects are detected.
L is displayed when an option other than [Off] is selected for [I Face Priority]
L (P. 126). Subject selection is not available when [0] (high-speed movie recording) is
selected for [nX] in n (movie) mode (P. 141).

Tapping an icon switches the settings.

C Do not touch the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
C Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.

46 Shooting still pictures

Previewing the subject (V)

1. Tap the subject in the display.

An AF target will be displayed.
Use the slider to choose the size of the frame. S-IS AUTO

14
10
7
5
Off
3x

P 250 F5.6 0.0

Tap X to turn off the display of the AF target.

2. Use the slider to adjust the size of the AF target, and then tap a to zoom in at the frame
position.
Use your finger to scroll the display when the picture is
zoomed in.

10x

Tap Z to cancel the zoom display.

The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
- When buttons or dials are in use
You can disable the touch screen operation. g C Custom Menu r > [Touchscreen Settings]
(P. 295)

47 Shooting still pictures

Letting the camera choose aperture and
shutter speed (P: Program AE)
The camera chooses the optimal aperture and shutter speed according to subject brightness.

1. Rotate the mode dial to P.

2. Focus and check the display.

S-IS AUTO

Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 89) ISO-A
200

Rear dial: Program shift (P. 50) YF

The shutter speed and aperture chosen by the camera are

4K
30p

displayed.
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

1 2 3
1 Exposure mode
2 Shutter speed
3 Aperture

Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F button. Press the F button and
then rotate the front or rear dial.

3. Take pictures.

BYou can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g “Assigning Roles to the
Front and Rear Dials (K Dial Function)” (P. 319)
BYou can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also be
assigned other roles. g “Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function)” (P. 321)

Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter

48 speed (P: Program AE)
Subject Too Dark or Too Bright
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed and aperture displays will flash
as shown.

Display Problem/solution

Large aperture (low f/-number)/

slow shutter speed The subject is too dark.
Use a flash.
60" F2.8

The subject is too bright.

The limits of the camera metering system have been
Small aperture (high f/-number)/ exceeded. Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density) filter to
fast shutter speed reduce the amount of light entering the camera.
Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in
8000 F22 I (silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound
(Silent I)” (P. 106), “Performing the sequential/self-timer
shooting” (P. 101)

BWhen [K ISO] is not set to [AUTO], optimal exposure may be achieved by changing the setting.
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 98)
B The aperture value shown when the displays flash varies with the lens and focal length.

Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter

49 speed (P: Program AE)
Program Shift
Without changing exposure, you can choose from different combinations of aperture and shutter
speed selected automatically by the camera. This is known as program shift.

1. Rotate the rear dial until the camera displays the desired
S-IS AUTO
combination of aperture and shutter speed.

The shooting mode indicator in the display changes from P ISO-A

200

to Ps while program shift is in effect. To end program shift, YF

4K
30p

rotate the rear dial in the opposite direction until only P is 1:02:03
Ps 250 F5.6 0.0 1023
displayed.
1
1 Program shift

BYou can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the display reflects the effects of
exposure compensation. g C Custom Menu j > [Live View Boost] (P. 280)

Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter

50 speed (P: Program AE)
Choosing aperture (A: Aperture-Priority AE)
In this mode, you choose the aperture (f/-number) and the camera automatically sets the shutter
speed for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Lower aperture values (larger apertures)
reduce the depth of the area that appears to be in focus (depth of field), blurring the background.
Higher aperture values (smaller apertures) increase the depth of the area that appears to be in focus in
front of and behind the subject.

F2.8 F4.0 F5.6 F8.0 F11

1 2

1 Lower aperture values… 2 Higher aperture values…

…reduce depth of field and increase blur. …increase depth of field.

1. Rotate the mode dial to A.

2. Choose an aperture.
S-IS AUTO

Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 89) ISO-A
200

Rear dial: Aperture YF

4K
30p

1:02:03
250 F5.6 0.0 1023

1
1 Aperture

The shutter speed selected automatically by the camera will appear in the display.
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F button. Press the F button and
then rotate the front or rear dial.

3. Take pictures.

BYou can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g “Assigning Roles to the
Front and Rear Dials (K Dial Function)” (P. 319)

51 Choosing aperture (A: Aperture-Priority AE)

BYou can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also be
assigned other roles. g “Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function)” (P. 321)
BYou can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the display reflects the effects of
exposure compensation. g C Custom Menu j > [Live View Boost] (P. 280)
BYou can stop aperture down to the selected value and preview depth of field. g “Assigning
functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 167)

Subject Too Dark or Too Bright

If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed display will flash as shown.

Display Problem/solution

Slow shutter speed

Underexposure.
60" F5.6 Choose a lower aperture value.

Overexposure.
Choose a higher aperture value.
Fast shutter speed If the subject is still overexposed at the higher value, the limits of the
camera metering system have been exceeded. Use a third-party ND
8000 F5.6 (Neutral Density) filter to reduce the amount of light entering the camera.
Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in I (silent) mode.
g “Shooting without shutter sound (Silent I)” (P. 106), “Performing the
sequential/self-timer shooting” (P. 101)

BWhen [K ISO] is not set to [AUTO], optimal exposure may be achieved by changing the setting.
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 98)

52 Choosing aperture (A: Aperture-Priority AE)

Choosing shutter speed (S: Shutter-Priority
AE)
In this mode, you choose the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets aperture for optimal
exposure according to subject brightness. Faster shutter speeds appear to “freeze” fast-moving
subjects. Slower shutter speeds add blur to moving objects, lending them a sense of motion for a
dynamic effect.

60” 15 30 60 125 250 8000

1 2

1 Slower shutter speeds… 2 Faster shutter speeds…

…produce dynamic shots with a sense of …“freeze” the motion of fast-moving subjects.
motion.

1. Rotate the mode dial to S.

2. Choose a shutter speed.

S-IS AUTO

Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 89) ISO-A
200

Rear dial: Shutter speed YF

Choose from shutter speeds of 1/8000–60 s.

4K
30p

Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available S 250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03
1023

in silent mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound 1

(Silent I)” (P. 106), “Performing the sequential/self-timer 1 Shutter speed
shooting” (P. 101)
The aperture selected automatically by the camera will appear in the display.
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F button. Press the F button and
then rotate the front or rear dial.

3. Take pictures.

53 Choosing shutter speed (S: Shutter-Priority AE)

BYou can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g “Assigning Roles to the
Front and Rear Dials (K Dial Function)” (P. 319)
BYou can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also be
assigned other roles. g “Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function)” (P. 321)
B You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the display reflects the effects of
exposure compensation. g C Custom Menu j > [Live View Boost] (P. 280)
BTo achieve the effect of a slow shutter in brightly-lit settings in which slow shutter speeds are
not otherwise available, use the live ND filter. g “Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light (Live ND
Shooting)” (P. 213)
BDepending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display caused by flicker
from fluorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be configured to reduce the effects of flicker
during live view or when pictures are taken. g “Reducing Flicker in Photographs (Anti-Flicker
Shooting)” (P. 327), “Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (K Flicker Scan)” (P. 343)

Subject Too Dark or Too Bright

If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the aperture display will flash as shown.

Display Problem/solution

Low aperture value

Underexposure.
2000 F2.8 Choose a slower shutter speed.

Overexposure.
High aperture value Choose a faster shutter speed. Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are
available in silent mode.
125 F22 If the subject is still overexposed at the higher speed, the limits of the
camera metering system have been exceeded. Use a third-party ND
(Neutral Density) filter to reduce the amount of light entering the camera.

BWhen [K ISO] is not set to [AUTO], optimal exposure may be achieved by changing the setting.
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 98)
B The aperture value shown when the displays flash varies with the lens and focal length.

54 Choosing shutter speed (S: Shutter-Priority AE)

Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M:
Manual Exposure)
In this mode, you choose the aperture and shutter speed. You can adjust settings according to
your goals, for example by combining fast shutter speeds with small apertures (high f/-numbers) for
increased depth of field.

1. Rotate the mode dial to M.

2. Adjust aperture and shutter speed.

Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Aperture
Rear dial: Shutter speed
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and 60 s.
Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in silent mode. g “Shooting without
shutter sound (Silent I)” (P. 106)
The display shows the difference between the exposure
S-IS AUTO

produced by the selected aperture and shutter speed and

the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The display ISO-A
200

will flash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV. YF

4K
30p

1:02:03
M 250 F5.6 -2.0 1023

1
1 Difference from optimal
exposure

When [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO], ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted
for optimal exposure at the selected exposure settings. [K ISO] defaults to [AUTO].
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 98)

3. Take pictures.

Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M: Manual

55 Exposure)
BYou can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g “Assigning Roles to the
Front and Rear Dials (K Dial Function)” (P. 319)
BYou can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also be
assigned other roles. g “Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function)” (P. 321)
B You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the display reflects the effects of
exposure compensation. g C Custom Menu j > [Live View Boost] (P. 280)
BDepending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display caused by flicker
from fluorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be configured to reduce the effects of flicker
during live view or when pictures are taken. g “Reducing Flicker in Photographs (Anti-Flicker
Shooting)” (P. 327), “Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (K Flicker Scan)” (P. 343)

Subject Too Dark or Too Bright

If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure with [AUTO] selected for [K ISO], the ISO
sensitivity display will flash as shown.

Display Problem/solution

ISO-A Overexposure.
L64 Choose a higher aperture value or faster shutter speed.

Underexposure.
Choose a lower aperture value or slower shutter speed.
ISO-A If the warning does not clear from the display, choose a higher value for ISO
6400 sensitivity. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 98), C Custom Menu
m[K ISO-Auto Set] > [Upper Limit / Default] (P. 284)

Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M: Manual

56 Exposure)
Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation is available when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO]. Because
exposure compensation is performed by adjusting ISO sensitivity, aperture and shutter speed are not
affected. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 98), C Custom Menu m[K ISO-Auto Set] >
[Upper Limit / Default] (P. 284)

1. Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial. S-IS AUTO

Exposure compensation is added to the exposure difference

shown in the display. ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
M 250 F5.6 -2.0 1023

1 2
1 Exposure compensation
2 Exposure compensation
plus exposure difference

Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M: Manual

57 Exposure)
Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)
Select this mode to leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can preview the photo in live
view and end the exposure when the desired results have been achieved. Use when long exposures are
required, for example when photographing night scenes or fireworks.

C We recommend that the camera be securely fixed to a tripod for long exposures.

“Bulb” and “Live Bulb” Photography

The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. Releasing the button ends the exposure.
The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
When live bulb photography is selected, you can check the results in the live view display and end
exposure when you want to.

“Time” and “Live Time” Photography

The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end the exposure, press
the shutter button all the way down a second time.
The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
When live time photography is selected, you can check the results in the live view display and end
exposure when you want to.

Bulb/Time Photography

1. Rotate the mode dial to B.

58 Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)

2. Select [BULB] (for bulb photography) or
[TIME] (time photography).
At default settings, the selection is made ISO
200

with the rear dial. YF

4K
30p

G 1:02:03
B BULB F5.6 1023

1
1 Bulb or time photography

3. Press the MENU button. Live Bulb

You will be prompted to choose the interval at which the 1sec

preview is updated. Display Count

ISO L64 ~ 24 times
ISO 400 ~ 19 times
ISO 800 ~ 14 times
ISO 1600 ~ 9 times
Back Set

4. Highlight an interval using FG.

5. Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

The menus will be displayed.

6. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

If an option other than [Off] is selected, [LIVE BULB] or [LIVE TIME] will appear in the
display.

7. Adjust aperture.
At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using the front
dial. ISO
200

YF
4K
30p

G 1:02:03
B BULB F5.6 1023

1
1 Aperture

59 Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)

 8. Take pictures.
In bulb and live bulb modes, keep the shutter button pressed. The exposure ends when the
button is released.
In time and live time modes, press the shutter button all the way down once to start the
exposure and again to end it.
During live time photography, you can refresh the preview by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
The exposure ends automatically when the time selected for [Bulb/Time Timer] is reached.
g C Custom Menu n > [Bulb/Time Timer] (P. 285)
[Noise Reduct.] is applied after shooting. The display shows the time remaining until
the process is complete. You can choose the conditions under which noise reduction is
performed. g C Custom Menu m > [Noise Reduct.] (P. 284)

C Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.

C Bulb photography is used in place of live bulb photography when multiple exposure, keystone
compensation, or fisheye correction is in effect.
C Time photography is used in place of live time photography when multiple exposure, keystone
compensation, or fisheye correction is in effect.
C During shooting, there are limits on the settings for the following functions.
- Sequential shooting, self-timer shooting, interval timer photography, AE bracketing, flash
bracketing, focus bracketing, focus stacking, etc.
C [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 134) turns off automatically.
C Depending on camera settings, the temperature, and the situation, you may notice noise or bright
spots in the monitor. These may sometimes appear in pictures even when [Noise Reduct.] is
enabled. g C Custom Menu m > [Noise Reduct.] (P. 284)
BStarry sky AF can be used for shots of the night sky. g “Choosing a focus mode (AF
Mode) (P. 118), “Using Starry Sky AF” (P. 121)
BDisplay brightness can be adjusted during bulb/time photography. g C Custom Menu n >
[Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 285)
BDuring bulb/time photography, display brightness is adjusted to make even poorly-lit subjects easy
to see. You can choose whether to prioritize image quality or display speed. g C Custom Menu
j > [Live View Boost] (P. 280)
BIn mode B (bulb), you can adjust focus manually while the exposure is in progress. This allows you
to defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure. g C Custom Menu d >
[Bulb/Time Focusing] (P. 318)

60 Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)

BNoise
While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena
occur when the temperature rises in the image sensor or image sensor internal drive circuit,
causing current to be generated in those sections of the image sensor that are not normally
exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with a high ISO setting in a high-
temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the camera activates the noise reduction function.
g C Custom Menu m > [Noise Reduct.] (P. 284)

61 Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)

Lighten Blending (B: Live Composite
Photography)
Leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can view the light trails left by fireworks or stars and
photograph them without changing the exposure of the background. The camera combines multiple
shots and records them as a single photograph.

C We recommend that the camera be securely fixed to a tripod for live composite photography.

1. Rotate the mode dial to B.

2. Select [LIVE COMP].

At default settings, the selection is made
with the rear dial.
Press shutter button once
to prepare for composite
shooting.
1:02:03
B LIVE COMP F5.6 –0.3 1023

1
1 Live composite
photography

3. Press the MENU button. Composite Settings

The [Composite Settings] menu will be displayed. 1sec

Exposure time per image.

Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.

Back Set

4. Highlight an exposure time using FG.

Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.

5. Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

The menus will be displayed.

Lighten Blending (B: Live Composite

62 Photography)
 6. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

7. Adjust aperture.
At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using the front dial.

8. Press the shutter button all the way down to ready the camera.
The camera is ready to shoot when [Ready for composite
shooting] is displayed.
ISO
200

YF
Ready for composite shooting 4K
30p

1:02:03
B LIVE COMP F5.6 –0.3 1023

9. Press the shutter button to start shooting.

Live composite photography will start. The display will be updated after each exposure.

10. Press the shutter button again to end shooting.

Shooting ends automatically after the time selected for [Live Composite Timer]. Other
options can be selected. g C Custom Menu n > [Live Composite Timer] (P. 285)
The maximum recording time available varies with battery level and shooting conditions.

C Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.

C The following cannot be used:
- sequential shooting, the self-timer, interval-timer photography, AE bracketing, flash bracketing,
focus bracketing, HDR photography, High Res Shot, focus stacking, multiple exposure, keystone
compensation, the live ND filter, and fisheye correction.
C [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 134) turns off automatically.
BStarry sky AF can be used for shots of the night sky. g “Choosing a focus mode (AF
Mode) (P. 118), “Using Starry Sky AF” (P. 121)
BDisplay brightness can be adjusted during live composite photography. g C Custom Menu
n > [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 285)
BThe exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can be chosen in
advance using the menus. g C Custom Menu n > [Composite Settings] (P. 285)

Lighten Blending (B: Live Composite

63 Photography)
Letting the camera choose the settings (AUTO
mode)
The camera adjusts settings to suit the scene; all you have to do is press the shutter button. Use live
guides to easily adjust such parameters as color, brightness, and background blurring.

1. Rotate the mode dial to 0.

In auto mode, the camera automatically selects the scene mode option appropriate to your
subject when you press the shutter button halfway. Once the selection has been made, the
0 icon in the bottom left corner of the display will be replaced by the icon for the chosen
scene.

2. To adjust shooting settings, display the live guide by pressing Change Color Saturation

the OK button.

1
1 Guide item

Use FG to highlight an item in the live guide and press OK to display a slider.

Letting the camera choose the settings (AUTO

64 mode)
 3. Use FG to position the slider and choose a level. Clear & Vivid

Flat & Muted

1
1 Slider

Press the OK button to save changes.

To exit, press the MENU button.
When [Shooting Tips] is selected, use FG to highlight the item and press the OK button
to display the detail.
The effect of the selected level is visible in the display.
If [Blur Background] or [Express Motions] is selected, the display will return to normal, but
the selected effect will be visible in the final photograph.

4. To set multiple live guides, repeat Steps 2 and 3. Change Color Saturation

A check is displayed on the guide item for live guides that are already set.
To clear the live guides from the display, press the MENU button.

C [Blur Background] and [Express Motions] cannot be set at the same time.

5. Take pictures.

BLive guide settings can also be adjusted using touch controls.

BIf [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to
RAW+JPEG.
C Live guide settings are not applied to the RAW copy.
C Pictures may appear grainy at some live guide setting levels.
C Changes to live guide setting levels may not be visible in the monitor.
C Frame rates drop the closer the [Express Motions] slider is to [Blurred Motion].
C The flash cannot be used when a live guide is set.

Letting the camera choose the settings (AUTO

65 mode)
C Choosing live guide settings that exceed the limits of the camera exposure meters may result in
pictures that are overexposed or underexposed.

Letting the camera choose the settings (AUTO

66 mode)
Shooting in scene mode (SCN mode)
The camera automatically optimizes settings for the subject or scene.

1. Rotate the mode dial to SCN.

2. Use FGHI to highlight a scene and press the OK button.

People Nightscapes

Motion Scenery

Indoors Close-ups

3. Use HI to highlight a scene mode and press the OK button. Portrait

4. Take pictures.
To choose a different scene, press the OK button. Next, press the MENU button to return to
the scene-selection display.

67 Shooting in scene mode (SCN mode)

Types of scene modes
People

B Portrait Suitable for portrait shooting. Brings out skin texture.

Smooths out skin tones and texture. The camera records two
E e-Portrait
pictures: one with the effect applied and one without.

Suitable for portraits featuring a landscape in the background. Blues,

D Portrait + Landscape
greens, and skin tones are captured beautifully.

Suitable for portrait shooting against a background of night view.

Attach an external flash unit designed for use with the camera
J Portrait + Nightscape
(P. 147). We recommend that you use a tripod and either OM Image
Share or an optional remote control (P. 366, P. 380).

S Children Suitable for photographs of children and other active subjects.

Nightscapes
Suitable for tripod shooting of night scenes. We recommend that
G Nightscape you use a tripod and either OM Image Share or an optional remote
control (P. 366, P. 380).

Suitable for portrait shooting against a background of night view.

Attach an external flash unit designed for use with the camera
J Portrait + Nightscape
(P. 147). We recommend that you use a tripod and either OM Image
Share or an optional remote control (P. 366, P. 380).

Suitable for shooting night scenes without a tripod. Reduces blur

O Handheld Starlight when shooting low light/illuminated scenes. The camera makes eight
exposures and combines them into a single photograph.

Suitable for shooting fireworks at night. We recommend that you use

K Fireworks a tripod and either OM Image Share or an optional remote control
(P. 366, P. 380).

68 Shooting in scene mode (SCN mode)

 The camera automatically shoots multiple images, takes newly bright
areas only, and composites them into a single image. With normal
long exposure, an image of light trace such as star trails with bright
buildings tends to get too bright. You can capture them without
over exposure while checking the progress. Press the shutter button
to start shooting, then view the changing result in the monitor and
T Light Trails
press the shutter button again to end shooting once the desired
result is achieved (maximum 3 hours). We recommend that you use
a tripod and either OM Image Share or an optional remote control
(P. 366, P. 380).
Advanced settings can be accessed via live composite
photography (dark and light field composite) in mode B (P. 62)

Motion
Suitable for fast action shooting. The camera will take photos while
C Sport
the shutter button is pressed.

S Children Suitable for photographs of children and other active subjects.

Choose to blur the background behind moving objects. The camera

W Panning chooses the optimal shutter speed for panning shots based on
camera motion.

Scenery

F Landscape Suitable for landscape shooting.

Y Sunset Suitable for shooting the sunset.

Suitable for shooting at snow-capped mountains, seascapes in the

L Beach & Snow
sun, and other whitish scenes.

Take photos that can afterwards be joined on a computer to create a

panorama.
X Panorama
For information on taking photos using this feature, see “Shooting
a Panorama” (P. 71).

69 Shooting in scene mode (SCN mode)

 Suitable for high-contrast scenes. Each time the shutter button
is pressed, the camera takes four shots that are automatically
A Backlight HDR
combined to form a single, correctly exposed image when shooting
is complete.

Indoors

N Candlelight Suitable for shots of candlelit scenes. Warm colors are preserved.

Disable camera sounds and lights in situations in which they may be

R Silent I
unwelcome.

B Portrait Suitable for portrait shooting. Brings out skin texture.

Smooths out skin tones and texture. The camera records two
E e-Portrait
pictures: one with the effect applied and one without.

S Children Suitable for photographs of children and other active subjects.

Suitable for high-contrast scenes. Each time the shutter button

is pressed, the camera takes four shots that are automatically
A Backlight HDR
combined to form a single, correctly exposed image when shooting
is complete.

Close-ups

P Macro Suitable for close-ups.

Q Nature Macro Suitable for vivid close-ups of flowers or insects.

Suitable for photos of timetables or other documents. The camera

M Documents
heightens the contrast between the text and background.

The camera takes eight photos, varying the focus distance with each
U Multi Focus Shot
shot.

BIn [Panning], W is displayed during panning detection, and V is displayed when nothing is
detected.
C To maximize the benefits of the scene modes, some of the shooting function settings are disabled.

70 Shooting in scene mode (SCN mode)

C Some time may be needed to record pictures taken using [e-Portrait]. In addition, when the image
quality mode is [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.
C Movies cannot be recorded using [e-Portrait], [Handheld Starlight], [Panorama], or [Backlight
HDR].
C Movie recording is not available in [Light Trails] mode when 0 (high-speed movie recording) is
selected for [nX].
C [Handheld Starlight] pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality will be recorded in
RAW+JPEG format, with the first frame recorded as a RAW image and the final composite as a JPEG
image.
C [Backlight HDR] records HDR-processed images in JPEG format. When the image quality mode is
set to [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.
C When using a lens with an image stabilizer switch in [Panning], turn the image stabilizer switch off.
Sufficient panning effects may not be obtained in bright conditions. Use a commercially available
ND filter to obtain effects more easily.
C Shooting will end if zoom is adjusted while photographs are being taken in [Multi Focus Shot]
mode.
C No pictures can be taken in [Multi Focus Shot] mode when a Four-Thirds lens is attached.

Shooting a Panorama
Pictures taken using this option can be joined together to form a panorama. You will need to install
the latest version of OM Workspace on your computer to join pictures together to form a panorama.
g “Installing the PC software” (P. 373)

1. Highlight [Panorama] in the scene mode menu (P. 67) and press the OK button.

2. Use FGHI to choose a pan direction.

3. Take a picture, using the guides to frame the shot.

Focus, exposure, and other settings are fixed at the values
for the first shot. ISO-A
200

250 F5.6 1023

71 Shooting in scene mode (SCN mode)

4. Take the remaining images, framing each shot so that the guides overlap with the previous
picture.

ISO-A
200

250 F5.6 1023 [2] Exit [3] Exit

A panorama may include up to 10 images. A warning indicator (c) is displayed after the
tenth shot.

C During panorama shooting, the image previously taken for position alignment will not be
displayed. With the frames or other markers for display in the images as a guide, set the
composition such that the edges of the overlapping images overlap within the frames.

5. After taking the last shot, press OK to end the series.

72 Shooting in scene mode (SCN mode)

Using art filters (ART mode)

1. Rotate the mode dial to ART.

2. Use HI to highlight a filter.

ART
1
Effect
Off

Pop Art 1

3. Press G, highlight an effect using HI, and press the OK button.

4. Take pictures.
Press the OK button to choose a different art filter. If effects are displayed, press F.
The effects available vary with the selected filter (Soft Focus Effect, Pin Hole Effect, Frame
Effect, White Edge Effect, Star Light Effect, Color Filter, Monochrome Color, Blur Effect, or
Shade Effect).

73 Using art filters (ART mode)

Types of art filters
Pop Art I/II Creates an image that emphasizes the beauty of color.

Soft Focus Creates an image that expresses a soft tone atmosphere.

Creates an image that expresses warm light by scattering overall

Pale&Light Color I/II
light and slightly overexposing the image.

Creates a high-quality image by softening both shadows and

Light Tone
highlights.

Creates an image that expresses the roughness of black and white

Grainy Film I/II
images.

Creates an image that looks as if it was taken using an old or toy

Pin Hole I/II/III
camera by dimming the image perimeter.

Creates a miniature-like image by emphasizing saturation and

Diorama I/II
contrast, and blurring unfocused areas.

Creates an image that expresses a surreal atmosphere. Cross Process

Cross Process I/II
II creates an image that emphasizes magenta.

Creates a high-quality image by drawing out shadows and softening

Gentle Sepia
the overall image.

Creates an image that emphasizes the difference between brightness

Dramatic Tone I/II
and darkness by partially increasing contrast.

Creates an image that emphasizes edges and adds an illustrative

Key Line I/II
style.

Creates a soft, bright image by removing dark areas, blending pale

Watercolor I/II
colors on a white canvas, and further softening contours.

Expresses an everyday shot in a nostalgic, vintage tone using printed

Vintage I/II/III
film discoloration and fading.

Impressively expresses a subject by extracting colors you want to

Partial Color I/II/III
emphasize and keeping everything else monotone.

74 Using art filters (ART mode)

 The “bleach bypass” effect, which you may recognize from motion
Bleach Bypass I/II pictures and the like, can be used to great effect in shots of
streetscapes or metal objects.

Instant Film A contemporary take on the shadow and skin tones typical of film.

Records images using all art filter options with a single shot. Press
ART BKT (ART bracketing) the INFO button on the selection screen to select a filter to record
with.

II and III are altered versions of the original (I).

C To maximize the benefits of the art filters, some of the shooting function settings are disabled.
C If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality (P. 139), image quality will automatically be set to
RAW+JPEG. Art filters apply only to the JPEG copy.
C Depending on the scene, the effects of some settings may not be visible, while in other cases tone
transitions may be ragged or the image rendered more “grainy”.
C Some effects may not be visible during movie recording.
C Playback may differ according to the filters, effects, or movie quality settings applied.

75 Using art filters (ART mode)

Using [Partial Color]
Record only selected hues in color.

1. Rotate the mode dial to ART.

2. Select [Partial Color I/II/III] in the art filter menu.

3. Highlight an effect and press the OK button.

A color ring appears in the display.
Color

4. Rotate the front or rear dial to choose a color.

The effect is visible in the display.

5. Take pictures.
To choose a different color after shooting, rotate the front or rear dial to display the color
ring.

76 Using art filters (ART mode)

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial (C
Custom mode)
Frequently-used settings and shooting modes can be saved as custom modes and recalled as needed
simply by rotating the mode dial. Saved settings can also be recalled directly from the menus.

Save settings to positions C through C4.

At default settings, custom modes are equivalent to mode P.

Saving Settings (Assign to Custom Mode)

1. Adjust camera settings as desired.

Rotate the mode dial to a setting other than AUTO, SCN, or ART, or movie.
For information on the settings that can be saved, see “Default Settings” (P. 390).

2. Press the MENU button to view the menus.

3. Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in 6 Shooting Menu 1

11
Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes
and press the I button. 2 Picture Mode
KK YF
Image Aspect 4:3
Digital Tele-converter Off
j/Y o
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off
Back Set

[Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.

4. Highlight [Assign to Custom Mode] using the FG buttons

Reset
Reset / Custom Modes
Basic
and press the I button. Assign to Custom Mode
Custom Mode Save Settings
Recall from Custom Mode

Back Set

[Assign to Custom Mode] options will be displayed.

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial (C

77 Custom mode)
5. Highlight the desired custom mode ([Custom Mode C]– Assign to Custom Mode
Custom Mode C --
[Custom Mode C4]) using FG buttons and press the I Custom Mode C2 --

button. Custom Mode C3 --

Custom Mode C4 --
The menu for the selected custom mode will be displayed.

Back Set

6. Highlight [Set] using the FG buttons and press the OK Custom Mode C

button. Set

Set current shooting

mode and settings.

Back Set

The [Assign to Custom Mode] menu will be displayed again.

Any existing settings will be overwritten.
To restore default settings for the selected custom mode, highlight [Reset] and press the OK
button.

7. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial (C

78 Custom mode)
Using Custom Modes (C)
To recall all saved settings, including the shooting mode:

Recalling Settings with the Mode Dial

1. Rotate the mode dial to C.

The camera will recall the settings for [Custom Mode C] previously saved using [Reset /
Custom Modes] > [Assign to Custom Mode] in Shooting Menu 1 (P. 77).

2. Take pictures.

By default, changes made after recall will not be applied to the stored settings. The saved settings
will be restored when next you select the custom mode with the mode dial.
If [Hold] is selected for [Custom Mode Save Settings], custom modes will be updated
automatically to reflect any changes made to settings while the mode is selected during shooting.
The changes will remain stored in the custom mode even after the mode dial is rotated to another
setting. Custom modes can be used in much the same way as modes P, A, S, M, and B.

Recalling Saved Settings

In modes other than AUTO, SCN, ART, and n, you can recall the settings stored in custom modes
[Custom Mode C] through [Custom Mode C4] but not the shooting mode. The shooting mode
remains that currently selected with the mode dial.

Recalling settings with the mode dial rotated to C restores all saved settings, including the shooting
mode.

1. Press the MENU button to view the menus.

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial (C

79 Custom mode)
2. Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in 6 Shooting Menu 1
11
Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes
and press the I button. 2 Picture Mode
KK YF
Image Aspect 4:3
Digital Tele-converter Off
j/Y o
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off
Back Set

[Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.

3. Highlight [Recall from Custom Mode] using the FG

Reset
Reset / Custom Modes
Basic
buttons and press the I button. Assign to Custom Mode
Custom Mode Save Settings
Recall from Custom Mode

Back Set

The [Recall from Custom Mode] menu will be displayed.

4. Highlight the desired custom mode using the FG buttons Recall from Custom Mode
Custom Mode C
and press the I button. Custom Mode C2
Custom Mode C3
Custom Mode C4

Back Set

5. Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the OK Custom Mode C
Apply C settings? Current camera
button. settings will be overwritten.

Yes
No

Back Set

6 Shooting Menu 1 will be displayed.

C Current settings will be saved to the selected mode, overwriting previously-saved settings.

6. Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial (C

80 Custom mode)
BSettings recalled by pressing a button will cease to apply if you:
- turn the camera off,
- rotate the mode dial to another setting,
- press the MENU button during shooting
- perform a reset, or
- save or recall custom settings.

Updating Custom Modes Automatically

Custom modes can be updated automatically to reflect any changes made to settings while the mode
is selected during shooting.

1. Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in 6 Shooting Menu 1 and press the OK button.

2. Highlight [Custom Mode Save Settings] and press the I button.

3. Highlight a custom mode ([Custom Mode C]–[Custom Mode C4]) and press the OK button.

4. Highlight [Hold] and press the OK button.

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial (C

81 Custom mode)
Recording Movies
C When recording movies, use an SD card that supports an SD speed class of 10 or higher.
C A UHS-II or UHS-I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better is required when:
- a movie resolution of [4K] or [C4K] is selected in the [nX] menu or a bit rate of [A-I]
(All-Intra) is selected in the [nX] menu
C If the camera is used for extended periods, the temperature of the image sensor will rise and noise
and colored fog may appear in images. Turn off the camera for a short time should this occur.
Noise and colored fog may also appear in images recorded at high ISO sensitivity settings. If the
temperature rises further, the camera will turn off automatically.
C AF is not available during movie recording with Four Thirds system lenses.
C When 0 (high-speed movie recording) is selected for [nX], movies shot with [i-Enhance],
[e-Portrait], or an art filter selected for picture mode will be recorded in [Natural] mode.
C CMOS image sensors of the type used in the camera generate a so-called “rolling shutter” effect
that can cause distortion in pictures of moving objects. This distortion is a phenomenon that occurs
in pictures of fast-moving subjects or if the camera is moved during shooting. It is particularly
noticeable in pictures taken at long focal lengths.
C When an SDXC card is used, movies over 2 hours are recorded over multiple files (depending
on shooting conditions, the camera may start recording to a new file before the 2-hour limit is
reached).
C When an SD/SDHC card is used, movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple files
(depending on shooting conditions, the camera may start recording to a new file before the 4 GB
limit is reached).
BCamera orientation is recorded when movies are filmed in portrait (“tall”) orientation. Movies
viewed on a computer or smartphone will be displayed in the orientation in which they were
recorded.

Recording movies in photo shooting modes

The R button can be used for movie recording even when the mode dial is not in the n position.

C The AF frame will switch to the style selected for movie mode. Before recording, rotate the mode
dial to n (movie mode) and choose the desired AF frame in the AF-target selection display (P. 91).

82 Recording Movies
 1. Press the R button to begin recording.
A “NREC” indicator, the recording time, and a red frame are displayed during movie
recording.
If you put your eye to the viewfinder, the movie you are recording will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
You can change the focus location by tapping the monitor while recording.

L T W
R 28 mm
TC 00:00:00:12 DF M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K
30p

REC 0:00:12
nP
1:20:47

2. Press the R button again to end recording.

The “NREC” indicator, recording time, and frame will clear from the display when recording
ends.
The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.

C The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances:

- during multiple exposure (still photography also ends.), while shutter button is pressed halfway,
in mode B (bulb), during sequential shooting, during time lapse shooting, during keystone
compensation, during fisheye correction, during LV ND shooting
BSome settings, such as AF mode, can be set separately for movies and photographs. g “The
Video Menu” (P. 233)
BTo choose whether the display is bordered in red while recording is in progress, use [n Display
Settings] > [Red Frame during RREC] in the n Video Menu (P. 233).

Recording movies in movie mode (n)

Rotate the mode dial to n (movie mode) to record movies using the effects available in P, A, S, and
M modes (P. 238).

83 Recording Movies
 1. Rotate the mode dial to n.

2. Press the R button to begin recording.

Configuring the shutter button so that it can be used to record movies requires changes to
[n Shutter Function]. g n Video Menu > [n Shutter Function] (P. 233)
A beep does not sound when the camera focuses in movie mode.
The movie you are recording will be displayed on the monitor.
A red frame is displayed during movie recording.
If you put your eye to the viewfinder, the movie you are recording will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
You can change the focus location by tapping the monitor while recording.
The camera will start the movie recording count and display the elapsed recording time.

BTo choose whether the display is bordered in red while recording is in progress, use [n Display
Settings] > [Red Frame during RREC] in the n Video Menu (P. 233).

Touch Controls (Silent Controls)

You can prevent the camera from recording operating sounds that
L T W
R 28 mm
TC 00:00:00:12 DF M-IS 1
occur due to camera operations while shooting. Tapping the silent
shooting tab displays the following items. After tapping an item,
C-AF
ISO-A
200

tap the displayed arrows to select the settings.

4K
30p

REC 0:00:12
n 250 F5.6 0.0 1:20:47

1
1 Silent shooting tab

Y (power zoom) Zoom power zoom lenses in or out.

c (recording level) Choose the recording level.

84 Recording Movies
 Adjust shutter speed when [S] (shutter-priority AE) or [M]
SS (shutter speed) (manual) is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode;
P. 238).

Adjust aperture when [A] (aperture-priority AE) or [M] (manual) is

FNo (aperture)
selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode; P. 238).

Adjust exposure compensation. Available when [AUTO] is selected

(exposure
F for [n ISO] (P. 98) with [M] selected for [n Mode] (movie
compensation)
exposure mode; P. 238).

Adjust [n ISO] (P. 98). Displayed when [M] is selected for

ISO (n ISO sensitivity)
[n Mode] (movie (exposure) mode; P. 238).

C Silent controls are not available during high-speed movie recording (P. 144).

85 Recording Movies
Shooting Settings
Shooting Settings
The camera offers many photography-related functions. Depending on how often you use them,
you can access settings via buttons, icons in the display, or menus that can be used for detailed
adjustments.

Method Description

Adjust settings directly using buttons, including those listed below.

Commonly-used functions are assigned to buttons for quick access during
Direct buttons
viewfinder photography (P. 87).
The controls that can be so used include the F, gY, and ISO buttons.

LV super
control panel/ Choose from a list of settings showing current camera status. You can also
super control view current camera settings (P. 111).
panel

Live controls Adjust settings while viewing your subject in the display (P. 331).

Menus Adjust settings from menus displayed in the monitor (P. 200).

86 Shooting Settings
Direct Buttons
Direct Buttons
Frequently-used photographic functions are assigned to buttons. These are referred to as “direct
buttons”.

The buttons to which functions can be assigned are listed below.

b
c

a
d
e g

f h

Direct button Assigned function

a Preview button Preview (P. 167)

b AEL/AFL button AEL/AFL (P. 100)

c ISO button ISO sensitivity (P. 98)

d Arrow pad Y (AF-target position; P. 91)

e gY button Sequential/self-timer shooting (P. 101)

f U (LV) button Display (monitor/viewfinder) selection (P. 40)

87 Direct Buttons
 Direct button Assigned function

g F button Exposure compensation (P. 89)

h R button Movie recording (P. 82)

BButtons can be assigned different roles. g [K Button Function] (P. 167)

88 Direct Buttons
Controlling exposure (Exposure
Compensation)
The exposure selected automatically by the camera can be altered to suit your artistic intent.
Choose positive values to make pictures brighter, negative values to make them darker. Exposure
compensation is available in modes P, A, S, ART, and n.

BTo enable exposure compensation in mode M, select [AUTO] for [K ISO] (P. 98).

1 2 3
1 Negative (–)
2 No compensation (0)
3 Positive (+)

During photo shooting, exposure compensation can be adjusted

S-IS AUTO
by up to ±5.0 EV. The viewfinder and live view show the effects
of values not exceeding ±3.0 EV. The exposure bar flashes when ISO-A
200

the value exceeds ±3.0 EV.

YF

During movie recording, exposure compensation can be 4K

30p

adjusted by ±3.0 EV. P 250 F5.6 +1.3

1:02:03
1023

1 2
1 Exposure compensation
2 Exposure bar

To preview the effects of exposure compensation in live view, select [Off] for [Live View Boost] in
C Custom Menu j (P. 280).
The front and rear dials or touch controls can be used to adjust exposure during movie recording.

89 Controlling exposure (Exposure Compensation)

Adjusting Exposure Compensation
Modes P, A, and S
In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [P], [A], or [S] is selected for
[n Mode] (movie exposure mode). g “Choosing an Exposure Mode (n Mode (Movie Exposure
Mode))” (P. 238)

1. Rotate the front dial to adjust exposure compensation.

You can also choose a value by pressing the F button and then using the HI buttons.

2. Take pictures.

Mode M
In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [M] is selected for [nMode] (movie
exposure mode). You must first however select [On] for n Video Menu > [n Specification
Settings] > [b ISO-Auto Set] > [b ISO-Auto] (P. 233) and [AUTO] for [n ISO] (P. 98).

1. Press the F button and then rotate the front dial or rear dial to adjust exposure compensation.

2. Take pictures.

Resetting Exposure Compensation

To reset exposure compensation, press and hold the OK button.

90 Controlling exposure (Exposure Compensation)

Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target
Mode)

1. Use the FGHI buttons to position the AF target.

2. Use the front dial during AF target selection to choose the target’s size and shape.

q M o

s r n

AF Target Modes
The only modes available when RAF is selected are single target, 9-target group (3 × 3), and
25-group (5 × 5) modes.
The only options available during movie recording are single target, 9-target group (3 × 3), 25-
target group (5 × 5), and all target (11 × 9) modes.
Use [KYMode Settings] in C Custom Menu b (P. 271) to choose the AF target modes
displayed.

91 Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)

X Single Target
Select a single focus target.

Z Small Target
Further reduce the target size for single-target AF-target selection.
Use for pinpoint focus on small subjects.

Y 5-Target Group
Select a group of 5 targets, arranged in a cross. The camera chooses
the target used for focus from within the selected group.

r 9-Target Group (3 × 3)
Select a group of 9 targets, arranged in a square. The camera
chooses the target used for focus from within the selected group.

92 Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)

s 25-Target Group (5 × 5)
Select a group of 25 targets, arranged in a square. The camera
chooses the target used for focus from within the selected group.

q All Targets
The camera chooses the target used for focus from all available
targets.
The camera chooses from 121 (11 × 11) targets during still
photography and from 99 (11 × 9) targets in movie mode.
q

u/v/w/x Custom Target

Custom target modes can be displayed by going to [KYMode Settings] in C Custom
Menu b (P. 271) and placing checks (P) next to the desired options.
The camera uses the AF target mode selected for [t Target Mode Settings] in C Custom
Menu b (P. 271). The default setting is single target.

BSeparate AF target modes can be selected according to camera orientation. g C Custom

Menu b > [K Orientation Linked Y] (P. 310)
BThe following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate settings can
be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings according to shooting
conditions.
- [AF Mode] (P. 118), [AF Target Mode] (P. 91), and [AF Target Point] (P. 95)
The Fn lever can be configured using the [K Fn Lever Function] item in C Custom
Menu B (P. 321) or the [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] item in the n Video
Menu (P. 233).
BYou can adjust AF target settings for [C‑AF]. g C Custom Menu a > [K C-AF Center
Start] (P. 303) and [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 304)
BSeparate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.
BThe number of AF targets available may be reduced depending on shooting settings.

93 Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)

BTo enable cluster AF targeting when q (all targets) is
selected and either [C-AF] is chosen for [n AF Mode] or
[S-AF], [S-AFJ], [C-AF], or [C-AFJ] is chosen for [K AF
Mode] (P. 118), select [On2] for C Custom Menu b > [AF Area
Pointer] (P. 271). The camera will display AF targets for all areas
that are in focus.

94 Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)

Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point)
The frame showing the location of the focus point is referred to as the “AF target”. You can position the
target over your subject.

1. At default settings, you can position the target using the FGHI buttons.

2. Position the selected target using the FGHI buttons.

To select the center AF target, press and hold the OK button.

You can choose whether AF-target selection “wraps around” the edges of the display (P. 308).

BYou can reposition the AF target during focusing when [C-AF] or [C-AFJ] is selected in still
photography mode.
BYou can also reposition the AF target during movie recording.
BWhen [On] is selected for [AF Targeting Pad] (P. 273), you can reposition the AF target using
monitor touch controls while framing your subject in the viewfinder.
BThe size and number of available AF targets vary with group target settings (P. 91) and the options
chosen for [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 208) and [Aspect] (P. 138).
BThe roles played by the dials and arrow pad during AF-target selection can be chosen using
[Y Select Screen Settings] in C Custom Setting Menu b (P. 307).

95 Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point)

Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF (Super Spot AF)
You can zoom in on the display during shooting. For greater precision during focusing, zoom in on the
focus area. At higher zoom ratios, you can focus on areas smaller than the standard focus target. You
can reposition the focus area as desired during zoom.

C This function is only available when [8] is assigned to a camera control. g “Assigning functions
to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 167), “Available Roles” (P. 169)

1 2 3
S-IS AUTO S-IS AUTO 8
8
ISO-A ISO-A
200 200

YF Off YF
4K 4K
30p 30p

P 250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03
1023 P 250 F5.6 0.0
1:02:03
1023 8 10x

OK 1
1 To return to the shooting display, you have the option of pressing and holding the control to
which [8] (magnify) is assigned instead of pressing the OK button.

1 Shooting display 3 Zoom AF display

2 Zoom frame AF display

1. Press the button to which [8] (magnify) is assigned. S-IS AUTO

The zoom frame will be displayed.

ISO-A
200

Off YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

2. Position the frame using the FGHI buttons. S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

Off YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

To re-center the frame, press and hold the OK button.

96 Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF (Super Spot AF)

 3. Adjust the size of the zoom frame to choose the zoom ratio.
Press the INFO button and then use the FG buttons or
the front or rear dial to adjust the size of the zoom frame.

3x

Press the OK button to accept and exit.

4. Press the button to which [8] is assigned once more.

The camera will zoom the selected area in to fill the display.
Use the front or rear dial to zoom in or out.
Use the FGHI buttons to scroll the display.

10x

In shooting mode M (manual) or B (bulb), you can press

the INFO button during zoom to choose aperture or shutter
speed.

250 F5.6

Exposure adjustment display

for modes M and B

Press the 8 button to return to the zoom frame.

Press the OK button to end focus zoom.
You can also end focus zoom by pressing and holding the 8 button.

5. Press the shutter button halfway to focus using autofocus.

C Focus zoom applies to the display only. Pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
BTouch controls can be used for focus zoom. g “Shooting with touch screen operations” (P. 46)
BYou can make the area in the zoom frame brighter for easier focus or configure the camera to exit
focus zoom when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus. g C Custom Menu j > [LV
Close Up Settings] (P. 280)

97 Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF (Super Spot AF)

Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)
Select a value according to subject brightness. Higher values let you photograph darker scenes but
also increase image “noise” (mottling). Select [AUTO] to let the camera adjust sensitivity according to
lighting conditions.

ISO sensitivity is fixed at [AUTO] during movie recording when [P], [A], or [S] is selected for
[n Mode] (movie exposure mode). Setting [n Mode] to [M] allows other options to be selected.

1. Press the ISO button, and rotate the front or rear dial to select a value.

Sensitivity is adjusted automatically according to shooting

conditions.
Use [K ISO-Auto Set] in C Custom Menu m (P. 284) to choose
the maximum sensitivity selected by the camera and the shutter
AUTO speed at which auto sensitivity control takes effect during still
photography.
During movie recording, ISO sensitivity will be set to values of from
ISO 200 to 6400. You can also choose maximum and standard
values for ISO sensitivity.

Choose a value for ISO sensitivity. ISO 200 offers a good balance
between noise and dynamic range. Choose [L100] or [L64] for
L64, L100, 200–25600 larger apertures (lower f-numbers) or slower shutter speeds. [L64] is
(still photography) equivalent to ISO 64, [L100] to ISO 100.
[L64] and [L100] are available at all exposure step values.
[L64] and [L100] reduce dynamic range.

Choose a value for [n ISO]. ISO 200 offers a good balance

200–6400
between noise and dynamic range. This option is available when
(movie recording)
[M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).

C Combining [K ISO] values over ISO 8000 with settings that use an electronic shutter (for example,
silent mode or focus bracketing) sets the flash sync speed to 1/20 s.
C Regardless of the value selected for ISO sensitivity, the flash sync speed for photos taken using ISO
bracketing in silent mode is 1/20 s.
C When [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode), ISO sensitivity can be adjusted during
recording using touch controls (P. 84) or by rotating the front or rear dial.

98 Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)

C If [Dramatic Tone] or [Watercolor] is chosen for picture mode during still photography, sensitivity
will not exceed ISO 1600 when [AUTO] is selected.
C The following restrictions apply when [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode):
- [l OM-Log400] selected for picture mode:
- If the frame rate selected for [nX] is 24p, 25p, or 30p, [AUTO] is restricted to sensitivities
of ISO 400–3200.
- If the frame rate selected for [nX] is 50p or 60p, [AUTO] is restricted to sensitivities of ISO
400–6400.
- The lowest value that can be selected manually is ISO 400.
- Other picture modes:
- If the frame rate selected for [nX] is 24p, 25p, or 30p, [AUTO] is restricted to sensitivities
of ISO 200–3200.

99 Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)

Locking Exposure (AE Lock)
You can lock the exposure by pressing the AEL/AFL button. Use this when you want to adjust the focus
and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several images at the same exposure.

C AE lock is available only when [mode1] or [mode2] is selected for [K AEL/AFL] (P. 299) during
still photography (note, however, that when [RAF] or [RAFJ] is selected for AF mode, AE lock
is available only in [mode1]).

If the AEL/AFL button has been assigned a different role, you will need to assign [AEL/AFL]
to another control. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 167), “Available
Roles” (P. 169)
If you press the AEL/AFL button once, the exposure is locked and u is displayed. g “Setting
Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button (K AEL/AFL)” (P. 299)
Press the AEL/AFL button once again to release the AE Lock.
The lock will be released if you operate the mode dial, MENU button, or OK button.

100 Locking Exposure (AE Lock)

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
Adjust settings for burst or self-timer photography. Choose an option according to your subject.

C Fix the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer shooting.

1. Press the gY button.

2. Rotate the front or rear dial to select a value.

Custom self-timer options can be viewed by pressing the INFO button.

Single-frame advance. The camera takes one photo

F Single each time the shutter button is pressed all the way
down.

The camera takes photos at up to about 10 fps while

the shutter button is held all the way down. Focus,
i Sequential High
exposure, and white balance are locked at the values
for the first shot in each series.

The camera takes photos at up to about 6 fps while

the shutter button is held all the way down. You can
choose the frame advance rate and the maximum
number of shots in each series (P. 322). Focus and
h Sequential Low
exposure conform to the options selected for [K AF
Mode] (P. 118) and [K AEL/AFL] (P. 299). If [C‑AF]
or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode], the
camera will focus before each shot.

The shutter is released 12 s after the shutter button

is pressed all the way down. The self-timer lamp will
j Y 12sec light for about 10 s and then start to flash about
2 s before the shutter is released. The camera focuses
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

When the shutter button is pressed all the way down,

the self-timer lamp will start to flash and a photo will
k Y 2sec
be taken after about 2 seconds. The camera focuses
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

101 Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting

 Adjust self-timer settings, including the self-timer
l Custom Self-Timer delay and the number of shots taken when the timer
expires (P. 104).

G Reduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion.

(sample Anti-Shock H Available in single-frame, sequential low, and self-
icon) timer modes (P. 105).

Take pictures with the electronic shutter. Use for

shutter speeds faster than 1/8000 s or in settings
C where the sound of the shutter would be unwelcome.
(sample Silent I Available in single-frame, sequential low, sequential
icon) high, and self-timer modes. In D mode, focus,
exposure, and white balance are locked at the values
for the first shot in each series.

t Pro Capture High 1 Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed
halfway. The camera starts recording pictures,
including those captured while the button was
pressed halfway, when the button is pressed all the
u Pro Capture Low 1 way down (P. 107). In t mode, focus, exposure, and
white balance are locked at the values metered when
the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Take high-resolution photos (P. 109). Use [High

K High Res Shot 1 Res Shot] > [Shooting Method] in 7 Shooting
Menu 2 (P. 212) to choose a shooting method.

1 Art filter picture modes cannot be used.

BTo cancel the activated self-timer, press G.

BIf you stand in front of the camera to press the shutter button when using the self-timer, the picture
may be out of focus.
BYou can choose the frame advance rate and the maximum number of shots in each series (P. 322).
BIn h and u modes, the camera displays the view through the lens during shooting. In i and
t modes, it displays the shot immediately preceding the current frame.
C The speed of sequential shooting varies depending on the lens you are using and the zoom
position.

102 Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting

C During sequential shooting, if the battery level icon blinks due to low battery, the camera stops
shooting and starts saving the pictures you have taken on the card. The camera may not save all of
the pictures depending on how much battery power remains.
C Use [g/Y Settings] in C Custom Menu i (P. 279) to choose the modes displayed.
C In i and h modes, the frame advance rate will drop at [ISO] settings over ISO 8000.
C The flash sync speed when [Silent I] is selected is 1/50 s. It drops to 1/20 s at [ISO] settings over
ISO 8000.
C Photographs taken in silent and pro-capture modes may be distorted if the subject or camera
moves quickly during shooting.
C To use the flash in [Silent I] mode, select [Allow] for [Anti-Shock H/Silent I] > [Silent I
Mode Settings] > [Flash Mode] in 7 Shooting Menu 2.
C The frame advance rate may slow when [On1] or [On2] is selected for live view boost. Select [Off]
to maintain a consistent frame rate. g C Custom Menu j > [Live View Boost] (P. 280)

103 Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting

Self-Timer Options (l Custom Self-timer)
Adjust self-timer settings, including the shutter release delay and the number of shots taken when the
timer expires.

1. Press the gY button.

2. Highlight l (custom self-timer) by rotating the front or rear

dial and press the INFO button.

Settings o
Y1s ×3 0.5s OFF
Custom Self-timer

P p S ♥S q h

3. Highlight items using HI and use FG to choose an option.

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the shutter
Y Timer
button is pressed all the way down.

Number of
Choose the number of shots taken when the timer expires.
Frames

If the number of shots is 2 or more, choose the interval between the

Interval Length
shots taken when the timer expires.

[Off]: If the number of shots is 2 or more, the camera will focus only
Every Frame AF before the first shot.
[On]: The camera focuses before each shot.

104 Self-Timer Options (l Custom Self-timer)

Shooting without the vibration caused by
shutter button operations (Anti-Shock H)
Reduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion.
Use this option when even slight camera motion can cause blur, for example during macro or
telephoto photography.

C You must first enable display of this option by selecting [g/Y Settings] in C Custom
Menu i (P. 279) and placing a check (P) next to the appropriate item.

1. Press the gY button.

2. Select one of the items marked ♦ using the front or rear dial and press the OK button.

3. Take pictures.
When the set time has elapsed, the shutter is released and the picture is taken.

BThe delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the start of shooting can
be selected using [Anti-Shock H/Silent I] > [Anti-Shock H] in 7 Shooting Menu 2 (P. 232).

Shooting without the vibration caused by shutter

105 button operations (Anti-Shock H)
Shooting without shutter sound (Silent I)
In situations where the shutter sound is a problem, you can shoot without making a sound. An
electronic shutter is used to reduce the minuscule camera shake caused by the motion of the
mechanical shutter, much as is the case for anti-shock photography.

1. Press the gY button.

2. Select one of the items marked ♥ using the front or rear dial and press the OK button.

3. Take pictures.
When the shutter is released, the monitor screen will go dark for a moment. No shutter
sound will be emitted.
The fastest available shutter speed is 1/32000 s.

C The desired results may not be achieved under flickering light sources such as fluorescent or LED
lamps or if the subject moves abruptly during shooting.
BThe delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the start of shooting can
be selected using [Anti-Shock H/Silent I] > [Silent I] in 7 Shooting Menu 2 (P. 232).

106 Shooting without shutter sound (Silent I)

Shooting without a release time lag (Pro
Capture shooting)
Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway; the moment the button is pressed the rest
of the way down, the camera will start saving the last n captured pictures to the memory card, where
n is a number selected before shooting begins. If the button is held all the way down, shooting will
continue until the selected number of pictures is recorded. Use this option to capture moments you
might otherwise miss due to your subject’s reactions or shutter lag.

1 2

a b c
3
1 Up to 14 frames a Shutter button pressed halfway
2 Burst shooting continues b Moment you want
3 Shutter lag c Shutter button pressed all the way down

Pro Capture Low (u)

Choose this option if you anticipate that the distance to the subject will change during shooting. The
camera shoots at up to 10 fps. A maximum of 14 frames can be captured before the shutter button is
pressed all the way down. If [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 118), the camera
will focus before each shot.

C Selecting u (Pro Capture Low) restricts aperture to values between maximum aperture and f8.0.
C Four Thirds and third-party Micro Four Thirds lenses cannot be used in u (Pro Capture Low)
mode.

Pro Capture High (t)

Choose this option if the distance to the subject is unlikely to change very much during shooting. The
camera shoots at up to 30 fps. A maximum of 14 frames can be captured before the shutter button
is pressed all the way down. The camera will use [S-AF] when [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for
[K AF Mode] (P. 118).

Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture

107 shooting)
Pro Capture Photography

1. Press the gY button.

2. Select t (Pro Capture High) or u (Pro Capture Low) using the front or rear dial and press
the OK button.

3. Press the shutter button halfway to start capturing.

When the shutter button is pressed halfway, a capture icon T W
28 mm
S-IS AUTO
(Z) will be displayed. If the button is kept pressed halfway
for over a minute, capture will end and the Z icon will clear ISO-A
200 t

from the display. Press the shutter button halfway again to YF

resume shooting. 4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

4. Press the shutter button all the way down to start saving pictures to the memory card.
Shooting will continue while the shutter button is pressed all the way down, up to the
number of shots selected for [Frame Count Limiter].

B[Max fps] (t (Pro Capture High) only), [Pre-shutter Frames], and [Frame Count Limiter] can be
adjusted using the [gL Settings] and [gH Settings] > [s] options in C Custom Menu g.
g “Burst Shooting Options (gL Settings/gH Settings)” (P. 322)
C Flickering occurred by fluorescent lights or the large movement of the subject, etc. may cause
distortions in images.
C During capture, the monitor will not go dark and the sound of the shutter will not be heard.
C The slowest shutter speed is limited.
C Pro Capture is not available when the camera is connected to a smartphone via Wi-Fi.

Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture

108 shooting)
Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution
(High Res Shot)
Shoot at resolutions higher than that of the image sensor. The camera takes a series of shots while
moving the image sensor and combines them to create a single high-resolution photo. Use this option
to capture details that normally would not be visible even at high zoom ratios.

1. Press the gY button.

2. Highlight K using the front or rear dial.

To choose between tripod and hand-held modes, press the INFO button and rotate the front
or rear dial.

3. Press the OK button.

A K icon will be displayed. The icon will flash if the camera S-IS AUTO

is not steady. The icon stops flashing when the camera is

steady and ready to shoot. ISO-A
200 h

IF
+RAW
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

After enabling High Res Shot, check the option selected for image quality. Image quality can
be adjusted in the LV super control panel (P. 139).

4. Take pictures.
The K will flash to warn that shots may be blurred by camera shake. Keep the camera
steady.
Shooting is complete when the green K icon clears from the display.
The camera will automatically create the composite image when shooting is complete. A
message will be displayed during this process.

BUse the [High Res Shot] option (P. 212) in 7 Shooting Menu 2 to choose time between the shutter
button being pressed all the way down and the shutter being released, the time allocated for the
flash to charge when a flash is used in High Res Shot mode, and the shooting style (tripod-mounted
or hand-held).

Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution

109 (High Res Shot)
C Choose from JPEG (IF or JF) and RAW+JPEG modes. When image quality is set to RAW+JPEG,
the camera saves a single RAW image (extension “.ORI”) before combining it with the high
resolution shooting. Pre-combination RAW images can be played back using the latest version of
OM Workspace.
C [S-IS Off] is automatically selected for [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 134) when [Tripod] is chosen for
[Shooting Method], [S-IS AUTO] when [Handheld] is selected.
C The maximum wait time for [Shooting Method] > [Handheld] is 1 second.
C During RC flash photography, the maximum flash wait time is 4 seconds and the flash control mode
is fixed at MANUAL.
C This option is available in P, A, S, and M modes.
C High Res Shot cannot be used with:
- interval-timer photography, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing, fisheye
correction, HDR, and LV ND photography.
C Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art filter selected for picture mode are recorded in [Natural]
mode.
C Image quality may drop under flickering light sources such as fluorescent or LED lamps.
C If the camera is unable to record a composite image due to blur or other factors, only the first shot
will be recorded. If [JPEG] is selected for image quality, the shot will be recorded in JPEG format,
while if [RAW+JPEG] is selected, the camera will record two copies, one in RAW (.ORF) and the
other in JPEG format.

Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution

110 (High Res Shot)
The Super Control/LV Super Control
Panel
The Super Control and LV Super Control
Panels
The super control/LV super control panel lists shooting settings and their current values. Use the LV
super control panel when framing shots in the monitor (“live view”), the super control panel when
framing shots in the viewfinder.
Pressing the U (LV) button during live view enables viewfinder photography and displays the LV
super control panel in the monitor.

U
(LV)
S-IS AUTO 2022.10.16 12:30:00
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
ISO-A S-AF ±0 Normal
200 #
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
YF
S-IS Auto 4K
4K
30p YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03 1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023 P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

2 3
1 U (LV) button
2 Live view photography
3 Viewfinder photography (monitor turns off while viewfinder is on)

111 The Super Control and LV Super Control Panels

LV Super Control Panel (Live View Photography)
To display the LV super control panel in the monitor, press the OK button during live view.

S-IS AUTO KRecommended ISO

ISO WB A±0 Natural
OK Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
ISO-A S-AF ±0 Normal
200 #
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
YF
S-IS Auto 4K
4K
30p YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03 1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023 P 250 F5.6 1023

Super Control Panel (Viewfinder Photography)

When you frame subjects in the viewfinder, the super LV control panel will be displayed in the monitor
at all times. Press the OK button to activate the cursor.

2022.10.16 12:30:00 KRecommended ISO

ISO WB A±0 Natural ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0 OK Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal S-AF ±0 Normal
# #
Off Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB # ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K S-IS Auto 4K
YF YF
M-IS 30p M-IS 30p
1:02:03 1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023 P 250 F5.6 1023

112 The Super Control and LV Super Control Panels

Using the Super Control and LV Super Control
panels

1. Press the OK button.

KRecommended ISO

If you press the button during live view, the LV super control ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0
Natural
S ±0 ±0
panel will be displayed in the monitor. #
S-AF ±0 Normal
Off
The last setting used will be highlighted. # ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

1
1 Cursor

2. Highlight an item using the FGHI buttons KAF Mode

or by rotating the rear dial. ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0 Natural
G±0 S ±0 ±0
The selected setting will be highlighted. #
S-AF
Off
±0 Normal

You can also highlight items by tapping # ± 0.0 o p sRGB

S-IS Auto 4K
them in the display.
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Rotate the front dial to change the highlighted

KAF Mode
setting. ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
PreMF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

4. Press the shutter button halfway to accept current settings and exit the LV super control panel.
If you are using the super control panel, the cursor will vanish and setting will end.

113 The Super Control and LV Super Control Panels

Additional Options
Pressing the OK button in Step 2 displays options for the
INFO
highlighted setting.
In some cases, additional options can be configured.

KImage Stabilizer S-IS AUTO S-IS AUTO

ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0
Natural
S ±0 ±0 OK INFO
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
Focal Lengtho
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
9mm 0 0 0 9 . 0 mm
YF
M-IS 30p Auto I.S. Auto I.S.
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023 P OFF S-IS AUTO S-IS 1 S-IS 2 S-IS 3 P OFF S-IS AUTO S-IS 1 S-IS 2 S-IS 3

[K Image Stabilizer]

Touch controls can be used in place of the OK button. Lightly tap the desired setting twice to
display options.

114 The Super Control and LV Super Control Panels

Settings Available in the Super Control/LV Super
Control Panel
LV super control panel

14
1 KRecommended ISO
2 ISO WB A±0 Natural 15
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
3
S-AF ±0 Normal 16
4 #
Off
5 # ± 0.0 o p sRGB 17
6 S-IS Auto 4K 18
YF
M-IS 30p 19
7
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

8 9 10 11 12 13

Super control panel

14
1 KRecommended ISO
2 ISO WB A±0 Natural 15
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
3
S-AF ±0 Normal 16
4 #
Off
5 # ± 0.0 o p sRGB 17
6 S-IS Auto 4K 18
YF
M-IS 30p
7 19
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

8 9 10 11 12 13

115 The Super Control and LV Super Control Panels

1 Currently selected option 15 Picture mode (P. 154)
2 ISO sensitivity (P. 117) 16 S Sharpness (P. 158)
3 AF mode (P. 118) F Contrast (P. 159)
AF target (P. 123) E Saturation (P. 160)
4 Flash mode (P. 149)
D Gradation (P. 161)
5 Flash intensity control (P. 153)
F Color filter (P. 162)
Manual flash output (P. 149)
T Monochrome color (P. 163)
6 K Image stabilizer (P. 134)
E Effect (P. 164)
7 n Image stabilizer (P. 134)
Q Color 2 (P. 74)
8 Sequential shooting/self-timer (P. 137)
R Color/vivid 3 (P. 157)
9 K Image quality (P. 139)
Effect 4 (P. 73)
10 Metering mode (P. 124)
17 Color space (P. 165)
11 I Face priority (P. 126) 18 Highlight & shadow control (P. 166)
12 n Image quality (P. 141) 19 Button function assignment (P. 167)
13 Aspect ratio (P. 138)
14 White balance (P. 129)
White balance compensation (P. 133)
Color temperature 1 (P. 129)

1 Displayed when CWB (custom white balance) is selected for white balance.
2 Displayed when Partial Color is set.
3 Displayed when Color Creator is set.
4 Displayed when an art filter is selected.

116 The Super Control and LV Super Control Panels

Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)
Adjust ISO sensitivity. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 98)
Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [ISO] using the FGHI buttons. KRecommended ISO

ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

117 Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)

Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)
You can select a focusing method (focus mode).
You can choose separate focusing methods for still photography mode and movie mode.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [AF Mode] using the FGHI buttons. KAF Mode

ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

The camera focuses once when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
During still photography, a beep will sound and the in-focus indicator and
S-AF (Single AF) AF target will light when the camera focuses. When the camera focuses in
movie mode, the in-focus indicator and AF target will light. This mode is
suitable for shots featuring stationary or comparatively static subjects.

During still photography, the camera will adjust focus continuously while
the shutter button is pressed halfway. The in-focus indicator is displayed
when the subject is in focus. In addition, a beep will sound when
C-AF (Continuous AF) the camera focuses for the first time. In movie mode, the camera will
adjust focus continuously both before and during filming. Even if the
subject moves or you change the composition of the picture, the camera
continues trying to focus.

This function allows you to manually focus on 1

any position by operating the focus ring on the
2
lens.

MF (manual focus) 3
1 Near
2 ∞
3 Focus ring

118 Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)

 Press the shutter button halfway to focus; the camera then tracks and
maintains focus on the current subject while the shutter button is held in
this position.
In movie mode, the camera will continue to track focus on the subject
even if you release the shutter button before filming begins. Press the
OK button to end focus tracking. The camera will continue to track the
subject if recording is started while tracking is in progress.
C‑AF+TR (AF The AF target is displayed in red if the camera can no longer track the
Tracking) subject. Release the shutter button and then frame the subject again
and press the shutter button halfway.
Autofocus does not work while the AF target is displayed in red even if
the camera is tracking the subject.
Tracking AF cannot be used with:
- keystone compensation, High Res Shot, focus stacking, focus
bracketing, interval-timer photography, HDR, the live ND filter, and
fisheye correction.

The camera automatically focuses on the preset focus point when

PreMF (Preset MF)
shooting.

RAF (Starry Sky AF)

Choose this mode for pictures of stars in the night sky. Press the AEL/AFL
(still photography
button to focus on the stars. g “Using Starry Sky AF” (P. 121)
only)

The camera may be unable to focus if the subject is poorly lit, obscured by mist or smoke, or lacks
contrast.
When using a Four Thirds system lens, AF will not be available during movie recording.
[AF Mode] selection is not available when the lens focus ring is in the MF position and [Operative]
is selected for [MF Clutch] in C Custom Menu d (P. 273). g “MF Clutch Lenses” (P. 429)
The Fn lever can be used to choose between the [AF Mode] settings assigned to Fn lever Positions
1 and 2. g C Custom Menu B > [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 275), n Video Menu >
[n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 233)

119 Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)

Adjusting Focus Manually During Autofocus
Before proceeding, select [On] for [K AF+MF] in C Custom Menu a (P. 298). J will be
displayed next to [S‑AF], [C‑AF], [C‑AF+TR], or [R AF].

1. Choose a focus mode marked with an J icon (P. 118).

For movie recording, select [S-AFJ] for [n AF/IS Settings] > [n AF Mode] in the
n Video Menu (P. 233).

2. Press the shutter button halfway to focus using autofocus.

Press the AEL/AFL button to initiate starry sky AF when [RAFJ] is selected.

3. Keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, rotate the focus ring to adjust focus manually.
To refocus using autofocus, release the shutter button and press it halfway again.
Manual focus adjustment during autofocus is not available in [RAFJ] mode.
Manual focus adjustment during autofocus is available via the focus ring on M.ZUIKO PRO
(Micro Four Thirds PRO) lenses. For information on other lenses, see our website.

4. Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture.

120 Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)

Using Starry Sky AF

1. Select [RAF] for AF mode and press the OK button.

2. Press the AEL/AFL button to initiate starry sky AF.

To interrupt starry sky AF, press the AEL/AFL button again.
At default settings, starry sky AF does not start when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
To configure the camera so that starry sky AF does start when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, use [K AEL/AFL] in C Custom Menu a (P. 299).
The camera displays [Starry Sky AF is Running] during starry sky AF. The in-focus indicator
(N) is displayed for about two seconds after the camera focuses; if the camera is unable to
focus, the in-focus indicator will instead flash for about two seconds.

3. Press the shutter button all the way down to take the picture.

BThe [Starry Sky AF Setting] item in C Custom Menu d (P. 273) offers a choice of [Accuracy] and
[Speed]. Mount the camera on a tripod before taking photographs with [Accuracy] selected.
BYour choice of AF-target modes (P. 91) is restricted to single target, 9-target group (3 × 3), and
25-target group (5 × 5).
BThe camera will not be able to focus in bright locations.
BStarry sky AF cannot be used with Pro Capture.
B[K Orientation Linked Y] (P. 310), [Y Loop Settings] (P. 308), [AF Limiter] (P. 312), and the
[AF Illuminator] item in C Custom Menu c (P. 273) are fixed at [Off], the [I Face Priority] item
in C Custom Menu c (P. 273) at [Face Priority Off], and the [AF Scanner] item in C Custom
Menu a (P. 270) at [mode1].
BThe camera automatically focuses at infinity when starry sky AF is selected.
BWhen [On] is selected for [S‑AF Release Priority] in C Custom Menu g (P. 277), the shutter can
be released even when the subject is not in focus.
BManual focus is selected when a Four Thirds lens is attached.
BStarry sky AF is available with OM Digital and OLYMPUS Four Thirds lenses. It cannot, however, be
used with lenses with a maximum aperture over f/5.6. For more information, visit our website.

121 Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)

Setting a focus position for PreMF

1. Select [PreMF] for AF mode, and press the INFO button.

2. Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

Focus can be adjusted by rotating the focus ring.

3. Press the OK button.

The focus distance for the preset focus point can be set using [Preset MF distance] in C Custom
Menu d (P. 273).
The camera also focuses at the preset distance:
- when turned on and
- when you exit the menus to the shooting display.

Manual Focus Adjustment

When [S‑AFJ], [C‑AFJ], [MF], [C‑AF+TRJ], [PreMF], or [RAFJ] is selected for AF
mode, focus can be adjusted manually during exposures or while pictures are being taken in
[Sequential Low] mode.

In mode B (bulb), manual focus adjustment can be performed according to the option selected
for [Bulb/Time Focusing] (P. 318).

122 Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)

Positioning and Sizing the AF Target (AF Area)
Adjust AF-target settings. g “Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)” (P. 91), “Choosing a
Focus Target (AF Target Point)” (P. 95)

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [AF Area] using the FGHI buttons and press

AF Area
the OK button. ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0 Natural
G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

AF-target selection options will be displayed.

3. Use the front or rear dial to choose an AF-target mode. You can position the target using the
FGHI buttons.

123 Positioning and Sizing the AF Target (AF Area)

Choosing how the camera measures
brightness (Metering)
You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Metering] using the FGHI buttons.

Metering
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

Meters exposure in 324 areas of the frame and optimizes

Digital ESP exposure for the current scene or portrait subject (if an option
A metering other than [Off] is selected for [I Face Priority]). This mode is
recommended for general use.

Center Provides the average metering between

weighted the subject and the background lighting,
B averaging placing more weight on the subject at the
metering center.

Meters a small area (about 2% of the

frame) with the camera pointed at the
C Spot metering object you wish to meter. Exposure will be
adjusted according to the brightness at the
metered point.

Spot metering Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects appear
D (highlight) bright.

Spot metering Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects appear
E (shadow) dark.

Choosing how the camera measures brightness

124 (Metering)
BThe spot metering position can be set at the selected AF target. g CCustom Menu o >
[Y Spot Metering] (P. 286)

Choosing how the camera measures brightness

125 (Metering)
Face priority AF/Eye priority AF (I Face
Priority)
The camera automatically detects and focuses on the faces or eyes of portrait subjects.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [I Face Priority] using the FGHI buttons.

Face Priority
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

I Face Priority On The camera detects and focuses on faces.

v Face Priority Off Face priority AF off.

The camera detects faces and focuses on the eye closest

w Face & Eye Priority On
to the camera.

y Face & L. Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the left eye.

x Face & R. Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the right eye.

126 Face priority AF/Eye priority AF (I Face Priority)

 4. Point the camera at your subject.
S-IS AUTO

Faces detected by the camera are indicated by white frames.

The face chosen for focus is indicated by brackets at the ISO-A
200

corners of the frame. If eye-priority AF is enabled, a white YF

frame will appear over one or the other of the selected

4K
30p

subject’s eyes. P 250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03
1023

The face chosen for focus

is indicated by white double
brackets.

If multiple faces are detected, the face used for focus can be selected via the control to
which [I Face Selection] has been assigned. Pressing this control selects the face nearest
the AF target. To choose a different face, hold the control and rotate the front or rear
dial. Release the control when the desired subject is selected. g “Assigning functions to
buttons (Button Function)” (P. 167)
The face used for focus can also be selected via touch controls (P. 46).

5. Press the shutter button halfway to focus. T W

28 mm
S-IS AUTO

The area of the subject used for focus is indicated by a

green border. ISO-A
200

If the camera detects the subject’s eyes, it will focus on an YF

eye.
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

Face and eye priority are also available in [MF] (P. 118). Faces and eyes detected by the
camera are indicated by white frames. Exposure will be set according to the value metered
for the center of the face.
When set to [A] (P. 124) (Digital ESP metering), metering is performed with priority given
to faces.
If the zoom frame is displayed, the camera will focus on the subject in the zoom frame.

6. Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to shoot.

C Depending on the subject and the art filter setting, the camera may not be able to correctly detect
the face.
BWe recommend selecting [Face Priority Off] when photographing non-portrait subjects using
[C‑AF] or [C‑AFJ] in still photography mode.
BEven when faces or eyes are detected, you can opt to focus on a target chosen using AF-target
selection rather than on the face or eye selected by the camera. g C Custom Menu a >
[K AEL/AFL] > [Face Priority AF] (P. 299)

127 Face priority AF/Eye priority AF (I Face Priority)

B[Face & Eye Priority On], [Face & L. Eye Priority On], and [Face & R. Eye Priority On] are not
available in movie mode.
BFace/eye priority will not be available during C (spot) metering (P. 124) in single-target AF-target
mode (P. 91) if [Y Spot Metering] is selected in C Custom Menu o (P. 286).

128 Face priority AF/Eye priority AF (I Face Priority)

Adjusting color (WB (white balance))
White balance (WB) ensures that white objects in images recorded by the camera appear white.
[AUTO] is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can be selected according to the light
source when [AUTO] fails to produce the desired results or you wish to introduce a deliberate color
cast into your images.
Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Use FGHI to select [WB]. KWB

ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

One-touch white balance and custom white balance options can be viewed by pressing the
OK button followed by the INFO button.

Color
WB mode Light conditions
temperature

Most normal scenes (scenes containing

objects that are white or close to white)
Auto white This mode is recommended in most
AUTO —
balance situations.
You can choose the white balance used
under incandescent lighting (P. 132).

129 Adjusting color (WB (white balance))

 Color
WB mode Light conditions
temperature

A 5300K Sunlit outdoor scenes, sunsets, fireworks

B 7500K Daylight shots of subjects in the shade

Shots taken in daylight under overcast

D 6000K
skies

Preset white
G 3000K Subjects under incandescent lighting
balance

H 4000K Subjects under fluorescent lighting

P — Underwater photography

Light sources with the same color

O 5500K
temperature as flash lighting

Situations in which you want to set white

J/ Color balance for a specific subject
One-touch K/ temperature set Color temperature is set to a value
white balance L/ by one-touch metered from a white object under the
WB lighting what will be used in the final
M photograph (P. 131).

Situations in which you can identify the

Custom white
CWB 2000K–14000K appropriate color temperature
balance
Choose a color temperature.

130 Adjusting color (WB (white balance))

One-touch white balance
Measure white balance by framing a piece of paper or other white object under the lighting that will
be used in the final photograph. Use this option to fine-tune white balance when you find it hard to
obtain the desired results with white balance compensation or preset white balance options such as
A (sunlight) or D (overcast). The camera stores the metered value for quick recall as required.

1. Select [J], [K], [L], or [M] (one-touch white balance 1, 2, 3, or 4).

2. Photograph a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper.

Frame the piece of paper so that it fills the display. Ensure that it is free of shadows.
In still photography mode, press the INFO button and then the shutter button.
In movie mode, press the INFO button to release the shutter.
The one-touch white balance screen appears.

3. Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

The new value is saved as a preset white balance option.
The new value is stored until one-touch white balance is measured again. Turning the power
off does not erase the data.

131 Adjusting color (WB (white balance))

N Keep Warm Color
Choose how the camera adjusts white balance for pictures taken using auto white balance under
incandescent lighting.

1. Highlight [WB] and press the OK button.

2. After selecting [AUTO], press the INFO button.

[N Keep Warm Color] options will be displayed.

3. Highlight an option using the FGHI buttons and press the OK button.

OFF The camera suppresses the warm tones produced by incandescent lighting.

ON The camera preserves the warm tones produced by incandescent lighting.

132 Adjusting color (WB (white balance))

Making fine adjustments to white balance (WB
Compensation)
Fine-tune white balance. Separate values can be selected for each white balance option. Adjust settings
as described below.

A A (amber–blue) axis Positive values add a red cast, negative values a blue cast.

G G (green–magenta) axis Positive values add a green cast, negative values a magenta cast.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [A±0] or [G±0] using the FGHI buttons and KAuto x

choose the desired value using the front dial. ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0 Natural
G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

The effect can be previewed by pressing the OK button.

BWhite balance compensation can be applied to all white balance modes simultaneously. g C
Custom Menu G [K All d] (P. 288), n Video Menu > [n Specification Settings] > [n All
d] (P. 233)
BChanges to white balance can be previewed in live view. During still photography, the effect can be
previewed in a photograph. Press the R (movie) button in the white balance compensation display
to view an image captured at current settings.

Making fine adjustments to white balance (WB

133 Compensation)
Reducing camera shake (Image Stabilizer)
You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low light situations or
shooting with high magnification.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Use FGHI to select the image stabilizer. KImage Stabilizer

ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

1 2
1 n Image Stabilizer
2 K Image Stabilizer

134 Reducing camera shake (Image Stabilizer)

 3. Use the front dial to select an option.

Still picture (S-IS)

S-IS Off Image stabilization disabled. Select this option when using a
(Still-I.S. Off) tripod.

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes. If panning

S-IS AUTO
motion is detected, the camera will automatically suspend
(Auto I.S.)
image stabilization on that axis.

S-IS1
Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.
(All Direction Shake I.S.)

S-IS2 Image stabilization applies to vertical motion. Use when

(Vertical Shake I.S.) panning the camera horizontally.

S-IS3 Image stabilization applies to horizontal motion. Use when

(Horizontal Shake I.S.) panning the camera vertically.

Movie (M-IS)

M-IS Off
Image stabilization disabled.
(Movie-I.S. Off)

M-IS1 Electronic image stabilization combined with VCM-controlled

(All Direction Shake I.S.) image sensor movement.

M-IS2
VCM-controlled image sensor movement only.
(All Direction Shake I.S.)

C Image stabilization may be unable to compensate for excessive camera motion or very slow shutter
speeds. Use a tripod in these cases.
C You may notice noise or vibration while image stabilization is in effect.
C The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over that selected
with the camera.
BYou can choose whether image stabilization will be performed while the shutter button is pressed
halfway. g C Custom Menu h [Half Way Rls With IS] (P. 277)
BYou can prioritize lens image stabilization. g C Custom Menu h > [Lens I.S. Priority] (P. 277)

135 Reducing camera shake (Image Stabilizer)

Using lenses not in the Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds System
family
When using lenses that are not part of the Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system family, you will
need to specify the lens focal length.
Highlight [Image Stabilizer] and press the OK button. Press INFO, choose a focal length using
FGHI, and press the OK button.
Choose a focal length between 0.1 mm and 1000.0 mm.
Choose the value that matches the one printed on the lens.

BThe selected value is not reset when you select [Reset / Custom Modes] > [Reset] (basic) in
6 Shooting Menu 1 (P. 204).

136 Reducing camera shake (Image Stabilizer)

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
You can take a series of pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed all the way down. Alternatively,
you can take pictures using the self-timer. Other options, including anti-shock and silent modes, are
also available. g “Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting” (P. 101)

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight the sequential shooting/self-timer icon using the

Single
FGHI buttons. ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
S ±0
Natural
G±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

137 Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting

Setting the image aspect
Choose the ratio of width to height for pictures according to your intent or your goals for printing or
the like. In addition to the standard aspect (width-to-height) ratio of [4:3], the camera offers settings
of [16:9], [3:2], [1:1], and [3:4].

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Aspect] using the FGHI buttons.

Aspect
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

BImage aspect can only be set for still images.

BJPEG images are recorded at the selected aspect ratio. RAW images are the same size as the image
sensor and are recorded at an aspect ratio of [4:3] with a tag indicating the aspect ratio selected. A
crop indicating the selected aspect ratio is displayed when images are played back.

138 Setting the image aspect

Photo File and Image Size Options (KX)
You can set an image quality mode for still images. Select a quality suitable for the application (such as
for processing on PC, use on website etc.).

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [KX] using the FGHI buttons. KK

ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

Choose from the following options.

Option Image size Compression rate File format

LSF 5184 × 3888 SuperFine (1/2.7) JPG

LF 5184 × 3888 Fine (1/4) JPG

LN 5184 × 3888 Normal (1/8) JPG

MN 3200×2400 Normal (1/8) JPG

RAW 5184×3888 Lossless compression ORF

RAW+JPEG RAW plus the JPEG option selected above

BThe image size/compression combinations available can be selected in the menus.

g C Custom Menu G > [X Set] (P. 288)
B The options available during high resolution shooting (P. 109) are IF, JF, IF+RAW, and
JF+RAW.
C Selecting High Res Shot changes the image quality option selected; be sure to check the
image quality setting before shooting.

139 Photo File and Image Size Options (KX)

BRAW images consist of unprocessed image data to which settings such as exposure compensation
and white balance have yet to be applied. They serve as raw data for images that will be processed
after shooting. RAW image files:
- Have the extension “.orf”
- Cannot be viewed on other cameras
- Can be viewed using OM Workspace digital photo management and editing software
- Can be saved in JPEG format using the [RAW Data Edit] (P. 250) retouch option in the camera
menus

140 Photo File and Image Size Options (KX)

Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX)
Choose the image quality options available for movie recording.
When choosing an option, consider how the movie will be used: for example, are you planning to
process it on a computer, or is it intended for upload to a website? The camera can store multiple
combinations of frame size, rate, and compression from which you can select according to your
goals. Slow- and fast-motion and high-speed movie options are also available. g “Filming Slow- or
Fast-Motion Movies (Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies)” (P. 146) and “Filming High-Speed Movies” (P. 144)

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [nX] using the FGHI buttons. nK

ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
C-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p

n 250 F5.6 1:02:03

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

To change movie record mode settings, press OK followed by the INFO button and rotate
the rear dial.

141 Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX)

The Movie Quality Icon
Changes to settings are reflected in the [nX] icon as shown below.

1 2 1 Movie Resolution
2 Compression/Bit Rate
3 Frame Rate
4 Movie type
4 3

Movie Resolution

FHD Full HD 1 1920 × 1080

HD HD 1 1280 × 720

4K 4K 1 3840 × 2160

C4K 4K Digital Cinema 1 4096 × 2160

1 Movies are saved in MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format.

Compression/Bit Rate

C Not available when [4K] or [C4K] is selected for [Movie Resolution].

A-I All Intra 1

SF Super Fine

F Fine

N Normal

1 “All-Intra” movies use no inter-frame compression. This suits them to editing but increases file size.

Frame Rate

60p 60p: 59.94 fps

50p 50p: 50.00 fps

30p 30p: 29.97 fps

142 Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX)

 25p 25p: 25.00 fps

24p: 23.98 fps

24p
24p: 24.00 fps (C4K)

[60p] and [50p] are not available when:

- [FHD] (Fulll HD) is selected for [Movie Resolution] and [A-I] is selected for bit rate
- [4K] or [C4K] is selected for [Movie Resolution]
Selecting [C4K] for [Movie Resolution] fixes [Frame Rate] at [24p].

Movie type

Setting 1, 2, 3, or 4: Save up to four combinations of frame size, rate, and

n compression for later use.

Custom: Choose frame sizes of 4K or 4K Digital Cinema. You can also film slow-
9 and fast-motion Movies (P. 146).

High-speed movie
—
g “Filming High-Speed Movies” (P. 144)

C Depending on the card used, recording may end before the maximum length is reached.
C Bit-rate selection may be unavailable at some settings.
C Movies are recorded at an aspect ratio of 16:9. C4K movies are recorded at an aspect ratio of 17:9.

143 Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX)

Filming High-Speed Movies
Film at high frame rates. Movies are filmed at 120 fps and play back at 60 fps. Stretching playback to
double the recording time (as is the case when 60p is selected as the playback frame rate) lets you
view in slow motion movements that in real life took only the blink of an eye.
A high-speed movie option can be included in the movie image quality menu. Your choice of playback
frame rate determines the playback speed multiplier.
Changes to settings are reflected in the movie quality icon as shown below.

1 2 1 Movie Resolution
2 Movie type
3 Playback Frame Rate

Movie Resolution

FHD Full HD (1920 × 1080)

Movie type

HS High speed (120 fps)

Playback Frame Rate

60p 60p: 59.94 fps; plays back at 0.5× speed

50p 50p: 50.00 fps; plays back at 0.42× speed

30p 30p: 29.97 fps; plays back at 0.25× speed

25p 25p: 25.00 fps; plays back at 0.21× speed

24p 24p: 23.98 fps; plays back at 0.2× speed

1. Select 0 (high-speed movie recording).

To use current settings, press the OK button.
The camera will exit the menu with the current options selected.

2. To edit current settings, press the INFO button in Step 1.

This places the cursor in the list of high-speed movie options.

144 Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX)

 3. Choose the playback frame rate.
Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

4. Press the OK button to select the highlighted option and exit.

C Focus, exposure, and white balance lock during recording.

C Sound is not recorded.
C The picture angle is slightly reduced.
C Aperture, shutter speed, exposure compensation, and ISO sensitivity cannot be changed during
recording.
C Time codes cannot be recorded or displayed.
C Brightness may change if zoom is adjusted during recording.
C Individual movie files recorded to SD or SDHC memory cards can be up to 4 GB in size. With SDXC
cards, recording will end before the movie reaches a length with a playback time of 2 hours.
C High-speed movie recording is not available while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
C [n Image Stabilizer] > [M-IS1] is not available.
C [Movie A] cannot be used.
C [i-Enhance], [e-Portrait], and art filter picture modes are not available.
C [Gradation] is fixed at [Gradation Normal].
C High-speed movie recording is not available during remote photography when the camera is
connected to a smartphone.

145 Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX)

Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies (Slow-
and Fast-Motion Movies)
You can create slow motion or fast-motion movies. You can set the recording speed using 9 in record
mode.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [nX] using the FGHI buttons.

3. Highlight 2 (custom record mode; P. 142) using the front dial nK

and press the OK button. ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0 Natural
G±0 S ±0 ±0
C-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto C4K
YF
M-IS 24p

n 250 F5.6 1:02:03

The option selected for [Slow or Fast Motion] can be changed by pressing the INFO
button. After highlighting [Slow or Fast Motion] using the HI buttons, use the FG
buttons to choose a speed multiplier and then press the OK button. Choose high multipliers
for fast-motion movies, low multipliers for slow-motion movies. The frame rate changes
accordingly.

4. Press the R button to start shooting.

Press the R button again to end shooting.
The movie will be played back at a fixed speed so that it appears to be in slow motion or
fast-motion.

C Sound will not be recorded.

C Any picture mode art filters will be canceled.
C Either or both of slow motion and fast-motion cannot be set for some options of [nX].
C Shutter speed is limited to values no slower than 1/24 s. The slowest speed available varies with the
option selected for [Frame Rate].

Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies (Slow- and

146 Fast-Motion Movies)
Using a flash (Flash photography)
When using a flash unit, you can choose the flash mode using camera controls and take pictures with
the flash.

Attaching Compatible Flash Units

The methods used to attach and operate external flash units vary with the unit. See the documentation
provided with the unit for details. The instructions here apply to the FL-LM3.

C Confirm that both the camera and flash unit are off. Attaching or removing a flash unit while either
the camera or flash unit is on could damage the equipment.

1. Remove the hot shoe cover and attach the flash.

Slide the flash in until the foot clicks into place at the back
of the shoe.

2. Position the flash head for bounce-flash photography or direct

lighting.
The flash head can be rotated up and left or right.

Note that flash output may be insufficient for correct exposure when bounce flash lighting is
used.

147 Using a flash (Flash photography)

 3. Rotate the flash ON/OFF lever to the ON position.

Rotate the lever to the OFF position when the flash is not in use.

Removing Flash Units

1. Keeping the UNLOCK button pressed, slide the flash unit from
the hot shoe.

148 Using a flash (Flash photography)

Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)
When taking pictures with a flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can select a flash mode
using camera controls. Turning an attached flash unit on automatically limits the fastest available
shutter speed.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Flash Mode] using the FGHI buttons.

Flash Mode
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

Flash Mode
Flash settings can be accessed via the LV super control ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0 S ±0
Natural
±0
panel. #Manual
S-AF ±0 Normal
Off
# FULL o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

1 2
1 Flash output (“manual
value” mode)
Flash intensity control
(other modes)
2 Flash mode

149 Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)

Flash Modes
Enable the flash.
C Shutter speed can be set to values between those selected
A Fill In
for [A Slow Limit] and [A X-Sync.]. g C Custom
Menu F > [A Slow Limit], [A X-Sync.] (P. 346)

Disable the flash.

B Flash off
C The flash will not fire even if the unit is on.

Reduce “red-eye” in portrait photos.

e Redeye In other respects, the flash functions as it does in A (fill in)
mode.

Slow shutter speeds are used to capture both the main subject
Slow Sync and the background.
g (front-curtain C Shutter speed is set according to the exposure value
sync) metered by the camera and is not restricted by the option
selected for [A Slow Limit].

g (slow sync) combined with red-eye reduction. The flash is

f Red-Eye Slow
timed using front-curtain sync.

As for g (slow sync).

Slow Sync
(Rear-curtain
C The flash fires immediately before the
c shutter closes. Moving objects appear
sync)
to leave trails of light behind them.

h, i,
Manual Value The flash fires at the selected level.
etc.

C Super FP high-speed sync must be configured using flash controls.

C In [e] (red-eye reduction) mode, the shutter will be released approximately one second after the
initial red-eye reduction pre-flash. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete.
C [e] (red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired results in some conditions.

150 Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)

Flash Mode and Shutter Speed
The range of shutter speeds available varies with the flash mode. The range of available speeds can
be further restricted using the options in the C Custom Menu. g C Custom Menu F > [A Slow
Limit], [A X-Sync.] (P. 346)

Shooting Modes P and A

LV super control
Flash mode Flash timing Shutter speed
panel

A Fill In
Front-curtain sync 30 – 1/250 s
e Red-eye

B Flash Off — —

f Red-eye slow
Front-curtain sync
g Slow (front-curtain sync) 60 – 1/250 s

c Slow (rear-curtain sync) Rear-curtain sync

h, i, etc. Manual Value Front-curtain sync 30 – 1/250 s

Shooting Modes S and M

LV super control
Flash mode Flash timing Shutter speed
panel

A Fill In
Front-curtain sync 60 – 1/250 s
e Red-eye

B Flash Off — —

151 Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)

LV super control
Flash mode Flash timing Shutter speed
panel

c Slow (rear-curtain sync) Rear-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s
h, i, etc. Manual Value Front-curtain sync

Shooting Mode B 1

LV super control
Flash mode Flash timing Shutter speed
panel

A Fill In
Front-curtain sync —
e Red-eye

B Flash Off — —

c Slow (rear-curtain sync) Rear-curtain sync —

h, i, etc. Manual Value Front-curtain sync —

1 Rear-curtain sync is not available when [LIVE COMP] (P. 62) is selected.

C Cautions: Flash Mode

In red-eye reduction mode, the shutter will be released approximately one second after the
initial red-eye reduction pre-flash. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete. Also
note that red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results in some conditions.
The fastest shutter speed available when the flash fires is 1/250 s. Bright backgrounds in
pictures taken with the flash may be overexposed.
The sync speed for silent photography (P. 106), High Res Shot (P. 109), and focus bracketing
(P. 216) is 1/50 s. Setting [ISO] to a value over ISO 8000 when using an option that requires the
electronic shutter (for example, silent mode or focus bracketing) sets the flash sync speed to
1/20 s. The flash sync speed for ISO bracketing (P. 216) is also 1/20 s.
Even the minimum available flash output may be too bright at short range. To prevent
overexposure in pictures taken at short range, select mode A or M and choose a smaller
aperture (higher f-number) or choose a lower setting for [ISO].

152 Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)

Adjusting flash output (Flash intensity control)
Flash output can be adjusted if you find that your subject is overexposed, or is underexposed even
though the exposure in the rest of the frame is appropriate. Flash compensation is available in modes
other than [AManual] (manual).
When [AManual] is selected, you can adjust flash output by pressing G to select [AFULL] and
then rotating the front dial.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [7] using the FGHI buttons. x

ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
Off
± 0.0 sRGB
S-IS AUTO 4K
F 30p
M-IS
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

Changes to flash intensity made with the external flash unit are added to those made with the
camera.

153 Adjusting flash output (Flash intensity control)

Processing options (Picture Mode)
Choose how pictures are processed during shooting to enhance color, tone, and other properties.
Choose from preset picture modes according to your subject or artistic intent. Contrast, sharpness, and
other settings can be adjusted separately for each mode. You can also add artistic effects using art
filters. Art filters give you the option of added frame effects and the like. Adjustments to individual
parameters are stored separately for each picture mode and art filter.

Picture mode options

The camera adjusts colors and contrast for optimal results according
1 i-Enhance
to the type of subject (P. 164).

2 Vivid Choose for vivid colors.

3 Natural Choose for natural colors.

4 Muted Choose for pictures that will later be retouched.

5 Portrait Enhance skin tones.

Record pictures in monochrome. You can apply color filter effects

M Monochrome
and choose a tint (P. 163).

Adjust picture mode parameters to create a custom version of a

C Custom
selected picture mode.

G e-Portrait Smooth complexions.

Process pictures to preserve the vivid colors seen under water.

6 Underwater We recommend choosing [Off] for [A+WB] in C Custom
Menu F (P. 287) when this option is selected.

R Color Creator Adjust hue and color to suit your creative intent (P. 157).

154 Processing options (Picture Mode)

a Pop Art

b Soft Focus

c Pale&Light Color

d Light Tone

e Grainy Film

f Pin Hole

g Diorama

h Cross Process
Uses Art Filter settings. Art effects can also be used. Available effects
differ depending on the art filter.
i Gentle Sepia

j Dramatic Tone

k Key Line

l Watercolor

m Vintage

n Partial Color (P. 76)

o Bleach Bypass

p Instant Film

k Flat 1 Movies are recorded using a tone curve adapted to color grading.

Movies are recorded using a log tone curve for greater freedom
l OM-Log400 1
during color grading.

1 Displayed in movie mode when [On] is selected for [n Specification Settings] > [n Picture
Mode] in the n Video Menu (P. 233).

155 Processing options (Picture Mode)

 Art filters apply only to the JPEG copy. [RAW+JPEG] is automatically selected for image quality in
place of [RAW].

C Depending on the subject, tone transitions may be ragged, the effect may be less noticeable, or the
image may become more “grainy”.
BYou can hide or reveal picture modes using [Picture Mode Settings] in C Custom
Menu i (P. 279).

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Picture Mode] using the FGHI buttons.

Picture Mode
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

Picture Mode
Depending on the option selected, picture mode ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0
i-Enhance
S ±0 ±0
parameters may be displayed in LV super control panel. #
S-AF ±0 Normal
Off Standard
Adjust parameters as desired. # ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto
-
4K
S Sharpness (P. 158) M-IS
YF
30p

- F Contrast (P. 159)

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

- E Saturation (P. 160)

- D Gradation (P. 161)
- F Color Filter (P. 162)
- T Monochrome Color (P. 163)
- E Effect (P. 164)

156 Processing options (Picture Mode)

Adjusting overall color (Color Creator)
The camera permits intuitive adjustments to color saturation and hue. Choose from 30 hues and 8
levels of saturation. The results can be previewed in the display.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Picture Mode] using the FGHI buttons.

3. Rotate the front dial to highlight [Color Creator].

Picture Mode

A [RColor/Vivid] item will appear in the LV super control ISO

Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0
Color Creator

panel. #
S-AF
Off
cColor/Vivid

# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

1 2
1 Picture Mode
2 R Color/Vivid

4. Highlight [R Color/Vivid] using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

5. Adjust saturation and hue.

Color
Rotate the front dial to adjust hue.
Rotate the rear dial to adjust saturation.
To restore default settings, press and hold the OK button.
ViVid±0

Reset

6. Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.

Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality (P. 139) will be recorded at an image quality of
RAW+JPEG.
Pictures taken using [HDR] (P. 224) or [Multiple Exposure] (P. 227) are recorded at a setting of
[Natural].

157 Adjusting overall color (Color Creator)

Making fine adjustments to sharpness
(Sharpness)
Adjust image sharpness. Outlines can be emphasized for a sharp, clear picture. Settings are stored
separately for each picture mode.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Sharpness] using the FGHI buttons.

Sharpness
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

Making fine adjustments to sharpness

158 (Sharpness)
Making fine adjustments to contrast
(Contrast)
Adjust image contrast. Increasing contrast heightens the difference between bright and dark areas for
a harder, more well-defined picture. Settings are stored separately for each picture mode.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Contrast] using the FGHI buttons.

Contrast
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

159 Making fine adjustments to contrast (Contrast)

Making fine adjustments to saturation
(Saturation)
Adjust color saturation. Increasing saturation makes pictures more vivid. Settings are stored separately
for each picture mode.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Saturation] using the FGHI buttons.

Saturation
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

Making fine adjustments to saturation

160 (Saturation)
Making fine adjustments to tone (Gradation)
Adjust shading and color brightness. You can brighten or darken the entire picture to bring it closer to
what you envisage. The difference in contrast can be adjusted to capture details in both shadows and
highlights. Settings are stored separately for each picture mode.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Gradation] using the FGHI buttons.

Gradation
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

Divides the image into detailed regions and adjusts the

brightness separately for each region. This is effective for
D Auto Shadow Adj
images with areas of large contrast in which the whites
appear too bright or the blacks appear too dark.

Gradation
D Normal Optimal shading. Recommended in most circumstances.
Normal

Gradation High
D High Uses a tone suitable for a bright subject.
Key

Gradation Low
D Low Uses a tone suitable for a dark subject.
Key

161 Making fine adjustments to tone (Gradation)

Applying filter effects to monochrome
pictures (Color Filter)
Color filter effects can be added when [Monochrome] is selected for picture mode (P. 154).
Depending on the color of the subject, color filter effects can make subjects brighter or enhance
contrast. Orange adds more contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange. Green is a good
choice for portraits and the like.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Picture Mode] using the FGHI buttons.

3. Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.

4. Highlight [Color Filter] using the FGHI buttons.

Color Filter
ISO WB A ± 0 M Monochrome
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF Normal
#
Off F N T N
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

5. Use the front dial to select an option.

N N:None No filter effect.

Ye Ye:Yellow Reproduces clearly defined white cloud with natural blue sky.

Or Or:Orange Slightly brings out blue skies or the light of the setting sun.

R R:Red Further brings out blue skies or autumn foliage.

Adds warmth to skin tones in portraits. The green filter also

G G:Green
emphasizes the reds in lipstick.

Applying filter effects to monochrome pictures

162 (Color Filter)
Adjusting the tone of a monochrome image
(Monochrome Color)
Choose the tint used for pictures taken with [Monochrome] selected for picture mode (P. 154).

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Picture Mode] using the FGHI buttons.

3. Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.

4. Highlight [Monochrome Color] using the FGHI buttons.

Monochrome Color
ISO WB A ± 0 M Monochrome
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF Normal
#
Off F N T N
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

5. Use the front dial to select an option.

N N:Normal Creates a normal black and white image.

S S:Sepia Shoot in sepia-tinted monochrome.

B B:Blue Shoot in blue-tinted monochrome.

P P:Purple Shoot in purple-tinted monochrome.

G G:Green Shoot in green-tinted monochrome.

Adjusting the tone of a monochrome image

163 (Monochrome Color)
Adjusting i-Enhance effects (Effect)
Choose the strength of the i-Enhance effect when [i-Enhance] is selected for picture mode (P. 154).

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Effect] using the FGHI buttons.

Effect
ISO WB A±0 i-Enhance
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off Standard
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

E Low Effect: Low Adds a low i-Enhance effect to images.

Adds an i-Enhance effect between “low” and “high” to

E Standard Effect: Standard
images.

E High Effect: High Adds a high i-Enhance effect to images.

164 Adjusting i-Enhance effects (Effect)

Setting the color reproduction format (Color
Space)
You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly reproduced when shot images are
regenerated on a monitor or using a printer. This option is equivalent to the [Color Space] in
C Custom Menu G (P. 288).

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Color Space] using the FGHI buttons.

Color Space
ISO WB A±0 Natural
Auto Auto G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Use the front dial to select an option.

The color space standardized by an international standards organization. It

sRGB is widely supported across displays, printers, digital cameras, and computer
applications. This setting is recommended in most circumstances.

It can reproduce a wider gamut of colors than sRGB. Accurate color

reproduction is available only with software and devices (displays, printers,
AdobeRGB
and the like) that support this standard. An underscore (“_”) appears at the
beginning of the file name (e.g., “_xxx0000.jpg”).

C [AdobeRGB] is not available in AUTO, SCN, ART, HDR, or movie (n) mode.

Setting the color reproduction format (Color

165 Space)
Changing the brightness of highlights and
shadows (Highlight&Shadow Control)
Adjust brightness separately for highlights, mid-tones, and shadows. You gain greater control over
exposure than you would with exposure compensation alone. You can selectively make highlights
darker or shadows brighter.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [Highlight&Shadow Control] using the FGHI

Highlight&Shadow Control
buttons and press the OK button. ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0 Natural
G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

3. Press the INFO button to choose the desired tone range. Highlight±0
Highlight+5

The tone range changes each time the button is pressed.

Shadow±0

Midtone

1
1 Selected tone range

4. Rotate the dials to choose the desired setting. Highlight+5

[Hi. & Sh.] selected

Adjust highlights using the front dial and shadows using the
rear dial.
[Midtone] selected Shadow±0

Use the front or rear dial. Midtone Reset

To reset highlight and shadow control, press and hold the

OK button.

5. Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.

Changing the brightness of highlights and

166 shadows (Highlight&Shadow Control)
Assigning functions to buttons (Button
Function)
Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing functions.
The functions assigned using [K Button Function] take effect only during still photography. The
functions assigned using [n Button Function] take effect in n (movie) mode.

Customizable Controls
Default role
Icon Button
K n

gY (sequential
gY gY button Off
shooting/self-timer)

U U button U (display selection)

F F button F (exposure compensation)

R R button R REC (movie recording)

V AEL/AFL button V (exposure/focus lock)

P ISO button ISO sensitivity

d Arrow pad 1 Y (AF-target position)

M Arrow pad I (right) 2 A (flash) Electronic zoom 4

Arrow pad G gY (sequential

K WB (white balance)
(down) 2 shooting/self-timer)

W W button z (preview) 8 (magnify)

j Lens Fn button 3 AF stop

167 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

 1 To use the FGHI buttons in their assigned roles, select [Direct Function] for d.
2 To use [M Function] and [K Function] options, you will first have to select [Direct Function] for
[d Function].
3 The j button can be used for the functions available on some lenses.
4 Only available with power zoom lenses.

To change the function assigned to a button, follow the steps below.

1. Press the OK button to display the LV super control panel.

2. Highlight [K Button Function] or [n Button Function] KButton Function

using the FGHI buttons and press the OK button. ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0 Natural
G±0 S ±0 ±0
S-AF ±0 Normal
#
Off
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

[K Button Function] of Custom Menu is displayed in still image shooting mode, and [n
Button Function] of [n Button/Dial/Lever] is displayed in movie mode.

3. Highlight the desired control using the FG buttons and press the I button.

4. Highlight a function using the FG buttons and press the OK button to assign it to the
selected control.

168 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

Available Roles
K only: Can only be assigned using [K Button Function].
n only: Can only be assigned using [n Button Function].

BThe options available vary from button to button.

Role Function

Suspend autofocus. Focus locks and autofocus is suspended while

AF Stop (AF Stop)
the control is pressed. Applies only to lens j buttons.

Lock focus and/or exposure. When used for exposure lock, the
control locks exposure when pressed and releases the lock when
AEL/AFL (V)
pressed a second time. The behavior of the control can be selected
using [K AEL/AFL] in C Custom Menu a (P. 299).

The control functions as a movie-record button. Press to start or stop

RREC (movie recording)
recording.

Assign roles to the buttons on the arrow pad (FGHI). The

following roles can be assigned:
H button: Y (AF-target selection)
Direct Function
F button: F (exposure compensation)
(n)
I button: A (flash) (still picture)/electronic zoom (movie)
G button: g/Y (drive mode) (still picture)/WB (movie)
The I and G buttons can be assigned other functions if desired.

Stop aperture down to the selected value. This lets you preview
Preview (z) depth of field. Aperture stops down to the currently-selected value
(K only) while the button is pressed. Preview options can be selected using
[z Settings] in C Custom Menu j (P. 280).

169 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

 Role Function

Measure a value for one-touch white balance (P. 131).

During still photography, one-touch white balance can be measured
by holding the control and pressing the shutter button while framing
a reference object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display. A
list of one-touch white balance options will be displayed, from which
I (one-touch white
you can choose the location to which the new value will be saved.
balance)
When filming movies, you can measure one-touch white balance
by pressing the control while framing a reference object (a piece
of white paper or the like) in the display. A list of one-touch white
balance options will be displayed, from which you can choose the
location to which the new value will be saved.

Choose the AF-target mode (P. 91) and position the AF target (P. 95).
Press the control to view the AF-target selection display. Use the
AF-Area Select (Y) (AF- front or rear dial to choose the AF-target mode and the arrow pad to
target selection) position the AF target.
You can choose the controls used. g C Custom
Menu b[Y Select Screen Settings] (P. 307)

Recall previously-saved [AF Mode], [AF Target Mode], and [AF

Target Point] “home position” settings. Press the control to recall
saved settings and press it again to restore the settings previously in
Y Home (Y2) (AF
effect. Home position settings are saved using [Y Set Home] in
home position)
C Custom Menu b (P. 271).
(K only)
Separate home positions can be saved for use when
shooting in portrait (“tall”) and landscape (“wide”) orientations.
g C Custom Menu b[K Orientation Linked Y] (P. 310)

Switch between AF and MF. Press once to select MF and again to

return to the previous mode. The focus mode can also be selected by
holding the button and rotating a dial.
This option will have no effect during still photography if [mode2] is
MF (AF/MF toggle)
selected for [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 321).
It will likewise have no effect during movie recording if [mode2] is
selected for [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] in
the n Video Menu (P. 233).

170 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

 Role Function

Switch between RAW + JPEG and JPEG [KX] settings. Press the
RAW X (RAW quality) control to switch from RAW or JPEG to RAW + JPEG or from RAW +
(K only) JPEG to JPEG. You can also choose an image quality setting by
holding the button and rotating a dial.

Take a test shot. You can view the effects of selected settings in an
Test Picture (K TEST) actual photograph. If you keep the control pressed while pressing
(K only) the shutter button, you will be able to view the results but the
picture will not be saved to the memory card.

Recall settings for the selected custom mode. Press the control once
Custom Mode C–Custom
to recall saved settings (P. 77), a second time to restore the settings
Mode C4 (C–C4)
previously in effect. The control continues to perform this function
(K only)
when a custom mode is selected with the mode dial.

Adjust exposure settings. Hold the control and rotate the front or
rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. The adjustments available vary with the
shooting mode:
[P]: Use the front or rear dial or HI buttons for exposure
compensation. Use the FG buttons for program shift.
[A]: Use the front or rear dial or HI buttons for exposure
compensation. Use the FG buttons for aperture.
[S]: Use the front or rear dial or HI buttons for exposure
Exposure F (exposure)
compensation. Use the FG buttons for shutter speed.
[M]1: Use the rear dial or FG button for shutter speed. Use the
front dial or HI buttons for aperture.
[B]: Use rear dial or FG buttons to switch between bulb/time and
live composite photography. Use the front dial or HI buttons for
aperture.
1 For information on adjusting exposure settings when [AUTO]
is selected for [ISO] (P. 98, P. 117), see “Adjusting Exposure
Compensation” (P. 90).

Digital Tele-converter Turn the digital teleconverter on or off (P. 208). Press once to zoom in
(e) and again to zoom out.

Press the control to view keystone compensation settings (P. 230).

Keystone Comp. (P)
After adjusting settings, press the control again to exit. To cancel
(K only)
keystone compensation, press and hold the control.

171 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

 Role Function

Fisheye Compensation Press the control once to enable fisheye compensation (P. 353) and
(r) again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to
(K only) choose from [Angle] options 1, 2, and 3.

Press the control once to display the zoom frame and again to
zoom in (P. 96). Press the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide
Magnify (8)
the zoom frame, press and hold the control. Use touch controls or
FGHI buttons to position the zoom frame.

Press the control once to enable HDR (P. 224) and again to disable.
HDR (M)
Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust [HDR]
(K only)
settings, including HDR bracketing.

Press the control once to enable bracketing (P. 216) and again to
BKT (N)
disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust
(K only)
[Bracketing] settings.

Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust [ISO]
ISO settings (P. 98), or press the control to activate settings and then
make adjustments using the front or rear dial or HI buttons.

Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust [WB]
WB (white balance) settings (P. 129), or press the control to activate settings and then
make adjustments using the front or rear dial or HI buttons.

Configure the control for use as a multi-function button (P. 176).

Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to choose the
Multi Function (Multi Fn)
function performed. The selected function can be performed by
pressing the control.

Press the control once to turn peaking on and again to turn it off
Peaking (PEAK) (P. 317). When peaking is on, peaking options (color, amount) can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button.

Display the digital level gauge. The exposure bar display in the
q Level Disp (W) viewfinder functions as a level gauge. Press the control again to exit.
(Level gauge display) This option takes effect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for
[EVF Style] in C Custom Menu I (P. 349).

172 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

 Role Function

Switch between viewfinder photography and live view. If [Off] is

U View Selection (U) selected for [EVF Auto Switch] in C Custom Menu I (P. 293), the
(display selection) display will switch between the viewfinder and the monitor. Press and
hold the control to display [EVF Auto Switch] options.

S-OVF (s) Press the control once to select [On] for [S-OVF] in C Custom
(K only) Menu I (P. 293) and again to select [Off].

Press the control once to enable [AF Limiter] (P. 312) and again to
AF Limiter (AF Limit)
disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to choose
(K only)
from three stored settings.

Toggle [AF Mode] > [Preset MF] on or off (P. 122). Press the control
once to enable preset MF and again to restore the previous focus
mode. Alternatively, you can choose the [AF Mode] by holding the
control and rotating a dial.
Preset MF (PreMF) This option will have no effect during still photography if [mode2] is
selected for [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 321).
It will likewise have no effect during movie recording if [mode2] is
selected for [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] in
the n Video Menu (P. 233).

Lens Info Settings Recall previously-saved lens data (P. 348). This can be used to recall
(0 Lens) saved data for the current lens after changing lenses or the like.

Press the control once to select [Off] for [Image Stabilizer] and
IS Mode (IS) again to turn image stabilization on (P. 134). Hold the control and
rotate the front or rear dial to access [Image Stabilizer] options.

Press the control once to turn flicker scan on (P. 343, P. 240). You can
adjust shutter speed for best results while viewing banding in the
Flicker Scan (o) display. Press the control again to display shooting information and
access other settings. Press and hold the control to select [Off] for
[Flicker Scan].

Press the control once to enable [Live ND Shooting] (P. 213), again
Live ND Shooting (O)
to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to
(K only)
choose a setting for [ND Number].

173 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

 Role Function

Select the face used for focus when the camera detects multiple
portrait subjects. Pressing the control selects the face closest to the
current AF target. If q (all targets) is selected for AF-target mode,
I Face Selection (Q) pressing the button will instead select the face closest to the center
of the frame. To choose a different face, hold the control and rotate
the front or rear dial.
This option can also be used during movie recording.

Pressing the button when an option other than [Face Priority Off]
is selected for [I Face Priority] (P. 126) selects [Face Priority Off];
I Face Priority (I) to restore the previous setting, press the button again. To change the
option displayed in the [I Face Priority] menu, hold the button
and rotate the front or rear dial.

Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [Live View Boost]
in C Custom Menu j (P. 280) selects [On1]. If an option other
Live View Boost (Z)
than [Off] is selected, pressing the button selects [Off]; to restore
(K only)
the previous setting, press the button again. To choose an option for
[Live View Boost], hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial.

Press the control once to disable, and again to enable, the lens focus
ring. This option is available when [S-AFJ], [C-AFJ], [J],
[C-AF+TRJ], [PreJ], or [RAFJ] is selected for [AF Mode].
The J portion of the AF mode indicator is displayed gray while the
ring is disabled.
Focus Ring Lock (O)
In the case of lenses equipped with an MF (manual focus) clutch,
pressing the button has no effect when the focus ring is in the MF
position (closer to the camera body).
Focus ring lock ends when you perform an operation such as turning
the camera off or attaching a different lens.

Adjust flash settings (P. 149). Press once to display flash options and
again select the highlighted option and exit. Use the front or rear
Flash Mode (A)
dial or HI buttons to adjust settings.
(K only)
This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].

gY (sequential Choose a drive (sequential shooting/self-timer) mode (P. 137). Press

shooting/self-timer) once to display drive mode options and then choose a mode using
(K only) the front or rear dial or HI buttons.

174 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

 Role Function

Lock touch controls. Press and hold the button once to lock touch
7 Lock (7) (touch control controls and again to unlock.
lock) This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].

Zoom power zoom lenses in or out. After pressing the control, use
the arrow pad to zoom in or out. Use the F or I button to zoom in
Electronic Zoom (X) and the G or H button to zoom out.
This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].

Zoom in or out using the movie teleconverter (P. 177). Press the
control once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom in. Press
Movie A (A)
the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide the zoom frame,
(n only)
press and hold the control. Use touch controls or the arrow pad
(FGHI) to position the zoom frame.

S-AF Press the control to focus using [S-AF]. Focus will lock while the
(n only) control is pressed.

Off The control is not used.

175 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

Using multi function options (Multi Function)
Assign multiple roles to a single button.

BTo use the multi function feature, you must first assign [Multi Function] to a camera control.
g “Customizable Controls” (P. 167)

Choosing a function

1. Hold the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned and

rotate the front or rear dial.

Highlight&Shadow Control

P ISO WB a

Rotate the dial until the desired feature is highlighted. Release the button to select the
highlighted feature.

2. Press the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned.

3. Adjust settings.

[Multi Function] can be used to access the following features:

Adjust brightness using the front or rear dial. Press the INFO
Highlight &
B Shadow Control
button to choose the tone range (highlights, shadows, or mid-
tones).

Use the front dial to adjust hue and the rear dial to adjust
R Color Creator
saturation.

ISO ISO
Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.
WB WB

8 Magnify The zoom frame will be displayed.

176 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

 O Image Aspect Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.

s S-OVF
Press the button to turn the feature on or off.
PEAK Peaking

You can choose the options displayed. g C Custom Menu i > [Multi Function Settings]
(P. 279)

BDuring shooting, [Highlight & Shadow Control] can also be set by pressing the F (exposure
compensation) button followed by the INFO button.

Adjusting Zoom During Filming (Movie A)

You can zoom in on a selected area of the frame for movie recording without using lens controls. Use
for instant close-ups or cuts to wider angles. Buttons or touch controls can be used to choose the
zoom location and cut to close ups or wide angles during filming.
[Movie A] is a [n Button Function] option. It turns on or off with a button and so must be
assigned to a control using [n Button Function]. g “Customizable Controls” (P. 167)
This feature is not available when [4K] or [C4K] is selected for [nX] > [Movie Resolution].
This feature cannot be used to film high-speed movies.
This feature cannot be combined with [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 208).

Using [Movie A]

1. Press the button to which [Movie A] is assigned.

L
R

TC 00:00:00:00 DF M-IS 1

A frame will appear in the center of the display. C-AF

ISO-A
200

FHD SF
60p

n 250 F5.6 0.0 1:02:03

2. Position the frame as desired.

Position the frame using touch controls or the arrow pad
(FGHI).
To re-center the frame, press and hold the OK button.

177 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

3. Press the button to which [Movie A] is assigned once more.
The camera will zoom the selected area in to fill the display.
To return to the zoom frame, press the button to which [Movie A] is assigned a third time.

4. To end zoom, press the OK button once, or press and hold the button to which [Movie A] is
assigned.

178 Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)

Playback
Information display during playback

Playback image information

Simplified display

2 3
1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
×10 48kHz JPEG

19
HDR1 4:3 YF 100-0015
HDR1 4:3 11
YF
18 2022.10.15 12:30:00 15 KTEST

17 16 15 14 13 12
ND8 d HDR1
P AUTO

22 TC 00:00:00:00 DF 1.40GB 4K
30p 100-0004
2022.10.15 12:30:00 [0:20:20] 4

21 20

Overall display

23 24 25 26 27
×10 48kHz JPEG

P 250 F5.6 28
+2.0 45mm 29
-18 +1.0 30
WB
AUTO A+4 G+4 31
ISO 400 sRGB 32
Natural 33
5184×3888 1/8 34
HDR1 4:3 YF 100-0015
2022.10.15 12:30:00 15

40 39 38 37 36 35

179 Information display during playback

1 Battery level (P. 32) 23 Aspect border (P. 138)
2 Active Bluetooth® connection (P. 359, P. 377) 24 AF target display (P. 123)
3 Remote control (P. 377) 25 Shooting mode (P. 43)
4 Wireless LAN connection (P. 359) 26 Shutter speed (P. 48, P. 51, P. 53, P. 55)
5 GPS data indicator (P. 368) 27 Exposure compensation (P. 89)
6 Print order 28 Aperture value (P. 48, P. 51, P. 53, P. 55)
Number of prints (P. 193) 29 Focal length
7 Sound record (P. 196) 30 Flash intensity control (P. 153)
8 Share order (P. 190) 31 White balance compensation (P. 133)
9 Protect (P. 188) 32 Color space (P. 165)
10 Image selected (P. 192) 33 Picture mode (P. 154)
11 File number 34 Compression rate (P. 347)

g C Custom Menu p > [File Name] 35 Pixel count (P. 347)

(P. 290) 36 ISO sensitivity (P. 98, P. 117)

12 Frame number 37 White balance (P. 129)

13 Image quality (P. 139, P. 141) 38 Focus adjustment

14 Aspect ratio (P. 138) g C Custom Menu c > [AF Focus Adj.]
15 HDR image (P. 224) (P. 313)
16 Focus stacking (P. 216) 39 Metering mode (P. 124)
17 Live ND filter (P. 213) 40 Histogram
18 Date and time (P. 34)
19 Test shot (P. 169)
20 Movie file size 1 (P. 424)
21 Movie recording time 1 (P. 424)
22 Time code 1

g n Video Menu > [n Display

Settings] > [Time Code Settings] (P. 233)

1 Displayed only during movie playback.

180 Information display during playback

Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed during playback by
pressing the INFO button.
INFO

1
×10 48kHz JPEG

HDR1 4:3 YF 100-0015

INFO 2022.10.15 12:30:00 15
INFO

×10 48kHz JPEG

P 250 F5.6
INFO +2.0 45mm
-18 +1.0
WB
AUTO A+4 G+4
ISO 400 sRGB
Natural
5184×3888 1/8
HDR1 4:3 YF 100-0015
2022.10.15 12:30:00 15

3 2
1 Simplified display
2 Overall display
3 Image only

BYou can add histogram and highlight-and-shadow displays to the information shown during
playback. g C Custom Menu i > [G/Info Settings] > [q Info] (P. 332)

181 Information display during playback

Viewing photographs and movies

Viewing photographs

1. Press the q button.

Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed.
Select the desired photograph or movie using the front dial (p) or arrow pad.
Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.

4:3 YF 100-0015
2022.10.15 12:30:00 15

Still image

Rear dial (m) Zoom in (n) (P. 186)/index (o) (P. 185)

Previous (r) (P. 183)/next (q) (P. 183)

Front dial (p)
Can also be used during playback zoom.

Single-frame playback: Next (I) (P. 183)/previous (H) (P. 183)/

playback volume (FG) (P. 197)
Close-up playback (playback zoom): Scroll the picture.
To display the next (I) or previous (H) frame without changing
Arrow pad (FGHI)
the zoom ratio, press the INFO button.
Press the INFO button again to display a zoom frame and use
FGHI to change its position.
Index/calendar playback: Highlight images

INFO button View image info (P. 181)

4 (R) button Select image (P. 192)

0 (AEL/AFL) button Protect image (P. 188)

182 Viewing photographs and movies

 D button Delete image (P. 189)

View menus (in calendar playback, press this button to exit to

OK button
single-frame playback)

Watching movies

1. Press the q button. 48kHz

Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed.

WB
P AUTO
4K
TC 00:00:00:00 DF 1.40GB 30p 100-0004
2022.10.15 12:30:00 [0:20:20] 4

Movie

2. Select a movie and press the OK button. Movie

The playback menu will be displayed.

Play from Beginning
Play Movie
Movie Edit
Share Order
0
Delete entire n

Back Set

3. Select [Play Movie] and press the OK button.

Movie playback begins.
Fast-forward and rewind using H/I.
Press the OK button again to pause playback. While playback is paused, use F to view the
first frame and G to view the last frame. Use HI or the front dial (p) to view previous or
next frame.
Press the MENU button to end playback.

183 Viewing photographs and movies

 Viewing Large/Long Movies
Movies over 4 GB in size or two hours in length are recorded over multiple files (P. 82). The files can be
played back as a single movie.

1. Press the q button.

The most recent picture will be displayed.

2. Display a movie file you want to view and press the OK button.
The following options will be displayed.
[Play from Beginning]: Play the files back in sequence from the beginning without
interruption.
[Play Movie]: Play only the current file.
[Delete entire n]: Delete the entire movie.
[Erase]: Delete only the current file.

C We recommend using the latest version of OM Workspace to play back movies on a computer
(P. 373). Before launching the software for the first time, connect the camera to the computer.

184 Viewing photographs and movies

Finding Pictures Quickly (Index and Calendar
Playback)
In single-frame playback, rotate the rear dial to G for index playback. Rotate further for calendar
playback.
Turn the rear dial to 8 to return to single-frame playback.

1 2 3
2022.10
o o Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat

25 26 27 28 29 30 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29

2022.10.15 12:30:00
4:3 YF 100-0015
15 n 2022.10.15 12:30:00 20 n 30 31 1 2 3

OK
1 Single-frame playback
2 Index display
3 Calendar display

BYou can change the number of frames for index display. g C Custom Menu i > [G/Info
Settings] > [G Settings] (P. 334)

Finding Pictures Quickly (Index and Calendar

185 Playback)
Zooming In (Playback Zoom)
In single-frame playback, turn the rear dial to 8 to zoom in. Turn to G to return to single-frame
playback.

n n

4:3 YF 100-0015
2022.10.15 12:30:00 15 o 2x o 14x

1 2 3

4
1 Single-frame playback 3 14× zoom
2 2× zoom 4 Close-up playback

186 Zooming In (Playback Zoom)

Rotating Pictures (Rotate)
Choose whether to rotate photographs.

1. Display an image you want to rotate and press the OK button.

2. Select [Rotate] and press the OK button.

3. Press F to rotate the image counterclockwise, G to rotate it clockwise; the image rotates each
time the button is pressed.
Press the OK button to save changes and exit.
Movies and protected images cannot be rotated.

BThe camera can be configured to automatically rotate portrait-orientation pictures during playback.
g q Playback Menu > [n] (P. 249)
[Rotate] is not available when [Off] is selected for [n].

187 Rotating Pictures (Rotate)

Protecting Pictures (0)
Protect images from accidental deletion.

1. Display the image you want to protect and press the 0 (AEL/AFL) button.
Protected images are marked with a 0 (“protected”) icon.
Press the 0 (AEL/AFL) button again to remove protection.

4:3 YF 100-0020
2022.10.15 12:30:00 20

BYou can also protect multiple selected images. g “Selecting Multiple Pictures (Share Order
Selected, 0, Erase Selected)” (P. 192)
C Formatting the card erases all data including protected images.

When an unprotected image is displayed, you can hold the 0 (AEL/AFL) button and rotate the
front or rear dial to protect all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previously-protected
images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
When a protected image is displayed, you can hold the 0 (AEL/AFL) button and rotate the
front or rear dial to remove protection from all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-unprotected images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
The same operations can be performed during playback zoom or when a picture is selected in the
index display.

188 Protecting Pictures (0)

Deleting Pictures (Erase)

1. Display an image you want to delete and press the D button.

2. Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button. Erase

Yes
No

Back Set

The image will be deleted.

BYou can erase images without the confirmation step by changing the button settings.
g C Custom Menu q > [Quick Erase] (P. 292)
BYou can choose whether deleting pictures recorded in RAW+JPEG image quality modes deletes
both copies, only the JPEG copy, or only the RAW copy. g C Custom Menu q > [RAW+JPEG
Erase] (P. 292)

189 Deleting Pictures (Erase)

Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)
You can select images you want to transfer to a smartphone in advance.

1. Display an image you want to transfer and press the OK button.

The playback menu will be displayed.

2. Select [Share Order] and press the OK button. Then, press F or G.

The image is marked for sharing. A 9 icon and the file type will be displayed.
Up to 200 pictures can be marked for sharing at a time.
To cancel a share order, press F or G.

C Movies with a file size over 4 GB cannot be marked for sharing.

BYou can select images you want to transfer in advance and set a share order all at once.
g “Selecting Multiple Pictures (Share Order Selected, 0, Erase Selected)” (P. 192), “Transferring
images to a smartphone” (P. 364)
BYou can also mark images for sharing by assigning [9] to a button in [qR Function].
g C Custom Menu B > [qR Function] (P. 275)
- Press the [9] button when an unmarked image is displayed during single frame display/index
display/playback zoom.
- Keep the [9] button pressed and rotate the front or rear dial to mark for sharing all images
displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previously-marked images displayed while the dial is
rotated will be unaffected.
- When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the [9] button and rotate the front or rear
dial to remove share marking from all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any unmarked
images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.

Selecting RAW+JPEG Pictures for Sharing

In the case of pictures recorded with [RAW+JPEG] for image quality, you can choose to share only the
JPEG copies, only the RAW copies, or both the JPEG and RAW copies.

1. Press the MENU button to view the menus.

2. Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e Setup Menu and press I.

190 Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)

 3. Highlight [RAW+JPEG 9] using FG and press I.

4. Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

JPEG Only the JPEG copies will be marked for sharing.

RAW Only the RAW copies will be marked for sharing.

RAW+JPEG Both RAW and JPEG copies will be marked for sharing.

C Changing the option selected for [RAW+JPEG 9] does not affect pictures already marked for
sharing.
C Regardless of the option selected, removing share marking removes the marking from both copies.

191 Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)

Selecting Multiple Pictures (Share Order
Selected, 0, Erase Selected)
You can select multiple images for [Share Order Selected], [0], or [Erase Selected].

1. Select pictures by pressing the 4 (R) button during playback.

The image will be selected and P will be displayed.
To cancel selection, press the button again.
You can select an image during single-frame playback and index playback.

2. Press the OK button to display the menus and choose [Share Selected

Order Selected], [0], or [Erase Selected].

Share Order Selected
0
Erase Selected

Back Set

When an unmarked image is displayed, you can hold the 4 (R) button and rotate the front
or rear dial to select all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previously-marked
images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the 4 (R) button and rotate the front or
rear dial to deselect all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previously-unmarked
images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.

Selecting Multiple Pictures (Share Order

192 Selected, 0, Erase Selected)
Print order (DPOF)
You can save digital “print orders” to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed and the
number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a print shop that supports
DPOF. A memory card is required when creating a print order.

Creating a print order

1. Press the OK button during playback and select [Print Order].

2. Select [N] or [O] and press the OK button.

Individual pictures
Press HI to select a frame you want to add to the print order Print Order

and then press FG to choose the number of prints.

<
ALL

Back Set

Repeat this step as desired to add more more pictures to the print order. Press the OK
button when all the desired pictures have been selected.

All pictures
Select [O] and press the OK button.

193 Print order (DPOF)

 3. Select the date and time format and press the OK button. X

No
Date
Time

Back Set

No The pictures are printed without the date and time.

Date The pictures are printed with the shooting date.

Time The pictures are printed with the shooting time.

C When printing images, the setting cannot be changed between the images.

4. Select [Set] and press the OK button.

The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.

C The camera cannot be used to modify print orders created with other devices. Creating a new print
order deletes any existing print orders created with other devices.
C Print orders cannot include RAW images or movies.

Removing all or selected pictures from the print

order
You can reset all print reservation data or just the data for selected pictures.

1. Press the OK button during playback and select [Print Order] (Print Order).

2. Select [N] and press the OK button.

To remove all pictures from the print order, select [Reset] and press the OK button. To exit
without removing all pictures, select [Keep] and press the OK button.
You can also remove all pictures from the print order by selecting [O] and choosing
[Reset].

194 Print order (DPOF)

3. Press HI to select images you wish to remove from the print order.
Use G to set the number of prints to 0. Press the OK button once you have removed all the
desired pictures from the print order.

4. Select the date and time format and press the OK button.
This setting is applied to all frames with print reservation data.
The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.

5. Select [Set] and press the OK button.

195 Print order (DPOF)

Adding Audio to Pictures (c)
You can record audio using the built-in stereo microphone or an optional external microphone and
add it to pictures. The recorded audio provides a simple replacement for written notes about the
pictures. Audio recordings can be up to 30 s long.

1. Display the image to which you want to add audio and press the OK button.
Audio recording is not available with protected images.
Audio can also be added to pictures using the [Edit] option in the playback menu. Use [Edit]
> [Sel. Image] to select the picture, then press the OK button and select [c].

2. Select [c] and press the OK button. JPEG

JPEG Edit
Share Order
0
R
Rotate
<

Back Set

To exit without adding audio, select [No].

3. Select [c Start] and press the OK button to begin recording. R

No
R Start
Erase

Back Set

4. Press the OK button to end recording.

Pictures with audio are indicated by H icons and indicators showing the recording rate.
To delete recorded audio, select [Erase] in Step 3.

BAudio is recorded at the rate selected for movies. The rate can be selected using [Movie c] in the
n Video Menu (P. 246).

196 Adding Audio to Pictures (c)

Audio Playback
Playback begins automatically when a picture with audio is displayed. To adjust the volume:

1. Display the picture whose audio you want to play back.

2. Press F or G on the arrow pad.

F button: Raise volume.
G button: Lower volume.

197 Adding Audio to Pictures (c)

Playback Using Touch Controls
Use touch controls to zoom pictures in and out, scroll pictures, or choose the picture displayed.

C Do not tap the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
C Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.

Full-Frame Playback
Displaying the previous or next image
Slide your finger to the left to view the next image, and right to
view the previous image.

Magnify
Lightly tap the screen to display the slider and P.
Lightly tap the display twice to zoom in to the ratio selected for [q8 Default Setting] (P. 335).
Slide the bar up or down to zoom in or out.

Slide your finger to scroll the display when the picture is zoomed in.
Tap P to display index playback. Tap Q for calendar playback.

198 Playback Using Touch Controls

Index/Calendar Playback
Displaying the previous or next page
Slide your finger up to view the next page, and down to view the
previous page.

21

Tap Q or R to switch the number of images displayed. g C Custom Menu i > [G/Info
Settings] > [G Settings] (P. 334)
Tap R several times to return to single-frame playback.

Viewing images
Tap an image to view it full frame.

Other Functions
Lightly tap the screen during single-frame playback or tap U during index playback to display
the touch menu. You can then perform the desired operation by tapping the icons in the touch menu.

4 Select an image. You can select multiple images and delete them collectively.

Images you want to share with a smartphone can be set. g “Selecting Pictures for
9 Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 190)

0 Protects an image.

199 Playback Using Touch Controls

Menu Functions
Basic menu operations
The menus contain shooting and playback options that are not displayed by the LV super control
panel, etc., and let you customize the camera settings for easier use.

Tab Tab name Description

Photography-related items. Ready the camera for shooting or access

6 Shooting Menu 1
basic photo settings.

7 Shooting Menu 2 Photography-related items. Adjust advanced photo settings.

n Video Menu Items related to movie recording. Adjust basic and custom settings.

q Playback Menu Playback- and retouch-related items.

C Custom Menu Items for customizing the camera.

e Setup Menu Items for setting the clock, choosing a language, and the like.

E My Menu A customizable menu containing only items you select.

“My Menu” contains no items at shipment. Use “My Menu” to store and organize frequently-used
items from other menus. Select items for addition to “My Menu” from the camera menus (P. 266).

200 Basic menu operations

1. Press the MENU button to view the menus.

Shooting Menu 1 1 Guide

Reset / Custom Modes
Press the OK button to confirm the setting
11
Preliminary and basic 2
2 Picture Mode
shooting options. 1
KK YF 3 Press the MENU button to go back one
5 Image Aspect 4:3
Digital Tele-converter Off
screen
j/Y o 4 Operation guide
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off
5 Tab
4 Back Set 2
3
A guide is displayed about 2 seconds after you select an option. Press the INFO button to
view or hide guides.

2. Highlight a tab using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

Menu group tabs appear when C Custom Menu is A1. AF/MF
1 A1 KAF Mode S-AF
selected. Use FG to select the menu group and press the 2 A2 KAF+MF Off
A3
OK button. A4
KAEL/AFL S3/C4/M3/F3
AF Scanner mode2
B
C1 KC-AF Sensitivity ±0
C2 KC-AF Center Start
D1 KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set

1
1 Menu groups

3. Select an item using FG and press the OK button to display options for the selected item.

Shooting Menu 2 Shooting Menu 2

1 High Res Shot 1 High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting Off Live ND Shooting Off
22

Bracketing Off
OK 22

Bracketing Off Off

HDR Off HDR On Off
Multiple Exposure Off Multiple Exposure Off
Keystone Comp. Off Keystone Comp. Off
Anti-Shock r/Silent s Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Back Set Back Set

1 2
1 Function
2 The current setting is displayed

4. Use FG to highlight an option and press the OK button to select.

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

201 Basic menu operations

C Depending on camera status and settings, some items may be unavailable. Items that are not
available are grayed out and cannot be selected.
BFor the default settings of each option, refer to “Default Settings” (P. 390).
BYou can also navigate the menus using the front and rear dials in place of the arrow pad.

202 Basic menu operations

Using Shooting Menu 1/Shooting
Menu 2
Shooting Menus 1 and 2
Shooting Menu 1
11 Reset / Custom Modes
2 Picture Mode
KK YF
Image Aspect 4:3
Digital Tele-converter Off
j/Y o
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off
Back Set

6 Shooting Menu 1 7 Shooting Menu 2

Reset / Custom Modes (P. 77, P. 204) High Res Shot (P. 212)
Picture Mode (P. 154, P. 206) Live ND Shooting (P. 213)
KX (P. 139, P. 207) Bracketing (P. 216)
Image Aspect (P. 138) HDR (P. 224)
Digital Tele-converter (P. 208) Multiple Exposure (P. 227)
g/Y (drive; P. 101, P. 104) Keystone Comp. (P. 230)
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse (P. 209) Anti-Shock H/Silent I (P. 232)

203 Shooting Menus 1 and 2

Restoring Default Settings (Reset)
Camera settings can be easily restored to default settings. You can opt to reset almost all settings or
only those directly related to photography.

1. Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in 6 Shooting Menu 1 and press the OK button.

2. Highlight [Reset] and press the I button.

Reset
Reset / Custom Modes
Basic
Assign to Custom Mode
Custom Mode Save Settings
Recall from Custom Mode

Back Set

3. Highlight [Full] or [Basic], and press the OK button.

See “Default Settings” (P. 390) for information on the settings that are reset.

4. Press the OK button in the [Reset / Custom Modes] menu.

5. Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

BSettings can be saved using OM Workspace or OM Image Share. For more information, visit our
website.

204 Restoring Default Settings (Reset)

Saving Settings (Assign to Custom Mode)
Frequently-used settings and shooting modes can be saved to custom modes (C through C4; P. 77)
and recalled for use as required simply by rotating the mode dial (P. 79). Saved settings can also be
recalled directly from the menus (P. 79).

At default settings, custom modes are equivalent to mode P.

205 Saving Settings (Assign to Custom Mode)

Processing options (Picture Mode)
You can make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness and other parameters via [Picture
Mode] (P. 154) settings. Changes to parameters are stored for each picture mode separately.

1. Select [Picture Mode] in 6 Shooting Menu 1 and press the Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes
OK button.
11

2 Picture Mode
KK YF
Image Aspect 4:3
Digital Tele-converter Off
j/Y o
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off
Back Set

The camera will display the picture mode available in the current shooting mode.

2. Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

Press I to set the detailed options for the selected picture mode. Detailed options are not
available for some picture modes.

C Changes to contrast have no effect at settings other than [Standard].

BYou can reduce the number of picture mode options displayed in the menu. g C Custom Menu
i > [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 279)

206 Processing options (Picture Mode)

Photo File and Image Size Options (KX)
g “Photo File and Image Size Options (KX)” (P. 139)

C You can change the JPEG image size and compression ratio combination, and [M] and [S]
pixel counts. g “Combinations of JPEG image sizes and compression rates (X Set)” (P. 347),
C Custom Menu G > [Pixel Count] (P. 288)

207 Photo File and Image Size Options (KX)

Digital Zoom (Digital Tele-converter)
This option takes a crop at the center of the frame the same dimensions as the size option currently
selected for image quality and zooms it in to fill the display. The zoom ratio increases by about 2×. This
allows you to zoom in past the maximum focal length of the lens, making it a good choice when you
are unable to switch lenses or find it difficult to get any closer to your subject.

1. Select [Digital Tele-converter] in 6 Shooting Menu 1, and press the OK button.

2. Highlight [On], and press the OK button.

3. Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

When [On] is selected, the zoom ratio increases by 2× and
S-IS AUTO
S icon is displayed. The number of available AF targets
(P. 91) decreases and their size increases. ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

JPEG images are recorded at the selected zoom ratio. In the case of RAW images, a frame
shows the zoom crop. A frame showing the zoom crop is displayed on the image during
playback.

C The digital teleconverter cannot be used with multiple exposure, keystone compensation, fisheye
correction, or the SCN mode panorama option.
C [Movie A] cannot be used with the digital teleconverter.

208 Digital Zoom (Digital Tele-converter)

Shooting automatically with a fixed interval
(Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse)
You can set the camera to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames can also be
recorded as a single movie. This setting is available only in P/A/S/M modes.

1. Highlight [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse] in 6 Shooting Menu 1 and Shooting Menu 1

Reset / Custom Modes
press the OK button.
11

2 Picture Mode
KK YF
Image Aspect 4:3
Digital Tele-converter Off
j/Y o
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off
Back Set

2. Highlight [On] and press I.

3. Adjust the following settings and press the OK button.

Number of
Choose the number of frames shot.
Frames

Choose how long the camera waits before starting interval-timer

Start Waiting
photography and taking the first shot.
Time
[00:00:00]–[24:00:00]

Choose how long the camera waits between shots once shooting has
Interval Length begun.
[00:00:01]–[24:00:00]

Choose whether the camera prioritizes taking photographs at the

selected interval or taking the selected number of photographs.
[Time Priority]/[Frames Priority]
If [Time Priority] is selected, the previous exposure may not end before
Interval Mode
the next is due to begin.
The final number of photographs may be less than that chosen for
[Number of Frames] if, for example, [Interval Length] is very short or
shooting for each interval takes a long time to complete.

Shooting automatically with a fixed interval

209 (Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse)
 Adjust exposure to average out differences between shots. This smooths
Exposure
exposure changes during the time-lapse movie.
Smoothing
[Off]/[On]

Choose whether to record a time-lapse movie.

[Off]: The camera saves the individual shots but does not use them to
Time Lapse
create a time-lapse movie.
Movie
[On]: The camera records the individual shots and also uses them to
create a time-lapse movie.

Choose the frame size ([Movie Resolution]) and frame rate ([Frame
Rate]) for movies created using [Time Lapse Movie].
The options available for [Movie Resolution] are:
Movie Settings
[4K], [FullHD], [HD]
The options available for [Frame Rate] are:
[30fps], [15fps], [10fps], [5fps]

C The actual [Start Waiting Time], [Interval Length] and [Estimated Start Time] may differ
from the selected value depending on shooting settings. The values listed are for use as
guidelines only.

4. Press the OK button repeatedly to return to 6 Shooting Menu 1.

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
A t icon will appear in the shooting display (the icon 99

S-IS AUTO
shows the selected number of shots).
ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

5. Start shooting.
The specified number of frames will be shot automatically.

Time lapse shooting will be canceled if any of the following is operated:

- Mode dial, MENU button, q button, lens release button, or connecting the USB cable.
Turning the camera off ends interval-timer photography.

C The t icon will turn green and the number of shots remaining will be displayed.

Shooting automatically with a fixed interval

210 (Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse)
C Frames are shot even if the image is not in focus after AF. If you wish to fix the focus position, shoot
in MF.
C The [Image Review] option in the e Setup Menu (P. 262) functions with a display time of
0.5 seconds.
C If the time until shooting or the shooting interval is 1 minute 31 seconds or longer, the monitor will
go dark and the camera will enter sleep mode if no operations are performed for 1 minute. The
display will turn on automatically 10 seconds before shooting for the next interval begins. It can also
be reactivated by pressing the shutter button at any time.
C The camera automatically selects [S-AF] for AF mode (P. 118) in place of [C-AF] and [C-AF+TR],
and [S-AFJ] in place of [C-AFJ] and [C-AF+TRJ].
C When [R AF] is selected as the AF mode, focus to initiate shooting, then lock focus and start
recording.
C Touch operations are disabled during time lapse shooting.
C Time-lapse shooting cannot be combined with HDR photography, High Res Shot, bracketing,
multiple exposure, or the live ND filter.
C The flash will not work if the flash charging time is longer than the interval between shots.
C Choosing a value over 1000 for [Number of Frames] selects [Off] for [Time Lapse Movie].
C No time lapse movie will be created if any frame is not recorded correctly.
C If there is insufficient space on the card, the time lapse movie will not be recorded.
C If there is not enough charge left on the battery, the shooting may end partway through. Make sure
the battery is charged enough before shooting.
C Time-lapse movies created at a size of [4K] may not display on some computer systems. More
information is available on our website.

Shooting automatically with a fixed interval

211 (Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse)
High Resolution Shooting Settings (High Res
Shot)
Adjust High Res Shot settings (P. 109).

1. Select [High Res Shot] in 7 Shooting Menu 2 and press the OK button.

2. Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press the I button.

Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the shutter
button is pressed all the way down. Use this option to prevent blur
High Res Shot
caused by the camera moving when the shutter button is pressed. Select
[Off] to disable High Res Shot.

Choose how the long the camera waits for the flash to charge for High
A Charge Time Res Shots taken with the flash. You need not specify a value when using
an external flash.

[Tripod]: Take photos with the camera on a tripod or otherwise secured.

RAW pictures are recorded at a size of 80 megapixels (10368×7776).
The flash sync speed is 1/50 s.
The maximum value for [K ISO] is 1600.
Shooting
[Handheld]: Take hand-held shots. The camera takes slightly longer to
Method
record pictures. RAW pictures are recorded at a size of 50 megapixels
(8160×6120).
The flash is disabled.
The maximum value for [K ISO] is 6400.

Electronic shutter is used for high resolution shooting.

High Resolution Shooting Settings (High Res

212 Shot)
Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light (Live ND
Shooting)
The camera makes a series of exposures and combines to create a single photo that appears to have
been taken at a slow shutter speed.

C This option is available in modes S and M.

C Changing exposure compensation or shutter speed resets the [LV Simulation] display.

1. Highlight [Live ND Shooting] in 7 Shooting Menu 2 and Shooting Menu 2

High Res Shot
press the OK button.
1

22 Live ND Shooting Off

Bracketing Off
HDR Off
Multiple Exposure Off
Keystone Comp. Off
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Back Set

2. Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the I Shooting Menu 2
High Res Shot
button.
1

22 Live ND Shooting Off Off

Bracketing On Off
HDR Off
Multiple Exposure Off
Keystone Comp. Off
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Back Set

Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light (Live ND

213 Shooting)
3. Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the I Live ND Shooting
ND Number ND8(3EV)
button. LV Simulation On

Back Set

Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

Choose an ND filter type; the camera will convert it to an exposure value

and reduce exposure by that amount. Options are available in increments
ND Number
of 1 EV:
[ND2 (1EV)], [ND4 (2EV)], [ND8 (3EV)], [ND16 (4EV)]

Choose whether to preview the effect of the selected filter at the current
shutter speed.
LV Simulation
[On]: The effects of shutter speed are shown in the display.
[Off]: Use the standard shooting display.

4. To take pictures using the live ND filter, highlight [On] and Shooting Menu 2
High Res Shot
press the OK button, or select [Off] to proceed without
1

22 Live ND Shooting Off Off

enabling the live ND filter. Bracketing On Off
HDR Off
Multiple Exposure Off
Keystone Comp. Off
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Back Set

7 Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.

5. Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

If you selected [On] for [Live ND Shooting], live ND filter photography will now start.
A J icon appears in the display during live ND photography ND8
LV

S-IS AUTO
(the type of icon displayed varies with the settings selected).
ISO-A A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
S 8 F5.6 0.0 1023

To end live ND filter photography, select [Off] in the [Live ND Shooting] display shown in
Step 2.

Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light (Live ND

214 Shooting)
 6. Adjust shutter speed while previewing the results in the ND8
LV

S-IS AUTO
display.
Adjust shutter speed using the rear dial. ISO-A
200 A

The slowest shutter speed available varies with the ND filter YF

selected.
4K
30p

- [ND2 (1EV)]: 1/30 s S 8 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03
1023

- [ND4 (2EV)]: 1/15 s 1

- [ND8 (3EV)]: 1/8 s
1 Shutter speed
- [ND16 (4EV)]: 1/4 s
If [On] is selected for [LV Simulation], the effects of changes to shutter speed can be
previewed in the display.

7. Take pictures.
The camera requires a length of time equivalent to the selected shutter speed to produce [LV
Simulation] results similar to the final image.

C Art filter picture modes cannot be used.

C The upper limit for [K ISO] during live ND photography is ISO 800. This also applies when [AUTO]
is selected for [K ISO].
C Enabling the live ND filter sets the drive mode to A.
C The following cannot be used:
- HDR, High Res Shot, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing, interval-timer
photography, K flicker scan, flickerless photography, and fisheye correction.
C Unlike physical ND filters, the live ND filter does not reduce the amount of light reaching the image
sensor, and consequently very bright subjects may be overexposed.

Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light (Live ND

215 Shooting)
Varying settings over a series of photographs
(Bracketing)
Bracketing is used to vary shooting settings such as exposure and white balance over a series of shots.
Depending on the setting, you may be able to combine several different forms of bracketing. Use
bracketing if you are unsure what settings to use or lack the time needed to change settings during
shooting. You can also store bracketing settings and later recall them simply by turning bracketing on.

AE BKT (AE bracketing)

The camera varies the exposure of each shot. You can select the Bracketing
AE BKT Off3f 1.0EV
bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. In single- WB BKT 2f 0.3EV
A-- G--
frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken each time the FL BKT 2f 0.7EV --
ISO BKT 2f 1.0EV --
shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in sequential ART BKT 3f 0.3EV --
shooting mode the camera continues to take shots in the following Focus BKT 3f 0.7EV --
3f 1.0EV
order while the shutter button is pressed all the way down: no Back Set
modification, negative, positive.

Number of shots: Choose from 2, 3, 5, or 7.

A t icon is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence have been taken.
The camera modifies exposure by varying aperture and shutter speed (mode P), shutter speed
(mode A), aperture (mode S), or ISO sensitivity (mode M).
If an option other than [AUTO] is selected for [ISO] (P. 98, P. 117) in mode M, the camera will
instead modify exposure by varying shutter speed.
The camera brackets the value currently selected for exposure compensation.
The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value selected for [EV Step] in C Custom
Menu m (P. 284).

C Exposure bracketing cannot be combined with FL or focus bracketing.

Varying settings over a series of photographs

216 (Bracketing)
WB BKT (WB bracketing)
Three images with different white balances (adjusted in specified WB BKT

color directions) are automatically created from one shot, starting

A-B G-M
with the value currently selected for white balance.
3f 4Step 3f 4Step

Back Set

White balance can be varied by 2, 4, or 6 steps on each of the A – B (Amber – Blue) and G – M
(Green – Magenta) axes.
The camera brackets the value currently selected for white balance compensation.

C WB bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.

FL BKT (FL bracketing)

The camera varies flash level over three shots. The amount can be Bracketing
AE BKT 3f 1.0EV
chosen from 0.3, 0.7, and 1.0 EV. In single-frame shooting mode, WB BKT A-- G--
one photograph is taken each time the shutter button is pressed FL BKT Off --
ISO BKT 3f 0.3EV --
all the way down, while in sequential shooting mode the camera ART BKT 3f 0.7EV --
continues to take shots in the following order while the shutter Focus BKT 3f 1.0EV --

button is pressed all the way down: no modification, negative, Back Set
positive.

BA t icon is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence have been taken.

The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value selected for [EV Step] in C Custom
Menu m (P. 284).

C FL bracketing cannot be combined with AE or focus bracketing.

Varying settings over a series of photographs

217 (Bracketing)
ISO BKT (ISO bracketing)
The camera varies the sensitivity over three shots while keeping Bracketing
AE BKT 3f 1.0EV
the shutter speed and aperture fixed. You can select the bracketing WB BKT A-- G--
increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. Each time the shutter FL BKT --
ISO BKT Off --
button is pressed, the camera shoots three frames with the set ART BKT 3f 0.3EV --
sensitivity (or if auto sensitivity is selected, the optimal sensitivity Focus BKT 3f 0.7EV --
3f 1.0EV
setting) on the first shot, negative modification on the second shot, Back Set
and positive modification on the third shot.

C The size of the bracketing increment does not change with the value selected for [ISO Step] in
C Custom Menu m (P. 284).
C The upper limit selected using [K ISO-Auto Set] in C Custom Menu m (P. 284) is ignored.
C During silent photography, the flash sync speed is set to 1/20 s.
C ISO sensitivity bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.

ART BKT (ART bracketing)

Create multiple copies of each picture, each with a different art filter ART BKT
Pop Art 1
applied. The options selected are indicated by checks (P). Pop Art 2
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
Pale&Light Color 2
Light Tone
Grainy Film 1
Back H

C When there is a large number of art filters to be applied, it may take a long time to record the
pictures after shooting.
C With the exceptions of AE and FL bracketing, ART bracketing cannot be combined with other forms
of bracketing.

Varying settings over a series of photographs

218 (Bracketing)
Focus BKT (Focus bracketing)
Take a series of shots at different focus positions. Focus moves Bracketing
AE BKT 3f 1.0EV
successively farther from the initial focus position. WB BKT A-- G--
FL BKT --
ISO BKT --
ART BKT Off --
Focus BKT On --

Back Set

Choose the number of shots using [Set number of shots] and the Set number of shots

change in focus distance using [Set focus differential].

0 0 3

Back Set

Choose smaller values for [Set focus differential] to narrow the Focus BKT
Focus Stacking Wide On
change in focus distance, larger values to widen it. Set number of shots
10
8
Set focus differential 5
3
#Charge Time 0sec

1
Narrow

Back Set

If you are using a flash other than the dedicated flash unit, you #Charge Time

can specify the time it takes to charge using the [ACharge Time] 30sec

option.
Select time between shutter
release for flash recharge.
This setting is not necessary
when using the dedicated flash.

Back Set

Press the shutter button all the way down and release it immediately. Shooting will continue until the
selected number of shots is taken or until the shutter button is pressed all the way down again.

C Focus bracketing is not available with lenses that have mounts conforming to the Four-Thirds
standard.
C Focus bracketing ends if zoom is adjusted during shooting.
C Shooting ends when focus reaches infinity.
C Pictures taken using focus bracketing are shot in silent mode.
C Focus bracketing cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.
C The flash sync speed is 1/50 s. It drops to 1/20 s at [K ISO] settings over ISO 8000.

Varying settings over a series of photographs

219 (Bracketing)
Focus BKT (Focus Stacking)
The camera automatically shifts focus over a series of from 3 to 8 Focus BKT
Focus Stacking Off
shots and combines to create a single JPEG image that is in focus all Set number of shots 8
the way from the foreground to background. Set focus differential 5
#Charge Time 0sec

Back Set

C If focus stacking fails, the camera will record the selected number of photos without creating a
composite image.
C Shooting will end if zoom is adjusted after the shutter button has been pressed all the way down to
start focus stacking photography.
C The angle of view for composited images is narrower than the original images.
C A frame indicating the final crop will be shown in the display. BKT

S-IS AUTO
Compose the shot with your subject in the frame.
ISO-A
200 D

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

C The framing grid selected for [Grid Settings] > [Displayed Grid] in C Custom Menu k (P. 281)
will not be displayed.
C Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art filter selected for picture mode are recorded in [Natural]
mode.
C This feature is available with compatible lenses only. Visit our website for information on compatible
lenses.
C Focus stacking cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.

Varying settings over a series of photographs

220 (Bracketing)
Using Bracketing

1. Highlight [Bracketing] in 7 Shooting Menu 2 and press the Shooting Menu 2

High Res Shot
OK button.
1

22 Live ND Shooting Off

Bracketing Off
HDR Off
Multiple Exposure Off
Keystone Comp. Off
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Back Set

2. Highlight [On] and press I.

1
Shooting Menu 2
High Res Shot
22 Live ND Shooting Off
Bracketing Off Off
HDR On Off
Multiple Exposure Off
Keystone Comp. Off
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Back Set

A menu of bracketing types will be displayed.

3. Highlight a bracketing type using the FG buttons and press

AE BKT
Bracketing
3f 1.0EV
the I button. WB BKT A-- G--
FL BKT --
ISO BKT --
ART BKT --
Focus BKT --

Back Set

The camera will display bracketing options for the selected bracketing type.

Varying settings over a series of photographs

221 (Bracketing)
4. Using the FGHI buttons, select [On] or a bracketing program.
AE BKT Bracketing
AE BKT Off3f 1.0EV
Highlight a two-shot (2f) option and press the I button to WB BKT 2f 0.3EV
A-- G--

display a menu where you can choose whether exposure will FL BKT 2f 0.7EV --
ISO BKT 2f 1.0EV --
be adjusted upward or downward from the reference value. ART BKT 3f 0.3EV --

Use the FG buttons to highlight the desired option and Focus BKT 3f 0.7EV --
3f 1.0EV
press the OK button to select the highlighted option and Back Set
return to the previous display.
WB BKT WB BKT

You will be prompted to choose a color axis (A–B or G–M).

A-B G-M
Use the HI buttons to highlight an axis and the FG
3f 4Step 3f 4Step
buttons to choose the bracketing amount. Press the OK
button to return to the previous display when settings are
complete. Back Set

ART BKT ART BKT

Pop Art 1
Highlight [On] and press the I button to display a menu Pop Art 2

of picture modes and art filters. Use the FG buttons to Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
highlight the desired filters and press the OK button to Pale&Light Color 2

select (selected filters are indicated by check marks). Press Light Tone
Grainy Film 1
the MENU button to return to the previous display when Back H
settings are complete.
Focus BKT Focus BKT
Focus Stacking Off
Highlight [On] and press the I button to view focus Set number of shots 8

bracketing settings. Use the FG buttons to highlight a Set focus differential 5

#Charge Time 0sec
setting and press the I button to display options. Use
the FG buttons to highlight an option and press the OK
button to return to the setting menu. Press the OK button Back Set

again to return to the bracketing menu when settings are

complete. The [Focus BKT] menu is also used for [Focus
Stacking] settings.

5. With [On] selected, press the OK button to save changes and exit.

6. Confirm that [On] is selected for [Bracketing] and press the Shooting Menu 2
High Res Shot
OK button.
1

22 Live ND Shooting Off

To save changes without enabling bracketing, press the Bracketing Off Off
HDR On Off
MENU button or highlight [Off] and press the OK button. Multiple Exposure Off
Keystone Comp. Off
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Back Set

Varying settings over a series of photographs

222 (Bracketing)
 7. Take pictures.
A t icon is displayed when bracketing is active.

C Bracketing cannot be combined with HDR, multiple-exposure or interval-timer photography,

keystone compensation, High Res Shot, fisheye compensation, or the live ND filter.
C Bracketing is not available if there is not enough space on the camera’s memory card for the
selected number of frames.
C AE, FL, and focus bracketing are not available in mode B.

Varying settings over a series of photographs

223 (Bracketing)
Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images
(HDR)
The camera varies exposure over a series of shots, selects from each tone range with the highest
level of detail, and combines them to create a single picture with a wide dynamic range. If the photo
features a high-contrast subject, details that would otherwise be lost in shadows or highlights will be
preserved.

C Use a tripod or take similar measures to fix the camera in place.

This option is available in P, A, S, and M modes.

1. Press the MENU button to view the menus.

2. Highlight [HDR] in 7 Shooting Menu 2 and press the I Shooting Menu 2

High Res Shot
button.
1

22 Live ND Shooting Off

Bracketing Off
HDR Off
Multiple Exposure Off
Keystone Comp. Off
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Back Set

224 Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images (HDR)

3. Highlight an option using the FG buttons. HDR

HDR1

Takes 4 pictures at once

at different exposures and
composites automatically into
a high contrast image.

Back Set

Off HDR disabled.

HDR1 Each time you take a photo, the camera will take a series of shots
while varying exposure and combine them into a single picture. Choose
[HDR1] for natural-looking results, [HDR2] for a more painterly effect.
[K ISO] is fixed at ISO 200.
Shutter speeds can be as slow as 4 s. Shooting will continue for up to
HDR2 15 s.
Picture mode is fixed at [Natural] and color space at [sRGB].
The combined picture is saved in JPEG format. When the image quality
mode is set to [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.

3f 2.0EV Each time you take a photo, the camera will vary exposure over a series
of shots. The shots are not combined to create a single picture. The shots
5f 2.0EV can however be combined using HDR software on a computer or other
device.
7f 2.0EV

3f 2.0EV 1 Number of shots

3f 3.0EV
2 Exposure range
1 2
5f 3.0EV

4. Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

7 Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.

5. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

The camera will exit to the shooting display. A 4 icon will HDR

S-IS AUTO
be displayed.
The drive mode will be fixed at i (sequential high). ISO
200 T

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

225 Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images (HDR)

 6. Take pictures.
Each time you press the shutter button, the camera will take the selected number of shots.
In [HDR1] and [HDR2] modes, the camera will automatically combine the shots into a single
picture.
Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, and S.
In mode M, the camera takes the values selected for aperture and shutter speed as a base
for HDR photography.

C The image displayed in the monitor or viewfinder during shooting differs from the final HDR picture.
C Noise may appear in the final picture when a slower shutter speed is selected in [HDR1] or [HDR2]
mode.
C The following cannot be used:
- flash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure, interval-timer photography, keystone
compensation, the live ND filter, fisheye correction, and High Res Shot.

226 Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images (HDR)

Recording multiple exposures in a single
image (Multiple Exposure)
Take two shots and combine them into a single picture. Alternatively, you can take a shot and combine
it with an existing picture stored on the memory card.

The combined image is recorded at current image quality settings. Only RAW pictures can be selected
for multiple exposures that include an existing image.

If you record a multiple exposure with RAW selected for [KX], you can then select it for
subsequent multiple exposures using [Overlay], allowing you to create multiple exposures combining
three or more photographs.

This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.

1. Select [Multiple Exposure] in 7 Shooting Menu 2 and press the OK button.

2. Highlight an item using FG and press the I button. Multiple Exposure

Number of Frames Off
Auto Gain Off
Overlay Off

Back Set

3. Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

Number of [Off]: Do not create additional multiple exposures.

Frames [2f]: Create a multiple exposure from 2 pictures.

[On]: Halve the brightness of each picture in the multiple exposure.

Auto Gain [Off]: Do not adjust the brightness of the pictures in the multiple
exposure.

Recording multiple exposures in a single image

227 (Multiple Exposure)
 [On]: Shoot a multiple exposure that includes an existing RAW image
stored on the memory card.
[Off]: Create a multiple exposure from the next 2 pictures taken.
[Overlay] is only available when [2f] is selected for [Number of
Frames].
If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you will be prompted to choose a
picture for the multiple exposure. Highlight a picture using FGHI
and press the OK button.
Overlay
Overlay

RAW RAW RAW

RAW

RAW RAW RAW

Back Set

Only RAW images can be selected.

4. Press the OK button.

5. Press the OK button in the multiple-exposure menu to save the selected settings.
The shooting menu will be displayed.

6. Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

A W icon will be displayed.

ISO-A
200

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

If [Overlay] is selected, the chosen photograph will be visible superimposed on the view
through the lens.

Recording multiple exposures in a single image

228 (Multiple Exposure)
 7. Take pictures.
The first shot (or if [Overlay] is selected, the previously-chosen photograph) will be visible
superimposed on the view through the lens as you compose the next shot.
The W icon turns green.
Normally, a multiple exposure will be created after the second shot is taken.
Pressing the D button allows you to retake the first shot.
If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you can take additional pictures that will be overlaid on the
previously-chosen photograph.
Press the MENU button or press the q button to end multiple-exposure photography.
If you end multiple-exposure photography by pressing the MENU button, [Off] will be
selected for [Number of Frames] in the multiple-exposure menu.
The W icon clears from the display when multiple-exposure photography ends.

C The camera will not enter sleep mode during multiple-exposure photography.
C Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be used for multiple exposures.
C RAW pictures taken using High Res Shot cannot be used for multiple exposures.
C The RAW pictures listed in the image-selection display when [On] is selected for [Overlay] are
those processed using the settings in effect at the time the photograph was taken.
C Exit multiple-exposure mode before adjusting shooting settings. Some settings cannot be adjusted
while multiple-exposure mode is in effect.
C Multiple-exposure photography will end if, after you take the first shot:
- you turn the camera off, press the q or MENU button, choose a different shooting mode,
connect a cable of any type, or the battery runs low.
C The image-selection display for [Overlay] shows the JPEG copies of photographs taken with RAW +
JPEG selected for image quality.
C Multiple-exposure photography is not available via live composite photography ([LIVE COMP]) in
mode B.
C The following are not available in multiple-exposure mode:
- HDR, bracketing, interval-timer photography, keystone compensation, the live ND filter, fisheye
correction, and High Res Shot.
BPictures taken with RAW selected for [KX] (P. 139) can also be overlaid during playback.
g “Combining Pictures (Image Overlay)” (P. 256)

Recording multiple exposures in a single image

229 (Multiple Exposure)
Keystone correction and perspective control
(Keystone Comp.)
Keystone distortion due to the influence of lens focal length and proximity to the subject can be
corrected, or enhanced to exaggerate the effects of perspective. Keystone compensation can be
previewed in the monitor during shooting. The corrected image is created from a smaller crop, slightly
increasing the effective zoom ratio.

This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.

1. Select [Keystone Comp.] in 7 Shooting Menu 2, and press the OK button.

2. Highlight [On], and press the OK button.

3. Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

The camera will switch to the keystone compensation
display. A slider and K icon will be displayed.

P 250 F5.6

4. Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject in the display.
Rotate the front dial to make horizontal adjustments and the rear dial to make vertical
adjustments.
Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject in the display.
Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the crop. The direction in which the crop can be
moved is shown by an arrow (J).
To cancel changes, press and hold the OK button.

5. To adjust aperture, shutter speed, and other shooting settings, press the INFO button.
The camera will exit to the shooting display.
A K icon is displayed while keystone compensation is enabled. The icon is displayed in
green if adjustments have been made to keystone compensation settings.
To return to the keystone compensation display shown in Step 4, press the INFO button
repeatedly.

Keystone correction and perspective control

230 (Keystone Comp.)
 6. Take pictures.

C Pictures may seem “grainy” depending on the amount of compensation performed. The amount of
compensation also determines the amount the picture will be enlarged when cropped and whether
the crop can be moved.
C Depending on the amount of compensation, you may be unable to reposition the crop.
C Depending on the amount of compensation performed, the selected AF target may not be visible in
the display. If the AF target is outside the frame, its direction is indicated by a g, h, i, or j icon
in the display.
C Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
C The following cannot be used:
- live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure, the live
ND filter and digital teleconverter, fisheye compensation, movie recording, [C‑AF], [C‑AFJ],
[C‑AF+TR], and [C‑AF+TRJ] AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art filter picture modes, the custom
self-timer, and High Res Shot.
C Lens converters may not produce the desired results.
C Be sure to use [K Image Stabilizer] to provide the focal lengths for lenses that are not part of the
Four Thirds or Micro Four Thirds family (P. 134).
C Where applicable, keystone compensation will be performed using the focal length supplied for
[K Image Stabilizer] (P. 134) or [Lens Info Settings] (P. 348).

Keystone correction and perspective control

231 (Keystone Comp.)
Setting anti-shock/silent shooting (Anti-Shock
H/Silent I)
Enabling anti-shock (P. 105) or silent (P. 106) shooting settings gives you a choice of options for
reducing vibration or camera noise while taking photographs in sequential shooting or self-timer
modes (P. 101).

1. Select [Anti-Shock H/Silent I] in 7 Shooting Menu 2 and press the OK button.

2. Highlight an item using FG and press the I button.

3. Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way
down and the shutter being released in anti-shock mode. Use this mode
Anti-Shock H to suppress small vibrations caused by the operation of the shutter. Anti-
shock mode is available in both sequential shooting and self-timer modes
(P. 101). Select [Off] to disable anti-shock mode when it is not in use.

Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way
down and the shutter being released in silent mode. Use this option
Silent I in settings in which the sound of the shutter would be unwelcome.
Silent mode is available in both sequential shooting and self-timer modes
(P. 101). Select [Off] to disable silent mode when it is not in use.

Select [Auto] to reduce image “noise” in long exposures during silent

Noise
photography. The sound of the shutter may be audible when noise
Reduction I
reduction is active.

Choose whether to enable [o], [AF Illuminator], or [Flash Mode] in

Silent I Mode silent mode.
Settings Select [Allow] to use current settings for the selected item, [Not Allow]
to ignore current settings and disable the selected item.

4. Press the OK button.

Setting anti-shock/silent shooting (Anti-Shock

232 H/Silent I)
Using the Video Menu
The Video Menu
Movie recording functions are set in the Video Menu. Video Menu
1 nMode Settings
2 nSpecification Settings
nAF/IS Settings
nButton/Dial/Lever
nDisplay Settings
Movie R On
nHDMI Output
Back Set

n Mode Settings
Adjust settings for movie recording.

n Mode Choose the exposure mode for movie recording (P. 238).

Select [On] to reduce flicker caused by LED lighting. Rotate the front or rear
n Flicker Scan dial or use the FG buttons to choose the shutter speed at which flicker
reduction applies (P. 240).

n Specification Settings
Adjust image quality for movies.

Adjust compression, frame size, and bit-rate settings for movie recording
nX
(P. 141).

Choose how the camera adjusts sensitivity when [AUTO] is selected for
[n ISO] (P. 98).

[Upper Limit / Default]: Choose the maximum and standard ISO sensitivity
bISO-Auto values available to auto ISO sensitivity control when [AUTO] is selected for
Set [n ISO] in [n Mode] (movie exposure mode) [M].

[b ISO-Auto]: [AUTO] is available for [n ISO] when [M] is selected for

[n Mode] (movie exposure mode). Auto ISO sensitivity control settings can
be adjusted using [Upper Limit / Default].

233 The Video Menu

 n Noise Filter Select a noise reduction level for recording high-sensitivity movies.

n WB Choose a white balance mode for movie recording (P. 129).

Fine-tune white balance across the board (P. 133).

n All d [All Set]: Fine-tune white balance for all modes.

[All Reset]: Reset fine-tuning for all modes to default values.

nN Keep Choose [On] to preserve warm colors in movies shot under incandescent
Warm Color lighting when [AUTO] is selected for white balance (P. 132).

Choose [On] to enable selection of a picture mode specifically for use when
n Picture Mode
recording movies (P. 154).

n AF/IS Settings
Choose focus and image stabilization settings for use when recording movies.

n AF Mode Choose the AF mode for movie recording (P. 118).

Choose how quickly the camera responds to changes to the distance to subject
n C‑AF Speed
when [C‑AF] or [C‑AF+TR] is selected for focus mode.

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the
subject while focusing with [C‑AF] or [C‑AF+TR] selected for [n AF Mode].
This can help autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or prevent the camera
refocusing when an object passes between the subject and the camera.
Choose from three levels of tracking sensitivity.
nC‑AF Select +1 for increased sensitivity. Choose this option for subjects that are
Sensitivity moving toward or away from the camera or changing speed unpredictably
or for subjects that suddenly enter the frame.
Select −1 for reduced sensitivity. Choose this option to prevent the camera
refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by other objects or to
prevent the camera focusing on the background when you are unable to
keep the AF target positioned over a quickly-moving subject.

n Image
Adjust image stabilization settings for movie recording (P. 134).
Stabilizer

234 The Video Menu

n Button/Dial/Lever
Choose the roles played by camera buttons, dials, and levers in movie mode.

n Button
Choose the roles played by camera buttons in movie mode (P. 167).
Function

n Dial Function Choose the roles played by front and rear dials in movie mode (P. 244).

Choose the functions that can be selected using the Fn lever in movie mode.
The Fn lever switches to the function set with [n Dial Function] when set
to [mode1]. To choose the function selected using the Fn lever, highlight
n Fn Lever
[mode2], press the I button and choose from AF mode, AF target mode, and
Function
AF target selection. This setting has no effect when [mode3] is selected for
[K Fn Lever Function] (P. 321) or when [Power 1] or [Power 2] is selected
for [Fn Lever/Power Lever] in C Custom Menu B (P. 275).

Choose the role played by shutter button in movie mode. When set to [1],
pressing the shutter button initiates autofocus. Still image photography is not
n Shutter
available. When set to [R REC], movie recording can be started or stopped by
Function
pressing the shutter button all the way down. The R button cannot be used
for starting or stopping movie recording with this setting.

Choose the zoom speed for power zoom lenses. This can be used for slow
n Elec. Zoom
zooms on your subject and other effects. Choose from [Low], [Normal], and
Speed
[High].

n Display Settings
Adjust display settings for movie mode.

Choose whether live controls (P. 331) and the live super control panel (P. 111)
n Control
are displayed in movie mode. To hide an item, highlight it and press the OK
Settings
button to remove the check mark.

Choose the information displayed during recording in movie mode. To hide an

n Info Settings
item, highlight it and press the OK button to remove the check mark.

Red Frame You can opt to add a red border to the display during recording to let you
during RREC know that filming is in progress.

235 The Video Menu

 Choose how time codes are recorded in movie mode.
Set [Time Code Mode] to [Drop Frame] to record time codes corrected for
errors with respect to recording time, and to [Non-DF] (no drop frame) to
record uncorrected time codes.
Time Code Set [Count Up] to [Rec Run] to run time codes during recording only, and to
Settings [Free Run] to run time codes even while recording is stopped, including when
the camera is turned off.
In [Starting Time], set a starting time for the time code. Set [Current Time]
to set the time code for the current frame to 00. To set to 00:00:00:00, select
[Reset]. You can also set time codes using [Manual Input].

The display can be adjusted for ease of viewing when a movie-only picture
a View Assist mode option ([k Flat] or [l OM-Log400]) is selected. Select [On] to
adjust the display hues for ease of viewing.

Movie c
Select [Off] to disable audio recording during filming (P. 246).

n HDMI Output
Adjust output settings for movies recorded with the camera connected with an external device via
HDMI.

Choose the video output mode. When set to [Monitor Mode], image and
camera information are output. The camera information is not displayed on the
camera screen.
Output Mode When set to [Record Mode], only image is output. The camera information is
displayed on the camera screen.
C Not available when [4K] or [C4K] is selected for [n Specification
Setting] > [nX] (P. 141).

If set to [On], the REC trigger is sent from the camera to the connected
REC Bit
external device.

If set to [On], the time code is sent from the camera to the connected external
device.
Time Code C External devices triggered by time codes may stop recording if:
- the footage requires extensive processing, or
- you switch between the monitor and viewfinder.

236 The Video Menu

Connecting HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to the HDMI device using an HDMI cable.

1 Type A HDMI connector

2 HDMI cable
1 3 Type D HDMI connector
4
4 Camera HDMI connector

For more information, see the documentation provided with the HDMI device.

237 The Video Menu

Choosing an Exposure Mode (n Mode (Movie
Exposure Mode))
You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in P, A, S, and M modes.
This option takes effect when the mode dial is rotated to n.

1. Select [n Mode Settings] in n Video Menu and press the OK button.

2. Select [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) and press I.

3. Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

Optimal aperture is set automatically according to the brightness of the subject.

P Use the front dial or rear dial to adjust exposure compensation.

Depiction of background is changed by setting the aperture.

A Use the front dial to adjust exposure compensation and rear dial to adjust aperture.

Shutter speed affects how the subject appears. Use the front dial to adjust
S exposure compensation and rear dial to adjust shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/24 s and 1/32000 s.

Freely adjust both aperture and shutter speed.

Use the front dial to select aperture value and the rear dial to select shutter speed.
Choose from shutter speeds of 1/24 s–1/32000 s. Values of ISO 200–6400 are
available using the [n ISO] manual sensitivity control options.
M The display shows the difference between the exposure produced by the
selected aperture and shutter speed and the optimal exposure metered by the
camera. The display will flash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV.
The option chosen for [n Specification Settings] > [b ISO-Auto Set] in
the n Video Menu (P. 233) applies.

4. Press the OK button.

Choosing an Exposure Mode (n Mode (Movie

238 Exposure Mode))
BBlurred frames caused by such factors as the subject moving while the shutter is open can be
reduced by selecting the fastest available shutter speed.
C The low end of the shutter speed changes according to the frame rate of the movie record mode.

Choosing an Exposure Mode (n Mode (Movie

239 Exposure Mode))
Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting
(n Flicker Scan)
Banding may occur in movies filmed under LED lighting. Use [n Flicker Scan] to optimize shutter
speed while viewing banding in the display.

C This option is available in [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) [S] and [M].
C The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.

1. Select [S] or [M] for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode; P. 238).

2. Select [n Mode Settings] in n Video Menu and press the OK button.

3. Highlight [n Flicker Scan] and press I.

4. Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

5. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

A o icon is displayed when flicker scan is enabled.

n 250.0 P

6. Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.

n 128.6 P

1
1 Shutter speed

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (n Flicker

240 Scan)
 Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or the FG buttons. If desired, the
shutter speed can be selected by keeping FG pressed.
You can also rotate the front dial to adjust shutter speed in the exposure increments selected
for [EV Step] in C Custom Menu m.
Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is no longer visible in the display.
Press the INFO button; the display will change and the o icon will no longer be
displayed. You can adjust aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using the front or rear
dial or the arrow pad.
Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the flicker scan display.

7. Begin filming when settings are complete.

BFocus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the flicker scan
display. To view these items, first press the INFO button to exit the flicker scan display.

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (n Flicker

241 Scan)
Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX)
Create different combinations of movie settings, including frame size and bit rate. These combinations
can then be selected as described in (P. 141).

1. Select [n Specification Settings] in the n Video Menu and press the OK button.

2. Select [nX] and press I.

3. Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press the I button.

4. Choose an option using the FG buttons.

Choose from frame sizes of [C4K] (custom only), [4K], [FHD] (Full HD),
Image size
and [HD].

Choose from bit rates of [A-I] (All-Intra), [SF] (Super Fine), [F] (Fine), and
[N] (Normal).
Bit rate
Bit-rate selection is not available when [4K] or [C4K] is selected for
frame size.

Choose from frame rates of [60p], [50p], [30p], [25p], and [24p].
C [60p] and [50p] are not available when:
- [FHD] (Full HD) is selected for frame size and [A-I] (All Intra) is
selected for bit rate, or
- [C4K] or [4K] is selected for frame size.
C If the image size is set to [C4K], the frame rate is locked to 24p.
Frame rate C When shooting movies that will be viewed on a television, choose a
frame rate that matches the video standard used in the device, as
otherwise the movie may not play back smoothly. Video standards
vary by country or region: some use NTSC, others PAL. Video
standards vary by country or region: some use NTSC, others PAL.
- When shooting for display on NTSC devices, choose 60p (30p)
- When shooting for display on PAL devices, choose 50p (25p)

Sets slow or fast motion. Available settings differ depending on the set
Slow or Fast
frame rate.
Motion
Slow and fast motions cannot be used in some image quality modes.

242 Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX)

5. Press the OK button.

243 Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nX)

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials
(n Dial Function)
Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials in n (movie) mode. You can reverse the roles of
the dials or reassign them for ease of use or as required by shooting conditions. If [mode1] is selected
for [n Fn Lever Function], the roles played by the dials will vary with the position of the Fn lever.
Different assignments can be made for each [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).

C The roles assigned to the dials using this item take effect in n (movie) mode. In P, A, S, M, and B
(still photography) modes, the dials perform the roles selected in the C Custom Menu.

Exposure mode
Role Function
P A S M

Shutter Choose a shutter speed. — — P P

FNo. Adjust aperture. — P — P

F Adjust exposure compensation. P P P P

ISO Adjust ISO sensitivity. — — — P

WB Adjust white balance. P P P P

Choose a color temperature when CWB (custom) is selected

CWB Kelvin P P P P
for white balance.

cVOL Adjust the recording level. P P P P

Off None. P P P P

1. Highlight [n Button/Dial/Lever] in the n Video Menu and press I on the arrow pad.

2. Highlight [n Dial Function] using the FG buttons and press the I button.

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials

244 (n Dial Function)
3. Highlight the desired mode and press the I button.
Choose a dial using the HI buttons and use the FG buttons to choose a role.
Press the INFO button to move between lever positions.
Press the OK button when settings are complete.

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials

245 (n Dial Function)
Sound Recording Options (Movie c)
Adjust settings for recording sound during filming. You can also access settings for use when an
external microphone or recorder is connected.

1. Highlight [Movie c] in n Video Menu and press the OK button.

2. Select [On] and press I.

3. Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press the I button.

4. Choose a setting using the FG buttons.

Adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose separate values for the built-in

stereo microphone and external microphones.
Recording [Built-In c]: Adjust the sensitivity of the camera’s built-in stereo
Volume microphone.
[MIC c]: Adjust the sensitivity of external microphones connected to the
microphone jack.

Choose the maximum volume at which the camera will record sound. Use
c Volume
this option to automatically reduce the level of sounds above a certain
Limiter
volume.

Wind Noise
Reduce wind noise during audio recording.
Reduction

Choose an audio recording format.

Recording Rate [96kHz/24bit]: High-quality audio.
[48kHz/16bit]: Standard-quality audio.

Adjust settings for use with condenser microphones and other devices
that draw power from the camera.
c Plug-in [Off]: For devices that do not require power from the camera (general-
Power purpose dynamic microphones).
[On]: For devices that require power from the camera (condenser
microphones).

246 Sound Recording Options (Movie c)

 5. Press the OK button.

BV is displayed when [Off] is selected for movie audio recording.

BSounds produced by the camera and lens may be audible in movies. If this is a concern, you
can reduce volume of the sounds produced by the camera and lens by selecting [S‑AF], [MF], or
[PreMF] for [n AF Mode] (P. 118) or by using camera controls as little as possible.
C Sound is not recorded:
- with high-speed or slow- or fast-motion movies or when g (diorama) is selected for picture
mode.
C Audio can only be played on devices that support the option selected for [Recording Rate].

247 Sound Recording Options (Movie c)

Using the Playback Menu
The Playback Menu
Playback Menu
n (P. 249) Playback Menu
R On
Edit (P. 250)
1

2 Edit
Print Order (P. 193) Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset Protect (P. 260) Reset share Order
Reset share Order (P. 261) Device Connection

Device Connection (P. 359) Back Set

248 The Playback Menu

Automatically Rotating Portrait-Orientation
Pictures for Playback (n)
If set to [On], images in portrait orientation are automatically rotated to be displayed in the correct
orientation on the playback display.

Automatically Rotating Portrait-Orientation

249 Pictures for Playback (n)
Retouching Pictures (Edit)
Create retouched copies of pictures. In the case of RAW pictures, you can adjust the settings in effect
at the time the picture was taken, such as white balance and picture mode (art filters included). With
JPEG pictures, you can make simple edits such as cropping and resizing.

Retouch pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG format (P. 250). The following
options are available:
RAW [Current]: Save the picture at the settings currently selected with the camera.
Data [Custom1]/[Custom2]: Adjust settings while previewing the results in the display. The
Edit settings are saved as [Custom1] or [Custom2].
[ART BKT]: The camera creates multiple JPEG copies of each image, one for each art
filter selected. Select one or more filters and apply them to one or more images.

JPEG
Retouch JPEG pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG format (P. 253).
Edit

Retouching RAW Pictures (RAW Data Edit)

The [RAW Data Edit] menu contains the options listed below. These are also the settings applied
when you select [Current].
Image quality Mid-tones
Picture mode Aspect ratio
White balance High ISO noise reduction
Exposure compensation Color space
Highlights Keystone compensation
Shadows

C [Color Space] is fixed at [sRGB] when an art filter is selected for picture mode.
C RAW pictures cannot be retouched if:
- there is not enough space on the memory card or if the picture was created with a different
camera.

1. Highlight [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press I.

1 R
Playback Menu
On
2 Edit
Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Device Connection

Back Set

250 Retouching Pictures (Edit)

2. Highlight [Sel. Image] using FG and press the OK button. Edit

Sel. Image
Image Overlay

Back Set

The pictures on the memory card will be displayed.

3. Use HI to select the image to be edited and press the OK

button.

YF
4:3 +RAW 100-0015
2022.10.15 12:30:00 15
Back Set

The edit menu will be displayed.

4. Highlight [RAW Data Edit] using FG and press the OK RAW/JPEG

button.
RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit
Movie Edit
R

Back Set

Edit options will be displayed.

C If the current picture is not a RAW image, [RAW Data Edit] will not be available. Select a
different image.

251 Retouching Pictures (Edit)

 5. Highlight items using FG.
To apply current camera settings, highlight [Current] and press the OK button. Current
settings will be applied.
- Highlight [Yes] using FG and press the OK button to create a JPEG copy using the
selected settings.
For [Custom1] or [Custom2], highlight the desired option and press I, then edit settings
as follows:
- Retouch options will be displayed. Highlight items using LF
FG and use HI to choose settings. Repeat until all the WB
AUTO

desired settings have been chosen. Press the R button to

Sh
preview the results. Preview UpdateR Mid

5184×3888 Hi

L SF L F L N M N

- Press the OK button to confirm the settings. The processing will be applied to the image.
- Highlight [Yes] using FG and press the OK button to create a JPEG copy using the
selected settings.
Highlighting [ART BKT] and pressing I displays a list of art filters. Highlight art filters
and press the OK button to select or deselect; selected filters are marked with a P. Press
the MENU button to return to the previous display once all the desired filters have been
selected.
- Press the OK button to record the image after processing with the selected art filter.

6. To create additional copies from the same original, highlight [Reset] and press the OK button.
To exit without creating more copies, highlight [No] and press the OK button.
Selecting [Reset] displays editing options. Repeat the process from Step 5.

BYou can also edit selected pictures during playback.

q button Q Display a picture you want to retouch Q Press the OK button to view options Q
[RAW Data Edit]

252 Retouching Pictures (Edit)

Retouching JPEG Pictures (JPEG Edit)
The [JPEG Edit] menu contains the options listed below.

Shadow Adj Brighten back-lit subjects.

Red-eye Fix Reduce “red-eye” in pictures taken with a flash.

Crop pictures. Size the crop with the front or rear dial and position it with
M
FGHI.

Change the aspect ratio from the standard 4:3 to [3:2], [16:9], [1:1], or [3:4]. After
Aspect
choosing an aspect ratio, use FGHI to position the crop.

Black & White Create a black-and-white copy of the current picture.

Sepia Create a sepia copy of the current picture.

Saturation Adjust the vividness of colors. The results can be previewed in the display.

Create a resized copy 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 × 240 pixels in size.
L Pictures with an aspect ratio other than the standard 4:3 are resized to dimensions
as close as possible to the selected option.

Smooth complexions. The desired effect may not be achieved if no faces are
e-Portrait
detected.

C Red-eye correction may not work depending on the image.

C Editing of a JPEG image is not possible in the following cases:
- When an image is processed on a PC, when there is not enough space in the card memory, or
when an image is recorded on another camera.
C [L] cannot be used to make pictures larger.
C Some images cannot be resized.
C [M] (crop) and [Aspect] only apply to pictures with an aspect ratio of 4:3 (standard).

253 Retouching Pictures (Edit)

1. Highlight [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press I.
1 R
Playback Menu
On
2 Edit
Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Device Connection

Back Set

2. Highlight [Sel. Image] using FG and press the OK button. Edit

Sel. Image
Image Overlay

Back Set

The pictures on the memory card will be displayed.

3. Use HI to select the image to be edited and press the OK

button.

YF
4:3 +RAW 100-0015
2022.10.15 12:30:00 15
Back Set

The edit menu will be displayed.

4. Highlight [JPEG Edit] using FG and press the OK button. RAW/JPEG

RAW Data Edit

JPEG Edit
Movie Edit
R

Back Set

Edit options will be displayed.

If the current picture is not a JPEG image, [JPEG Edit] will not be available. Select a different
image.

254 Retouching Pictures (Edit)

 5. Highlight an option using FG and press the OK button. JPEG Edit

Shadow Adj
Red-eye Fix
P
Aspect
Black & White
Sepia

Back Set

The effect can be previewed in the display. If multiple options are listed for the selected item,
use FG to choose the desired option.
When [M] is selected, you can size the crop using the dials and position it using FGHI.
When [Aspect] is selected, you can select an option using FG, and then position the crop
using FGHI.

6. Highlight [Yes] using FG and press the OK button. Shadow Adj

Yes
No

Back Set

The new copy will be saved at the selected settings and the camera will return to the
playback display.

BYou can also access retouch options when a JPEG picture is displayed during playback:
q button Q Display a picture you want to retouch Q Press the OK button to view options Q
[JPEG Edit]

255 Retouching Pictures (Edit)

Combining Pictures (Image Overlay)
Overlay existing RAW photos to create a new picture. Up to 3 pictures can be included in the overlay.
The results can be modified by adjusting brightness (gain) separately for each picture.

1. Highlight [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the OK button.

2. Highlight [Image Overlay] using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

3. Select the number of images to be overlaid and press the OK button.

4. Highlight RAW images for the overlay using FGHI and press the OK button.
Selected pictures are marked with a P. To deselect, press Image Overlay

the OK button again.

RAW RAW RAW

RAW

RAW RAW RAW

Back Set

An overlay will be displayed once the number of images selected in Step 3 have been
selected.

5. Adjust the gain for each of the images in the overlay. Image Overlay

Highlight images using the HI buttons and adjust gain

using the FG buttons.
Gain can be adjusted in the range 0.1 – 2.0. Check the results
in the monitor. ×0.3 ×1.5 ×0.5
Back Set

6. Press the OK button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.

Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

BThe overlay is saved in the format currently selected for image quality. Overlays created with [RAW]
selected for image quality are saved in RAW format and in JPEG format using the image quality
option selected for [X2]. g C Custom Menu G [X Set] (P. 288)
BOverlays saved in RAW format can in turn be combined with other RAW images to create overlays
containing 4 or more pictures.

256 Combining Pictures (Image Overlay)

Creating Movie Stills (In-Movie Image
Capture)
Save a still copy of a selected frame.

C This option is available only with [4K] movies recorded with the camera.

1. Highlight [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the OK button.

2. Highlight [Sel. Image] using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

3. Select a movie using HI and press the OK button.

4. Select [Movie Edit] and press the OK button.

5. Highlight [In-Movie Image Capture] using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

6. Using the HI buttons, select the frame you want to save as a still and press the OK button.
The camera will save a still copy of the selected frame.
Use the F button to rewind and the G button to advance.

257 Creating Movie Stills (In-Movie Image Capture)

Trimming movies (Movie Trimming)
Cut selected footage from movies. Movies can be trimmed repeatedly to create files containing only
footage you want to preserve.

C This option is available only with movies recorded with the camera.

1. Highlight [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the OK button.

2. Highlight [Sel. Image] using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

3. Select a movie using HI and press the OK button.

4. Select [Movie Edit] and press the OK button.

5. Highlight [Movie Trimming] using the FG buttons and press the OK button.
You will be prompted to choose how you want to save the edited movie.
[New File]: Save the trimmed movie in a new file.
[Overwrite]: Overwrite the existing movie.
[No]: Exit without trimming the movie.
[Overwrite] cannot be applied to protected movies.

6. Highlight the desired option and press the OK button.

You will be presented with an edit display.

7. Trim the movie.

Use the F button to skip to the first frame and the G button to skip to the last frame.
Using the front or rear dial, select the first frame of the footage you want to delete and press
the OK button.
Using the front or rear dial, highlight the last frame of the footage you want to delete and
press the OK button.

258 Trimming movies (Movie Trimming)

8. Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.
The edited movie will be saved.
To select different footage, highlight [No] and press the OK button.
If you selected [Overwrite], you will be prompted to choose whether to trim additional
footage from the movie. To trim additional footage, highlight [Continue] and press the OK
button.

259 Trimming movies (Movie Trimming)

Removing Protection from All Pictures (Reset
Protect)
Remove protection from multiple pictures simultaneously.

1. Highlight [Reset Protect] in the q Playback Menu and press the OK button.

2. Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

Removing Protection from All Pictures (Reset

260 Protect)
Cancelling a share order (Reset share Order)
Cancel share orders that are set on images.

1. Highlight [Reset share Order] in the q Playback Menu and press the OK button.

2. Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

261 Cancelling a share order (Reset share Order)

Using the Setup Menu
The Setup Menu
Adjust basic camera settings. Examples include language selection Setup Menu
Card Setup
and monitor brightness. The setup menu also contains options
1

2 X Settings
used during the initial setup process. W English
s j±0 k±0
Image Review Off
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware Version
Back Set

Option Description

Card Setup Format the card and delete all images (P. 264).

m Settings (Date/
Set the camera clock (P. 34).
time setting)

W (Changing the
Choose a language for camera menus and guides (P. 36).
display language)

You can adjust the brightness and color s

j k
temperature of the monitor. Color temperature -2 +1

adjustment is only applied to the monitor display

b (Monitor during playback. Use HI to highlight o (color Vivid Natural
brightness temperature) or p (brightness) and FG to Back Set

adjustment) adjust the value.

Press the INFO button to switch the saturation
of the monitor between [Natural] and [Vivid]
settings.

Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed after shooting and if so,
for how long. This is useful for a brief check of the picture you have taken.
You can shoot the next shot by pressing the shutter button halfway even
while the captured image is displayed on the monitor.
Image Review [0.3sec] – [20sec]: Sets the length of time (seconds) to display the captured
image on the monitor.
[Off]: The captured image is not displayed on the monitor.
[Auto q]: Displays the captured image, and then switches to playback
mode. This is useful for erasing a picture after checking it.

262 The Setup Menu

 Option Description

Adjust settings for connection to Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®- compatible

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
smartphones and optional remote controls using the camera’s wireless
Settings
function (P. 362, P. 369, P. 357).

View the versions of the firmware for the camera and any lenses or
Firmware Version other peripherals currently connected. You may need this information when
contacting customer support or performing firmware updates.

263 The Setup Menu

Formatting the card (Card Setup)
Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use or after being used with other cameras or
computers.

C All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card is formatted.
When formatting a used card, confirm there are no images that you still want to keep on the card.
g “Usable cards” (P. 28)

1. Highlight [Card Setup] in the e Setup Menu and press the OK button.
A menu will be displayed if the card contains data. Highlight Card Setup

[Format] and press the OK button.

All Erase
Format

Back Set

2. Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

The card will be formatted.

264 Formatting the card (Card Setup)

Deleting all images (Card Setup)
All images on a card can be deleted at a time. Protected images are not deleted.

1. Highlight [Card Setup] in the e Setup Menu and press the OK Card Setup

button.
All Erase
Format

Back Set

2. Highlight [All Erase] and press the OK button.

3. Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

All images are deleted.

265 Deleting all images (Card Setup)

Using “My Menu”
My Menu
You can use “My Menu” to create a personalized menu tab containing only items you select. “My
Menu” can contain up to 5 pages of 7 items each. You can delete items or change the page or item
order.
At purchase, “My Menu” contains no items.

Adding Items to My Menu

1. Press the MENU button to view the menus.

2. Highlight an item for inclusion in “My Menu”.

Items that can be added to “My Menu” are indicated by a Shooting Menu 1

E icon at the top right corner of the display. 11

2
Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK YF
Image Aspect 4:3
Digital Tele-converter Off
j/Y o
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off
Back Set

3. Press the R (movie) button.

You will be prompted to choose a page. Use FG on the Select My Menu to add.
Reset / Custom Modes
arrow pad to choose the “My Menu” page to which the item
11

2 Picture Mode f1

will be added. KK f2 YF
Image Aspect f3 4:3
Digital Tele-converter f4 Off
j/Y f5 o
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off
Cancel Set

266 My Menu
4. Press the OK button to add the item to the selected page.
The camera will display a message stating that the item has
Reset / Custom Modes
been added to “My Menu”.
11

2 Picture Mode
KK YF
Added to My Menu.
Image Aspect 4:3
Digital Tele-converter Off
j/Y o
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off

Items that have been added to “My Menu” are indicated by Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes
a yellow E.
11

2 Picture Mode

The next available page will be displayed once the seventh KK YF

Image Aspect 4:3
item is added to the current page. Digital Tele-converter Off

Items marked with a E can be removed from “My Menu” j/Y o

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off
by pressing the R button. Select [Yes] and press the OK Back Set

button.
Items saved to “My Menu” are added to the E (“My My Menu 1
f1 KK YF
Menu”) tab.
1

2 f2
f3
f4
f5

Back Set

5. To access "My Menu", select the E (“My Menu”) tab.

267 My Menu
Managing “My Menu”
You can reorder or delete items in “My Menu”.

1. Press the MENU button to view the menus.

2. Display the “My Menu” page you want to edit and press the R
(movie) button.

The options below will be displayed. My Menu 1

f1 KK YF
[Rearrange Order]: Change the order of items or pages.
1

2 Rearrange
f2 Half Way Rls With IS Order On

Use the FGHI buttons to choose the new location.

f3 USB Mode Remove this itemSelect
f4
Remove this f tabsRGB
Color Space
[Remove this item]: Remove the highlighted item from “My f5

Menu”. Select [Yes] and press the OK button.

[Remove this E tab]: Remove from “My Menu” all items Back Set
on the current page. Select [Yes] and press the OK button.

268 My Menu
Using the Custom Menus
The Custom Menus
Camera settings can be customized using the C Custom Menus. Custom Menu
1 A1 KAF Mode S-AF
2 A2 KAF+MF Off
A3 KAEL/AFL S3/C4/M3/F3
A4
AF Scanner mode2
B
C1 KC-AF Sensitivity ±0
C2 KC-AF Center Start
D1 KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set

Custom Menus
a/b/c/d AF/MF (P. 270)
B Button/Dial (P. 275)
g/h Release/g/Image Stabilizer (P. 277)
i/j/k/l Disp/o/PC (P. 279)
m/n/o Exp/ISO/BULB/A (P. 284)
F A Custom (P. 287)
G X/WB/Color (P. 288)
p/q Record/Erase (P. 290)
I EVF (P. 293)
r/s K Utility (P. 295)

269 The Custom Menus

abcd AF/MF

a AF/MF
MENU Q C Q a
Option Description

K AF mode Choose the AF mode for still photography (P. 118).

Once the camera has focused using autofocus, focus can be adjusted manually
K AF+ MF
using the lens focus ring (P. 298).

Choose how the camera sets focus and exposure when the shutter button or
K AEL/AFL
AEL/AFL button is pressed (P. 299).

Choose the type of AF scan 1 performed in autofocus mode when the camera is
unable to focus or the scene lacks contrast.
1 Scans whole range from minimum range to infinity for focus point when
the camera cannot focus on the subject or the contrast is not clear.
C The selected option takes effect when [C‑AF], [C‑AF+TR], [C‑AFJ], or
[C‑AF+TRJ] is chosen for [K AF Mode] (P. 118).
AF Scanner
[mode1]: AF Scanner is not activated.

[mode2]: An AF scan is performed only once at the start of the focus

operation.

[mode3]: AF Scanner is activated.

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the
subject while focusing with [C‑AF], [C‑AFJ], [C‑AF+TR], or [C‑AF+TRJ]
K C‑AF
selected for [K AF Mode]. This can help autofocus track a quickly-moving
Sensitivity
subject or prevent the camera refocusing when an object passes between the
subject and the camera (P. 302).

270 abcd AF/MF

 Option Description

When used in combination with an AF-target mode other than single target,
[C‑AF], [C‑AFJ], [C‑AF+TR], and [C‑AF+TRJ] focus on the center of the
K C‑AF Center selected group only during the initial scan. During later scans, the camera will
Start focus using the surrounding targets. Combining this option with an AF-target
mode that covers a wide area makes it easier to focus on erratically-moving
subjects (P. 303).

When focusing using group- or -target AF in [C‑AF] and [C‑AFJ] modes,

the camera always assigns priority to the center target in the selected group
for a repeated series of focus operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus
K C‑AF Center
using the center focus target will it focus using the surrounding targets in the
Priority
selected focus group. This helps you track subjects that are moving quickly but
relatively predictably. C-AF center priority is recommended in most situations
(P. 304).

b AF/MF
MENU Q C Q b
Option Description

Choose the target modes displayed during AF-target mode selection. Hiding
KYMode
unused modes speeds target-mode selection. To hide an item, highlight it and
Settings
press the OK button to remove the check mark (P. 91).

271 abcd AF/MF

 Option Description

In autofocus mode, the position of the subject on which the camera has
focused is shown by a green focus target. This item controls the display of
the focus target.

[Off]: The focus target is not displayed.

[On1]: The focus target is displayed only briefly after the camera focuses.

[On2]: After the camera focuses, the focus target will be displayed while the
AF Area Pointer shutter button is pressed halfway.

BTo enable cluster AF targeting when q

(all targets) is selected and [S-AF], [S-AFJ],
[C-AF], or [C-AFJ] is chosen for [K AF
Mode] (P. 118) or [C-AF] is selected for [n AF
Mode], select [On2] for [AF Area Pointer]. The
camera will display AF targets for all areas that
are in focus.

Choose the home position AF mode, AF target selection mode, and AF target
Y Set Home mode. Press the OK button to select the desired options in the Y Set Home
display (P. 305).

Y Select Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials or arrow pad during AF
Screen Settings target selection (P. 307).

Choose whether AF-target selection “wraps around” the edges of the display.
You can also choose whether you have the option of selecting q (all
Y Loop targets) before AF-target selection “wraps around” to the opposite border of
Settings the display (P. 308).
Wrap is disabled in movie mode and when [RAF] or [RAFJ] is selected
for [K AF Mode].

t Target Choose the number of AF targets available and how far the AF target moves
Mode Settings during AF-target selection (P. 309).

The camera can be configured to change the AF-target position and AF-
K Orientation
target mode automatically when it detects that it has been rotated between
Linked Y
landscape (“wide”) or portrait (“tall”) orientations (P. 310).

272 abcd AF/MF

c AF/MF
MENU Q C Q c
Option Description

If [On] is selected, the AF target can be positioned by tapping the monitor

during viewfinder photography. Tap the monitor and slide your finger to
position the AF target.
AF Targeting Pad
BWhen set to [On], drag operation can be disabled or enabled by double-
tapping the monitor.
B[AF Targeting Pad] can also be used with zoom frame AF (P. 96).

Select [On] to limit the range in which the camera will focus using autofocus
AF Limiter
(P. 312).

Select [Off] to disable the AF illuminator. To use the AF illuminator during

AF Illuminator silent photography, you will need to change the option selected for [Silent I
Mode Settings] (P. 232).

I Face Priority Adjust settings for face- and eye-priority AF (P. 126).

Fine-tune phase-detection autofocus by up to ±20 (P. 313).

AF Focus Adj. Normally there is no need to fine-tune autofocus using this item. Fine-
tuning focus may prevent the camera focusing normally.

d AF/MF
MENU Q C Q d
Option Description

Choose a setting for starry sky AF (P. 121).

Starry Sky AF
[Accuracy]: Prioritize focus accuracy over speed. Use a tripod.
Setting

[Speed]: Prioritize focus speed over accuracy.

273 abcd AF/MF

 Option Description

Preset MF Choose the Preset MF focus position. Numerical value and unit (m, ft) can be
distance set. The distance is approximate and not exact.

Choose whether rotating the focus ring in manual focus mode automatically
MF Assist
activates focus zoom or focus peaking (P. 317).

Disable the manual focus clutch. This can prevent autofocus being disabled by
the clutch engaging accidentally (P. 429).

[Operative]: The camera responds to the position of the lens focus ring.
MF Clutch

[Inoperative]: The camera focuses according to the option selected for [AF
Mode], regardless of the position of the lens focus ring. Manual focus is not
available even when the focus ring is in the manual focus position.

Reverse the direction in which the focus ring is rotated for adjustments to
Focus Ring
focus.

You can change the focus position during exposure by using manual focus
Bulb/Time
(MF). Selecting [Off] to disable adjustments to focus using the focus ring
Focusing
(P. 318).

When set to [Off], the focus position of the lens is not reset even when the
power is turned off. When set to [On], the focus of power zoom lenses is also
Reset Lens reset.
Regardless of the option selected, the focus position will be reset when the
camera is turned off if [PreMF] is selected for [AF Mode] (P. 118).

274 abcd AF/MF

B Button/Dial

B Button/Dial
MENU Q C Q B
Option Description

K Button Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing functions
Function (P. 167).

K Dial Function Choose the roles played by front and rear dials (P. 319).

Choose the direction in which the dial is rotated to adjust shutter speed or
Dial Direction
aperture. Change the program shift direction in which the dial is rotated.

K Fn Lever
Choose the function performed by the Fn lever (P. 321).
Function

Use the Fn lever as a power switch.

[Fn]: Follows settings for the Fn lever function.

[Power 1]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in position 1, and off when
Fn Lever/Power in position 2.
Lever
[Power 2]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in position 2, and off when
in position 1.

When [Power 1] or [Power 2] is set, the ON/OFF lever (power lever), [K Fn

Lever Function] and [n Fn Lever Function] are disabled.

Choose the speed at which power zoom lenses zoom in or out when the zoom
K Elec. Zoom
ring is rotated. Adjust zoom speed if it is so quick that you find it hard to frame
Speed
your subject. Choose from [Low], [Normal], and [High].

275 B Button/Dial
 Option Description

Choose the role played by the R button during playback.

[9]: Create or modify a “share order” by marking pictures for upload to a

qR Function
smartphone.

[4]: Select multiple pictures.

276 B Button/Dial
gh Release/g/Image Stabilizer

g Release/g/Image Stabilizer
MENU Q C Q g
Option Description

S‑AF Release
If [On] is selected, the shutter can be released even when the camera is not in
Priority
focus. This option can be set separately for S‑AF and C‑AF modes (P. 118).

C‑AF Release
C Regardless of the option selected, [S‑AF Release Priority] is used when [R
AF] is selected for AF mode.
Priority

gL Settings Choose frame advance rates and shot limits for [g], [F], and [B]
modes. You can also adjust Pro Capture settings, including the frame advance
rate, number of frames buffered, and the shot limit. Figures for sequential
gH Settings
shooting speed are the approximate maximums (P. 322).

Reduce flicker in photos taken under fluorescent or other artificial lighting

(P. 325).

[Anti-Flicker LV]: Reduce flicker during live view under some kinds of lighting,
Flicker Reduction including fluorescent lamps. If [Auto] does not have the desired effect, select
[50 Hz] or [60 Hz] according to the frequency of the local power supply.

[Anti-Flicker Shooting]: The camera automatically detects the flicker

frequency and times the shutter release accordingly.

h Release/g/Image Stabilizer
MENU Q C Q h
Option Description

K Image
Adjust image stabilization settings for still photography (P. 134).
Stabilizer

277 gh Release/g/Image Stabilizer

 Option Description

Choose whether the camera prioritizes frame rate or image stabilization during
burst photography.
C [g Image Stabilizer] is fixed at [Fps Priority] in u (Pro Capture Low)
and t (Pro Capture High) modes.
g Image
[Fps Priority]: Shooting speed gets priority over image stabilization. The
Stabilizer
sensor will not be reset to the center during sequential shooting.

[IS Priority]: Image stabilization gets priority over shooting speed. The sensor
will be reset to the center per frame of sequential shooting. The shooting
speed will drop slightly.

Half Way Rls When set to [Off], the IS (Image Stabilization) function while the shutter button
With IS is pressed halfway will not be activated.

Select [On] to give priority to lens on-board image stabilization when shooting
with third-party lenses. [S-IS1] will be used when [S-IS AUTO] is selected for
Lens I.S. Priority [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 134).
C This option has no effect on lenses that are equipped with an image
stabilization switch.

278 gh Release/g/Image Stabilizer

ijkl Disp/o/PC

i Disp/o/PC
MENU Q C Q i
Option Description

K Control Choose the shooting modes in which the live and LV super control panels are
Settings displayed (P. 329)

Choose the information displayed when the INFO button is pressed (P. 332).

[q Info]: Choose the information displayed in full frame playback.

[q8 Info]: Choose the information displayed in magnified playback.

G/Info Settings [LV-Info]: Choose the information displayed when the camera is in shooting
mode.

[LV OFF-Info]: Choose a shooting display.

[G Settings]: Choose the information displayed in index and calendar

playback.

Picture Mode Choose the picture modes (P. 154) available for selection. To hide an item,
Settings highlight it and press the OK button to remove the check mark.

Choose the sequential shooting/self-timer modes (P. 101) available for

g/Y Settings selection. To hide an item, highlight it and press the OK button to remove
the check mark.

Multi Function Choose the multi function options (P. 176) available for selection. To hide an
Settings item, highlight it and press the OK button to remove the check mark.

279 ijkl Disp/o/PC

j Disp/o/PC
MENU Q C Q j
Option Description

Adjust brightness for ease of viewing when lighting is poor. Settings can
be adjusted separately for mode M, bulb photography, live composite
photography, and the like.

[Off]: Preview exposure in live view. Exposure can be previewed before

shooting.
C This option does not apply during bulb or time photography.

[On1]: Exposure preview disabled; brightness is adjusted for ease of viewing.

Live View Boost
The brightness of the preview differs from the final photograph.

[On2]: As for [On1] but brighter. Choose when framing shots of the night sky
or the like.
C The brightness of the preview differs from the final photograph. Subject
motion may also appear slightly jerky.
Press I on the arrow pad and choose from the following:
[Quality Priority]: Prioritize display quality.
[Frame Rate Priority]: Prioritize display speed.

[mode1]: The filter effect is always displayed.

Art LV Mode
[mode2]: Priority is given to smooth display while the shutter button is pressed
halfway. The quality of art filter effect previews may be affected.

[LV Close Up Mode]: When set to [mode1], pressing the button halfway in
the magnified live view returns to the magnified frame display. When set to
[mode2], pressing the button halfway in the magnified live view switches to
the Zoom AF display.

LV Close Up
[Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust display brightness
Settings
for ease of viewing during focus zoom. When set to [Off], the magnified area is
displayed with the brightness of live view before magnification. This is useful to
check the focus when shooting in backlit locations.
C This item is available when [Off] is selected for [Live View Boost] in
C Custom Menu j.

280 ijkl Disp/o/PC

 Option Description

q8 Default
Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up playback; P. 335).
Setting

[z Lock]: Select [On] to maintain the aperture at the selected value even
when releasing the button.

z Settings [Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust display brightness
for ease of viewing during depth-of-field preview (P. 169).
C This item is available when [Off] is selected for [Live View Boost] in
C Custom Menu j.

k Disp/o/PC
MENU Q C Q k
Option Description

Adjust settings for the framing grid.

[Display Color]: Adjust guide color and transparency. The camera can store up
to two combinations of settings.

[Displayed Grid]: Select the type of guides displayed. Choose from:

[R], [S], [T], [U], [V], and [W]
BWhen [W] is selected, the guides are adjusted for a 16:9 movie frame
Grid Settings
when movies are shot in still photography mode. Depending on the option
selected for [nX], the guides may be displayed with an aspect ratio of
17:9.

[Apply Settings to EVF]: Choose whether the option selected for [Displayed
Grid] is reflected in the viewfinder display.
BThe option selected for [EVF Grid Settings] in C Custom Menu I (P. 293)
has no effect.

281 ijkl Disp/o/PC

 Option Description

Highlight objects using color outlines. This makes objects that are in focus
easier to see during manual focus and the like.

[Peaking Color]: Choose the focus peaking color.

Peaking Settings [Highlight Intensity]: Choose the focus peaking level.

[Image Brightness Adj.]: Adjust background brightness to make focus

peaking easier to see.
BWhen [On] is selected for [Image Brightness Adj.], the live view display
may be brighter or darker than the final photograph.

Choose the upper and lower bounds for the shadow and highlight displays
(P. 332)
Histogram
Settings [Highlight]: Choose the lower bound for the highlight display.

[Shadow]: Choose the upper bound for the shadow display.

Select [On] to display a help for the selected mode when the mode dial is
Mode Guide
rotated to a new setting (P. 43).

If [On] is selected, the camera will display a mirror image of the view through
Selfie Assist
the lens when the monitor is in the selfie position (P. 336).

l Disp/o/PC
MENU Q C Q l
Option Description

[On]: A beep sounds after successful autofocus operations.

o
[Off]: A beep does not sound after successful autofocus operations.

282 ijkl Disp/o/PC

 Option Description

Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (P. 337).

[Output Size]: Selecting the digital video signal format for connecting to a TV
via an HDMI cable.

[HDMI Control]: Select [On] to allow the camera to be operated using

HDMI
remotes for TVs that support HDMI control. This option takes effect when
pictures are displayed on a TV. When [On] is selected, the camera can be used
for playback only.

[Output Frame Rate]: Select the output frame rate from [50p Priority] or
[60p Priority] for using the camera connected to a TV with an HDMI cable.

Choose how the camera functions when connected to external devices via USB
USB Mode
(P. 339).

283 ijkl Disp/o/PC

mno Exp/ISO/BULB/A

m Exp/ISO/BULB/A
MENU Q C Q m
Option Description

Choose the size of the increments used when adjusting shutter speed,
EV Step
aperture, exposure compensation, and other exposure-related settings.

ISO Step Choose the size of the increments used when adjusting ISO sensitivity.

Adjust [AUTO] ISO sensitivity settings for still photography.

[Upper Limit / Default]: Choose the maximum and default ISO sensitivity used
when [AUTO] is selected for ISO. Select [Upper Limit] to choose the maximum
sensitivity, [Default] to choose the default sensitivity. The maximum is 6400.
C The maximum ISO sensitivity automatically changes:
- to ISO 800 when the live ND filter is enabled,
K ISO-Auto Set - to ISO 1600 when [Shooting Method] > [Tripod] is selected for High
Res Shot, and
- to ISO 1600 when [Dramatic Tone] or [Watercolor] is selected for
picture mode.

[Lowest S/S Setting]: Choose the shutter speed at which the camera starts
raising ISO sensitivity automatically in modes P and A. Choose [Auto] to let
the camera choose a shutter speed automatically.

Choose the shooting modes in which [AUTO] ISO sensitivity takes effect.

[P/A/S]: [K ISO] > [AUTO] takes effect only in modes P, A, and S. If [AUTO]
is in effect when mode M or B is selected, [K ISO] will be set to ISO 200.
K ISO-Auto
[P/A/S/M]: [KISO] > [AUTO] takes effect in modes P, A, S, and M. If you
select mode B after choosing [AUTO], [K ISO] will be set to ISO 200.

B[K ISO] > [AUTO] takes effect in modes AUTO, SCN, and ART.

284 mno Exp/ISO/BULB/A

 Option Description

K Noise Filter Choose the amount of noise reduction performed at high ISO sensitivities.

Choose the type of processing applied to photographs taken at low ISO

sensitivities.

[Drive Priority]: Image processing is adapted so as not to curtail the number

K Low ISO of pictures that can be taken in a single burst.
Processing
[Detail Priority]: Image processing prioritizes image quality.

BRegardless of the option selected, photographs taken in single-frame mode

will be processed using [Detail Priority].

This function reduces the noise that is generated during long exposures.
The time required for noise reduction is shown in the display.
C [Off] is selected automatically during sequential shooting.
C This function may not work effectively with some shooting conditions or
subjects.
Noise Reduct.
[Auto]: Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds, or when the
internal temperature of the camera has risen.

[On]: Noise reduction is performed with every shot.

[Off]: Noise reduction off.

n Exp/ISO/BULB/A
MENU Q C Q n
Option Description

Bulb/Time Timer Choose the maximum exposure time for bulb and time photography (P. 58).

Live Composite
Choose the maximum exposure time for live composite photography (P. 62).
Timer

Bulb/Time
Choose the brightness of the monitor when shooting in B (bulb) mode.
Monitor

285 mno Exp/ISO/BULB/A

 Option Description

Live Bulb
Choose the display interval during shooting. The number of update times is
limited. Choose [Off] to disable the display (P. 340, P. 341).
Live Time

Composite
Choose the reference exposure time for composite photography (P. 342).
Settings

K Flicker Scan Reduce flicker under LED lighting (P. 343).

o Exp/ISO/BULB/A
MENU Q C Q o
Option Description

Metering Choose a metering mode according to the scene (P. 124).

Choose the metering method used to meter exposure when exposure is locked
using the AEL/AFL button. This allows you to use one metering method when
exposure is locked by pressing the shutter button halfway and another when
AEL Metering
exposure is locked by pressing the AEL/AFL button.

[Auto]: Exposure is metered using the method selected for [Metering] (P. 124).

Choose whether the [Spot], [Spot Hilight], and [Spot Shadow] spot metering
options meter the selected AF target.
Y Spot C [I Face Priority] is automatically set to [Face Priority Off].
Metering C The selected option takes effect when X (single target) or Z (small
target) is selected as the AF-target mode (P. 91).
C The camera zooms in on the selected AF target during focus zoom (P. 96).

Exposure Shift Adjust correct exposure separately for each metering mode (P. 345).

286 mno Exp/ISO/BULB/A

F A Custom

F A Custom
MENU Q C Q F
Option Description

A X-Sync. Choose the fastest shutter speed available when a flash is used (P. 346).

A Slow Limit Choose the slowest shutter speed available when a flash is used (P. 346).

Select [On] to add exposure compensation to the value selected for flash
7+F
output (P. 89, P. 153).

Adjust white balance for use with a flash.

[Off]: The camera uses the value currently selected for white balance.
A+WB
[N]: The camera uses auto white balance ([Auto]).

[O]: The camera uses flash white balance ([O]).

Wireless remote-control flash units can be used with the flash unit for wireless
A RC Mode
remote-control flash photography (P. 434).

287 F A Custom
G X/WB/Color

G X/WB/Color
MENU Q C Q G
Option Description

Choose the combinations of image sizes and compression rates available when
shooting JPEG photos. You have a choice of three image sizes and three
compression rates (P. 139, P. 207, P. 347).

1. Highlight size or compression for the desired combinations ([X1]

to [X4]) using the HI buttons and choose settings using the
FG buttons.

1 1 Image size
X Set
K Set 2 Compression rate

1 2 3 4

Y SF Y F Y N X N

Pixel Count Yarge

Back Set

2
2. Press the OK button.

288 G X/WB/Color
 Option Description

Choose the pixel count for [M]- and [S]-size images (P. 139, P. 207, P. 347).

1. Highlight [Middle] or [Small] and press the I button.

Pixel Count
Xiddle 3200×2400
Wmall 1280×960
Pixel Count

Back Set

2. Choose a pixel count and press the OK button.

Choose [On] to correct peripheral illumination according to the type of lens.

Shading Comp.
C Compensation is not available for teleconverters or extension tubes.
C Noise may be visible at the edges of photographs taken at high ISO
sensitivities.

Choose a white balance mode for still photography. Each mode can be fine-
K WB
tuned (P. 129).

Fine-tune white balance across the board (P. 133).

K All d [All Set]: Fine-tune white balance for all modes.

[All Reset]: Reset fine-tuning for all modes to default values.

K N Keep Select [On] to preserve “warm” colors in pictures taken with [AUTO] white
Warm Color balance under incandescent lighting (P. 129, P. 133).

Choose a color space to ensure correct color reproduction when photos are
Color Space
printed or viewed on a monitor (P. 165).

289 G X/WB/Color
pq Record/Erase

p Record/Erase
MENU Q C Q p
Option Description

Choose how the camera assigns file numbers.

[Auto]: Even when a new card is inserted, the file numbers are retained from
the previous card. File numbering continues from the last number used or from
File Name the highest number available on the card.

[Reset]: When you insert a new card, the folder numbers starts at 100 and
the file name starts at 0001. If a card containing images is inserted, the file
numbers start at the number following the highest file number on the card.

Choose how files are named when photos and movies are saved to the
memory card. You can change the following portions of the file name.
Edit Filename sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg --- Pmdd
AdobeRGB: _mdd0000.jpg --- mdd
Select [Off] to use the default prefixes.

dpi Settings Choose the print resolution.

290 pq Record/Erase
 Option Description

Add the names of the photographer and copyright holder to new photographs.
Names can be up to 63 characters long.

[Copyright Info.]: Select [On] to include the names of the photographer and
copyright holder in the Exif data for new photographs.

[Artist Name]: Enter the name of the photographer.

[Copyright Name]: Enter the name of the copyright holder.

1. Select characters from a and press the OK button. The selected

characters appear in b.
Copyright 2. Repeat Step 1 to complete the name, then highlight [END] and press
Settings the OK button.
To delete a character, press the INFO button to place the cursor in
the name area b, highlight the character, and press D.

Copyright Name 05/63

b ABCDE
! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?

a @ A
P Q
B
R
C
S
D
T
E
U
F
V
G
W
H
X
I
Y
J
Z
K
[
L
\
M
]
N
^
O
_
` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ END

Cancel Delete D Set

C We do not accept liability for damages arising from disputes involving the
use of [Copyright Settings]. Use at your own risk.

Lens Info Save lens info for up to 10 lenses that do not automatically supply info to the
Settings camera (P. 348).

291 pq Record/Erase
q Record/Erase
MENU Q C Q q
Option Description

If [On] is selected, pressing the D button in the playback display will

Quick Erase
immediately delete the current image.

Choose the operation performed when pictures recorded at settings of

RAW+JPEG are deleted using [Erase] (P. 189).
C Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted when selected images are
deleted or when [All Erase] (P. 265) is selected.
RAW+JPEG Erase
[JPEG]: Only the JPEG copy is erased.

[RAW]: Only the RAW copy is erased.

[RAW+JPEG]: Both copies are erased.

Priority Set Choose the default selection ([Yes] or [No]) for confirmation dialogs.

292 pq Record/Erase
I EVF

I EVF
MENU Q C Q I
Option Description

[Off]: The viewfinder display does not light automatically when you put your
eye to the viewfinder. Press the U button to switch between the viewfinder
and monitor displays (P. 40).

[On1]: The viewfinder display lights automatically when you put your eye to
EVF Auto Switch
the viewfinder. Pressing the U button displays [EVF Auto Switch] options.

[On2]: The viewfinder display lights automatically when you put your eye
to the viewfinder. The display does not change when the monitor is open.
Pressing the U button displays [EVF Auto Switch] options.

Adjust viewfinder brightness and hue.

EVF Adjust Brightness is automatically adjusted when [EVF Auto Luminance] is set to
[On]. The contrast of the information display is also adjusted automatically.

EVF Style Choose a viewfinder display style (P. 349).

Choose the information that can be viewed by pressing the INFO button in
q Info Settings the viewfinder display. This option takes effect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is
selected for [EVF Style] (P. 351).

Choose the type and color of framing grid displayed in the viewfinder when
[Off] is selected for [Grid Settings] > [Apply Settings to EVF] in C Custom
Menu k and [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. Choose the
EVF Grid framing grid from [R], [S], [T], [U], [V] or [W].
Settings C When [W] is selected, the guides are adjusted for a 16:9 movie frame
when movies are shot in still photography mode. Depending on the option
selected for [nX], the guides may be displayed with an aspect ratio of
17:9.

293 I EVF
 Option Description

Choose whether the level gauge can be displayed in the viewfinder by pressing
the shutter button halfway when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF
Style] (P. 349).
q Half Way
Level [On]: The level gauge is displayed in the viewfinder while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. The level gauge appears in place of the exposure bar.

[Off]: The level gauge is not displayed.

Select [On] to increase the dynamic range of the viewfinder display, increasing
the amount of detail visible in highlights and shadows in a manner similar to
optical viewfinders. Backlit subjects and the like are easier to see.
S-OVF
s is displayed in the viewfinder when [S-OVF] starts.
C The display is not adjusted for settings such as white balance, exposure
compensation, and picture mode.

294 I EVF
rs K Utility

r K Utility
MENU Q C Q r
Option Description

Perform simultaneous checks on the camera’s image sensor and image

Pixel Mapping
processing functions (P. 444)

Press-and-hold Choose the length of time buttons must pressed to activate the “button hold”
Time option (P. 352).

You can calibrate the angle of the level gauge.

Level Adjust [Reset]: Reset the gauge to factory default settings.

[Adjust]: Choose the current camera angle as the 0 position.

Touchscreen
Activate the touch screen. Choose [Off] to disable the touch screen.
Settings

Set [Recall] to display the cursor at the last position of operation when you
Menu Recall display a menu. The cursor position will be retained even when you turn off the
camera.

Fisheye
Correct fisheye distortion when shooting with fisheye lenses (P. 353).
Compensation

295 rs K Utility
s K Utility
MENU Q C Q s
Option Description

Choose the length of time before the monitor backlight dims when no
operations are performed. Dimming the backlight reduces the drain on the
Backlit LCD battery.
Choose from [Hold], [8sec], [30sec], and [1min]. The backlight will not dim
if [Hold] is selected.

Choose the delay before the camera enters sleep mode when no operations
are performed. In sleep mode, camera operations are suspended and the
monitor turns off.
Choose from [Off], [1min], [3min], and [5min].
C The camera will not enter sleep mode if [Off] is selected.
Sleep Normal operation can be restored by pressing a button or pressing the
shutter button halfway.
C The camera will not enter sleep mode:
- while a multiple exposure is in progress or while connected to an HDMI
device or wireless remote control, via Wi-Fi to a smartphone, or via Wi‑Fi
or USB to a computer

The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for a set
time after it has entered sleep mode. This option is used to choose the delay
before the camera turns off automatically (P. 33).
Auto Power Off Choose from [Off], [5min], [30min], [1h], and [4h].
C The camera will not turn off automatically if [Off] is selected.
C To reactivate the camera after it has turned off automatically, turn the
camera on using the ON/OFF lever.

If [On] is selected, the camera will enter power-saving mode more quickly
when the live view display in the monitor is off. [Backlit LCD] and [Sleep]
can be set to shorter intervals than normal. S displayed in the monitor while
power-saving is in effect.
Quick Sleep
Mode
C Power saving is not available:
- during live view photography, while the viewfinder is on, while multiple-
exposure or interval-timer photography is in progress, while connected
to an HDMI device, via Wi-Fi to a smartphone, or via Wi‑Fi or USB to a
computer, or while Bluetooth is enabled

296 rs K Utility
 Option Description

Certification Display certification icons.

297 rs K Utility
Combined Auto and Manual Focus
(K AF+MF)

MENU Q C Q a Q [K AF+MF]
After focusing using autofocus, you can adjust focus manually by keeping the shutter button pressed
halfway and rotating the focus ring. Switch from auto to manual focus at will or fine-tune focus
manually after focusing with autofocus.
The procedure varies with the AF mode selected.
[Off] is selected by default.

Enable manual focus adjustment in autofocus mode. J displayed next to [S‑AF],

[C‑AF], [C‑AF+TR], or [R AF].
When [S‑AF J] is selected, you can keep the shutter button pressed halfway after
focusing using single AF and adjust focus manually. Alternatively, you can switch to
manual focus by rotating the focus ring while the camera is focusing. Focus can also
be adjusted manually while the shutter is open and during burst photography in
[Sequential Low] mode.
On
When [C‑AFJ] or [C‑AF+TRJ] is selected, you can switch to manual focus by
rotating the focus ring while the camera is focusing in continuous AF and continuous
tracking AF modes. Press the shutter button halfway a second time to refocus using
autofocus. Focus can also be adjusted manually while the shutter is open and during
burst photography in [Sequential Low] mode.
When [RAFJ] is selected, you can focus manually after focusing or before
initiating focus using R AF.

Off Manual focus adjustment disabled during autofocus.

Autofocus with manual focus is also available when autofocus is assigned to other camera controls.
g C Custom Menu a > [K AEL/AFL] (P. 299)

BThe lens focus ring can be used to interrupt autofocus only when M.ZUIKO PRO (Micro Four Thirds
PRO) lenses are used. For information on other lenses, visit our website.
BIn B (bulb) mode, manual focus is controlled by the option selected for [Bulb/Time Focusing].

298 Combined Auto and Manual Focus (K AF+MF)

Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL
Button (K AEL/AFL)

MENU Q C Q a Q [K AEL/AFL]
Choose how the camera sets focus and exposure when the shutter button or AEL/AFL button is
pressed. The camera normally focuses and locks exposure when the shutter button is pressed halfway,
but this can be changed according to the subject or shooting conditions.

S‑AF

C‑AF
Choose the focus or metering operation performed using the shutter or
AEL/AFL button.
MF

RAF

Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter is pressed halfway.
[Operative]: Pressing the shutter button halfway initiates autofocus
regardless of whether autofocus is currently assigned to the AEL/AFL
Half Way AF button. In [C‑AF] mode, the last button pressed is used to maintain focus.
This option has no effect in [MF] or [R AF] mode.
[Inoperative]: Pressing the shutter button halfway will not initiate autofocus
if autofocus is currently assigned to the AEL/AFL button.

Choose whether the AEL/AFL and shutter buttons perform the same or
different functions when faces are detected.
Face Priority AF If [On] is selected, the camera will focus on faces or eyes when the AEL/AFL
button is pressed.
If [Off] is selected, the camera will instead focus on the current AF target.

Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL

299 Button (K AEL/AFL)
The tables below show how the operations performed by the shutter and AEL/AFL buttons vary with
the option selected for [Half Way AF].

Shutter button pressed

Halfway All the way down

AEL/AFL mode
AF AE AF AE

mode1 S‑AF Locks — —

S‑AF mode2 S‑AF — — Locks

mode3 S‑AF 1 Locks — —

mode1 C‑AF Locks Ends —

mode2 C‑AF — Ends Locks

C‑AF
mode3 C‑AF 1 Locks Ends —

mode4 C‑AF 1 — Ends Locks

mode1 — Locks — —

MF mode2 — — — Locks

mode3 — Locks — —

mode1 RAF Locks — —

RAF mode2 — Locks — —

mode3 — Locks — —

1 Selecting [Inoperative] for [Half Way AF] disables autofocus.

C The behavior of [R AF] is affected by the option selected for [Starry Sky AF Setting] (P. 273).

Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL

300 Button (K AEL/AFL)
AEL/AFL button

Kept pressed
AEL/AFL mode
AF AE

mode1 — Locks

S‑AF mode2 — Locks

mode3 S‑AF —

mode1 — Locks

mode2 — Locks
C‑AF
mode3 C‑AF —

mode4 C‑AF —

mode1 — Locks

MF mode2 — Locks

mode3 S‑AF —

mode1 — Locks

RAF mode2 RAF —

mode3 RAF start/end —

C The behavior of [R AF] is affected by the option selected for [Starry Sky AF Setting] (P. 273).

Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL

301 Button (K AEL/AFL)
C‑AF Tracking Sensitivity (K C‑AF Sensitivity)

MENU Q C Q a Q [K C-AF Sensitivity]

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the subject while focusing with
[C‑AF], [C‑AFJ], [C‑AF+TR], or [C‑AF+TRJ] selected for [K AF Mode]. This can help autofocus
track a quickly-moving subject or prevent the camera refocusing when an object passes between the
subject and the camera.
Choose from five levels of tracking sensitivity.
The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity. Choose positive values for subjects that suddenly
enter the frame, that are moving rapidly away from the camera, or that change speed or stop
suddenly while moving toward or away from the camera.
The lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. Choose negative values to prevent the camera
refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by other objects or to prevent the camera focusing
on the background when you are unable to keep the subject in the AF target.

1. Highlight [K C-AF Sensitivity] in C Custom Menu a and

1 A1 KAF Mode
A1. AF/MF
S-AF
press the OK button. 2 A2 KAF+MF Off
A3 KAEL/AFL S3/C4/M3/F3
A4
AF Scanner mode2
B
C1 KC-AF Sensitivity ±0
C2 KC-AF Center Start
D1 KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set

2. Highlight a value using the FG buttons.

1 A1 KAF Mode
A1. AF/MF
S-AF
High
2 A2 KAF+MF Off
+2
A3 KAEL/AFL S3/C4/M3/F3
+1
A4
B
AF Scanner ±0 0
mode2
KC-AF Sensitivity -1±0
C1
-2
C2 KC-AF Center Start
Low
D1 KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set

3. Press the OK button.

C Custom Menu a will be displayed.

4. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

302 C‑AF Tracking Sensitivity (K C‑AF Sensitivity)

C‑AF Starting Focus Target (K C‑AF Center
Start)

MENU Q C Q a Q [K C-AF Center Start]

When used in combination with an AF-target mode other than single target, [C‑AF], [C‑AFJ],
[C‑AF+TR], and [C‑AF+TRJ] focus on the center of the selected group only during the initial scan.
During later scans, the camera will focus using the surrounding targets. Combining this option with an
AF-target mode that covers a wide area makes it easier to focus on erratically-moving subjects.

1. Highlight [K C-AF Center Start] in C Custom Menu a and

1 A1 KAF Mode
A1. AF/MF
S-AF
press the OK button. 2 A2 KAF+MF Off
A3 KAEL/AFL S3/C4/M3/F3
A4
AF Scanner mode2
B
C1 KC-AF Sensitivity ±0
C2 KC-AF Center Start
D1 KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set

2. Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target modes to

q
KC-AF Center Start

which [K C‑AF Center Start] will apply and then press the N

OK button. r
s
u
v
w
Back H

Selected modes are marked with a check (P). To deselect, press the OK button again.

3. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

C The options selected for [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 304) (if any) take precedence those selected
for [K C-AF Center Priority].

C‑AF Starting Focus Target (K C‑AF Center

303 Start)
C-AF Center Target Priority (K C-AF Center
Priority)

MENU Q C Q a Q [K C-AF Center Priority]

When focusing using group- or -target AF in [C‑AF] and [C‑AF J] modes, the camera always
assigns priority to the center target in the selected group for a repeated series of focus operations.
Only if the camera is unable to focus using the center focus target will it focus using the surrounding
targets in the selected focus group. This helps you track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively
predictably. C‑AF center priority is recommended in most situations.

1. Highlight [K C-AF Center Priority] in C Custom Menu a

1 A1 KAF Mode
A1. AF/MF
S-AF
and press the OK button. 2 A2 KAF+MF Off
A3 KAEL/AFL S3/C4/M3/F3
A4
AF Scanner mode2
B
C1 KC-AF Sensitivity ±0
C2 KC-AF Center Start
D1 KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set

2. Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target modes to

N
KC-AF Center Priority

which [K C-AF Center Priority] will apply and then press the r

OK button. s
u
v
w
x
Back H

Selected modes are marked with a check (P). To deselect, press the OK button again.

3. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

C-AF Center Target Priority (K C-AF Center

304 Priority)
Choosing the AF Home Position (Y Set
Home)

MENU Q C Q b Q [Y Set Home]

Choose the home position for the [Y Home] feature. The [Y Home] feature lets you recall a
previously-saved “home position” for autofocus at the touch of a button. This item is used to choose
the home position. To access [Y Home], assign it to a control using [K Button Function] (P. 167)
If [K Orientation Linked Y] (P. 310) is active, the camera will store separate home positions for
landscape (“wide”) and portrait (“tall”) orientations. 5 appears in the AF-target selection display
when the current home position is selected.

Choose the home position autofocus mode. [RAF] and [RAFJ] cannot be
AF mode
assigned home positions.

Choose the home position AF target mode. Only options selected for
AF Target Mode
[KYMode Settings] (P. 271) are available.

AF Target Point Choose the home position focus target.

1. Highlight [Y Set Home] in C Custom Menu b and press

1 A1
A2. AF/MF
KNMode Settings
the OK button. 2 A2 AF Area Pointer On1
A3 NSet Home
A4
NSelect Screen Settings
B
C1 NLoop Settings
C2 tTarget Mode Settings
D1 KOrientation Linked N
Back Set

2. Highlight a setting you wish to store with the home position

AF Mode
NSet Home
MF
and press the OK button. AF Target Mode q
AF Target Point

Back H

Selected items are marked with a check (P). Items marked with a P are included in the
home position.

305 Choosing the AF Home Position (Y Set Home)

3. Press the I button to display options for the highlighted
AF Mode
NSet Home
S-AF S-AF
setting. AF Target Mode C-AF N
AF Target Point MF
C-AF+TR
Preset MF

Back Set

Choose settings for the home position.

When [K Orientation Linked Y] is active, you will be prompted to select landscape or
portrait (camera rotated left/camera rotated right) orientation before pressing the I button
to display options.

4. Press the OK button to save changes when settings are complete.

The camera will return to the “Y Set Home” display.

5. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit when settings are complete.

306 Choosing the AF Home Position (Y Set Home)

AF-Target Selection (Y Select Screen
Settings)

MENU Q C Q b Q [Y Select Screen Settings]

Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials or arrow pad during AF target selection. The
controls used can be selected according to how the camera is used or personal taste. You can choose
up to two combinations.
If you select [Set 2], the options in the [Y Select Screen Settings] menu will be checked (P).
[Set 2] can be recalled by pressing the INFO button in the AF-target selection display.

Available Controls
Front dial, rear dial, FG buttons, HI buttons

Available Roles
[tPos]: Position the AF target (P. 95).
[YMode]: Choose the AF target mode (e.g., all, small, or group) (P. 91).
[I]: Adjust settings for face/eye detection AF (P. 126).

307 AF-Target Selection (Y Select Screen Settings)

Enabling AF-Target Selection Wrap (Y Loop
Settings)

MENU Q C Q b Q [Y Loop Settings]

You can choose whether AF-target selection “wraps around” the edges of the display. You can also
choose whether you have the option of selecting q (all targets) before AF-target selection “wraps
around” to the opposite border of the display.

[Off]: Wrap disabled. Target selection stays within the borders of the display.

[Loop 1]: If you continue to press the

FGHI buttons in the same direction
after reaching the border of the display, the
target in the same row or column on the
opposite border will be selected.

Y Loop
“Loop 1”
Selection
[Loop 2]: If you continue to press the
FGHI buttons in the same direction
after reaching the border of the display, the
target in the next row or column on the
opposite border will be selected.

“Loop 2”

[No]: Target selection does not pass through q (all targets) before wrapping
around.

[Yes]: If [Loop 1] or [Loop 2] is chosen for [Y Loop Selection], target

Via q selection will pass through q (all targets) before wrapping around to the
opposite border.

C Hiding q (all targets) in [KYMode Settings] fixes [Via q] at

[No].

C [Y Loop Selection] is fixed at [Off] during movie recording and when [R AF] or [RAF J] is
selected for focus mode.

Enabling AF-Target Selection Wrap (Y Loop

308 Settings)
AF Target Size and Positioning (t Target
Mode Settings)

MENU Q C Q b Q [t Target Mode Settings]

Choose the number of AF targets available and how far the AF target moves during AF-target
selection. Targets can be larger than group targets or sized for subjects whose motion can be
predicted. You can also increase the distance between available targets for faster target selection.
The camera can store up to four different combinations of settings.

C If the AF-target or step size is altered from the default value, checks (P) will appear next to the
custom target options in [KYMode Settings] (P. 271).

Choose the target size. Target width and height can be set separately. Choose
Size
from options of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11.

Choose the number of steps the target moves during target selection. The
Step horizontal and vertical step sizes can be set separately; choose from steps of 1,
2, and 3.

AF Target Size and Positioning (t Target Mode

309 Settings)
Matching AF-Target Selection to Camera
Orientation (K Orientation Linked Y)

MENU Q C Q b Q [K Orientation Linked Y]

The camera can be configured to change the AF-target position and AF-target mode automatically
when it detects that it has been rotated between landscape (wide) or portrait (tall) orientations.
Rotating the camera changes the composition and consequently also the position of the subject in
the frame. The camera can store the AF target mode and AF target position separately according to
camera orientation. When this option is active, [Y Set Home] (P. 305) can be used to store separate
home positions for landscape and portrait orientations.

Choose separate AF target modes (e.g., all, small, or group) for landscape and
AF Target Mode
portrait orientations.

AF Target Point Choose separate AF targets for landscape and portrait orientations.

1. Highlight [K Orientation Linked Y] in C Custom Menu

1 A1
A2. AF/MF
KNMode Settings
b and press I on the arrow pad. 2 A2 AF Area Pointer On1
A3 NSet Home
A4
NSelect Screen Settings
B
C1 NLoop Settings
C2 tTarget Mode Settings
D1 KOrientation Linked N
Back Set

2. Highlight a setting you wish saved separately and press the OK KOrientation Linked N
AF Target Mode
button. AF Target Point

Back H

Selected items are marked with a check (P).

3. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit when settings are complete.
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

Matching AF-Target Selection to Camera

310 Orientation (K Orientation Linked Y)
4. Choose the AF target mode or target position with the camera first in one orientation and then
the other.
Separate settings are stored for landscape orientation, portrait orientation with the camera
rotated to the right, and portrait orientation with the camera rotated to the left.

Matching AF-Target Selection to Camera

311 Orientation (K Orientation Linked Y)
Lens Focus Range (AF Limiter)

MENU Q C Q c Q [AF Limiter]

Choose the range in which the camera will focus using autofocus. This is effective in situations in which
an obstacle presents itself between the subject and the camera during the focus operation, causing
drastic changes in focus. You can also use it to prevent the camera focusing on foreground objects
when shooting through a fence, window, or the like.

Choose the range of focus distances available. The camera can store up to three
Distance
settings for different situations. Distances are approximate and intended as guides
settings
only.

Release The shutter can still be released if the camera is unable to focus when [On] is
Priority selected for [AF Limiter].

BAF Limiter is not available in the following cases.

- When the focus limiter is enabled on the lens
- When using focus bracketing
- While in the movie mode or recording a movie
- When [RAF] or [RAFJ] is selected for focus mode

312 Lens Focus Range (AF Limiter)

Fine-Tuning Autofocus (AF Focus Adj.)

MENU Q C Q c Q [AF Focus Adj.]

Fine-tune phase-detection autofocus. Focus can be fine-tuned by up to ±20 steps.

C Normally there is no need to fine-tune autofocus using this item. Fine-tuning focus may prevent the
camera focusing normally.
C Focus fine-tuning has no effect in [S‑AF] and [S‑AF J] modes.
C This item is for still photography.

Off Fine-tuning disabled.

Default Data Fine-tune focus for all lenses.

Save fine-tuning values on a lens-by-lens basis. The camera can store fine-tuning
values for up to 20 lenses. Focus for individual lenses can be fine-tuned in specific
Lens Data
areas of the frame. In the case of zoom lenses, separate values can be stored for
long and short focal lengths.

1. Highlight [AF Focus Adj.] in C Custom Menu c and press

1 A1
A3. AF/MF
AF Targeting Pad Off
the I button. 2 A2 AF Limiter Off
A3 AF Illuminator On
A4
Face Priority Off
B
C1 AF Focus Adj. Off
C2
D1

Back Set

2. Highlight [Default Data] or [Lens Data] and press the I

A1
A3. AF/MF
AF Targeting Pad Off
button.
1

2 A2 AF Limiter Off
A3 AF Illuminator On
A4
Face Priority Off
B
C1 AF Focus Adj. Off Off
C2 Default Data
D1 Lens Data
Back Set

If you selected [Default Data], proceed to Step 5.

To disable fine-tuning, highlight [Off] and press the OK button.

313 Fine-Tuning Autofocus (AF Focus Adj.)

3. Highlight [Create Lens Data Set] and press the OK button. Data List
Create Lens Data Set

Back Set

You will be prompted to choose the area of the frame for which focus will be fine-tuned.

4. Use the FGHI buttons to choose an area of the frame and 50-200 F2.8-3.5 (S/N xxxxxxxxx)
±00 ±0 ±00 ±0 ±00
then press the OK button. ±00
±0
±0
±00
±00
±0
±0
±00
±00
±0
±0 ±00 ±0 ±00 ±0

±00 ±0 ±00 ±0 ±00

±00 ±0 ±00 ±0 ±00

±0 ±00 ±0 ±00 ±0
±0 ±00 ±0 ±00 ±0
±00 ±0 ±00 ±0 ±00
±00 ±0 ±00 ±0 ±00

Tele
Back Wide Set

With zoom lenses, you can press the INFO button to choose between long (telephoto) and
short (wide) focal lengths.

5. Choose a fine-tuning value using the FG buttons and press the OK button.
The selected value will be saved. If you chose [Default Data], the options shown in Step 2
will be displayed.
If you chose [Lens Data], the dialog shown in Step 3 will be displayed. The display will show
the name of the lens for which the fine-tuning value was saved.
Rotate the front dial to zoom in and check focus.
Before pressing the OK button, press the shutter button to take a test shot and check focus.
To save another fine-tuning value for the current lens, press the I button and repeat the
process from Step 4.

6. To fine-tune focus for the same lens but in a different area Data List
Create Lens Data Set
of the frame, highlight the lens name using the FG buttons 1 50-200 F2.8-3.5

and press the I button.

Back Set

Repeat the process from Step 4.

7. When the process is complete, press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

314 Fine-Tuning Autofocus (AF Focus Adj.)

Deleting Saved Values

1. Highlight [AF Focus Adj.] in C Custom Menu c and press

1 A1
A3. AF/MF
AF Targeting Pad Off
the I button. 2 A2 AF Limiter Off
A3 AF Illuminator On
A4
Face Priority Off
B
C1 AF Focus Adj. Off
C2
D1

Back Set

2. Highlight [Lens Data] using the FG buttons and press the

1 A1
A3. AF/MF
AF Targeting Pad Off
I button. 2 A2 AF Limiter Off
A3 AF Illuminator On
A4
Face Priority Off
B
C1 AF Focus Adj. Off Off
C2 Default Data
D1 Lens Data
Back Set

3. Use the FG buttons to highlight the name of the lens you Data List
Create Lens Data Set
wish to delete from the fine-tuning list and then press the I 1 50-200 F2.8-3.5

button.

Back Set

4. Highlight [Delete] using the FG buttons and press the I Data List
Create Lens Data Set
button. 1 50-200 F2.8-3.5 Check
Delete

Back Set

A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

5. Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the OK Delete Lens Data Set

button. No.1
50-200 F2.8-3.5

Yes
No

Back Set

The dialog shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Confirm that the lens name has been deleted.

315 Fine-Tuning Autofocus (AF Focus Adj.)

C To disable AF fine-tuning without deleting the entries for the current lens, select [Off] for [AF Focus
Adj.].
BThe camera can store multiple values for each lens.

Enabling Fine-Tuning
Display the lens data list and place checks (P) next to the items you wish to use.

316 Fine-Tuning Autofocus (AF Focus Adj.)

Manual Focus Assist (MF Assist)

MENU Q C Q d Q [MF Assist]

This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of the subject is
enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnified. When you stop operating the focus ring, the
screen returns to the original display.

Magnifies a portion of the screen.

[Off]: Normal display.
[On]: Magnifies a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnified can
be set in advance using AF target. g “Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target
Magnify
Point)” (P. 95)
Rotate the front or rear dial to zoom in or out during focus zoom.
Focus zoom is not available during movie recording or when [C‑AFJ] or
[C‑AF+TRJ] is selected for focus mode.

Displays clearly defined outlines with edge enhancement.

[Off]: Normal display.
[On]: Displays clearly defined outlines with edge enhancement. You can select
the enhancement color and intensity. g C Custom Menu k > [Peaking
Peaking Settings] (P. 281)
BPress the INFO button to change the color and intensity when peaking is
displayed.
C When peaking is in use, the edges of small subjects tend to be enhanced
more strongly. This is no guarantee of accurate focusing.

Rotating the focus ring during manual focus displays an indicator showing the
direction and approximate amount of rotation required to bring the subject
into focus.
[Off]: Normal display.
[On]: Rotating the focus ring during manual focus displays an indicator
showing the direction and approximate amount of rotation required to bring
Focus Indicator
the subject into focus.
C These indicators may be reversed in the case of third-party lenses equipped
with a focus clutch, in which case you will need to change the option
selected for [Focus Ring] (P. 273).
C The focus indicator is not displayed when a lens with a Four Thirds mount is
used.

317 Manual Focus Assist (MF Assist)

Adjusting Focus During Exposures (Bulb/Time
Focusing)

MENU Q C Q d Q [Bulb/Time Focusing]

In mode B (bulb), you can adjust focus manually while the exposure is in progress. This allows you to
defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure.

1. Highlight [Bulb/Time Focusing] in C Custom Menu d and

1 A1
A4. AF/MF
Starry Sky AF Setting Speed
press the OK button. 2 A2 Preset MF distance
A3 MF Assist
A4
MF Clutch Operative
B
C1 Focus Ring
C2 Bulb/Time Focusing On
D1 Reset Lens Off
Back Set

2. Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

[Off]: The focus position cannot be adjusted manually during an exposure.
[On]: The focus position can be adjusted manually during an exposure.

3. Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

C Custom Menu d will be displayed.

4. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

Adjusting Focus During Exposures (Bulb/Time

318 Focusing)
Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials
(K Dial Function)

MENU Q C Q B Q [K Dial Function]

Choose the roles performed by the front and rear dials. You can also choose the function selected
using the Fn lever (P. 321), as well as the operations performed during playback or when menus are
displayed.
The functions assigned using [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] in the n Video
Menu (P. 233) take effect in n (movie) mode.

The roles that can be performed by the dials in photo shooting and q playback modes are listed
below.

Exposure mode
Available Roles Function
P A S M B

Ps Program shift (P. 50). P — — — —

Shutter Choose a shutter speed. — — P P P1

FNo. Adjust aperture. — P — P P

F Adjust exposure compensation. P P P P P

7 Adjust flash compensation. P P P P P

ISO Adjust ISO sensitivity. P P P P P

WB Adjust white balance. P P P P P

Choose a color temperature when CWB

CWB Kelvin P P P P P
(custom) is selected for white balance.

Off None. P P P P P

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials

319 (K Dial Function)
 Exposure mode
Available Roles Function
P A S M B

Move the cursor up or down or highlight

r/Value values or options while menus are
displayed.
—

Move the cursor left or right while menus

s
are displayed.

G8 (index/ Zoom in or out or switch to the index

playback zoom) display during playback.
—
View the next or previous image during
Prev/Next
playback.

1 Switch between bulb, time, and live composite.

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials

320 (K Dial Function)
Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever
Function)

MENU Q C Q B Q [K Fn Lever Function]

Choose the role played by the Fn lever.
The functions assigned to controls using this item are available only in modes P, A, S, M, and B
(still photography modes). The functions assigned using [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever
Function] in the n Video Menu (P. 233) take effect in n (movie) mode.

Switch the functions of the front and rear dials. The functions for Positions 1 and 2
mode1
conform to the setting selected for [K Dial Function] (P. 319).

Switch between two groups of settings previously selected for [AF Mode], [AF Target
mode2 Mode], and [AF Target Point].
You can choose the options selected by pressing the I button.

Toggle the shooting mode. You can switch to n (movie) mode without rotating the
mode dial.
mode3
C The Fn lever cannot be used to perform the function assigned using [nFn Lever
Function].

Off The Fn lever function is turned off.

C The Fn lever cannot be used to perform the selected function when [Power 1] or [Power 2] is
selected for [Fn Lever/Power Lever] in C Custom Menu B (P. 275).

321 Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function)

Burst Shooting Options (gL Settings/
gH Settings)
MENU Q C Q g Q [gL Settings]/[gH Settings]
Adjust settings for sequential shooting modes, including the maximum frame advance rate and
number of shots per burst. Shooting ends if the maximum number of shots is reached while the
shutter button is pressed all the way down.

Choose the advance rate and number of shots per burst for h (sequential low) and i (sequential
high) modes.

Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for h
(sequential low), G (anti-shock sequential low), and C (silent sequential
low) modes. You can also adjust settings for u (Pro Capture Low) mode
(P. 107).
h and G modes:
[Max fps]: 1–6 fps
gL Settings
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
(sequential low
options)
C mode:
[Max fps]: 1–10 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
u mode:
[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–14
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.

Burst Shooting Options (gL Settings/

322
gH Settings)
 Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for i
(sequential high) and D (silent sequential high) modes. You can also adjust
settings for t (Pro Capture High) mode (P. 107).
i mode:
[Max fps]: 5–10 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
gH Settings
(sequential high
D mode:
[Max fps]: 15, 20, or 30 fps
options)
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
t mode:
[Max fps]: 15, 20, or 30 fps
[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–14
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.

1. Highlight [gL Settings] or [gH Settings] in C Custom

1 A1
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority Off
Menu g and press the OK button. 2 A2 C-AF Release Priority On
A3 jL Settings
A4
jH Settings
B
C1 Flicker Reduction
C2
D1

Back Set

2. Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the I

A1
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority Off
button.
1

2 A2 C-AF Release Priority On

A3 jL Settings j/tj
A4 ♥j
jH Settings
B
C1 Flicker Reduction J
C2
D1

Back Set

The camera will display options for the selected item.

Burst Shooting Options (gL Settings/

323
gH Settings)
3. Choose settings for [Pre-shutter Frames] or [Max fps].
If you selected [h], [G], or [C] in Step 2:
♥j

Max fps 10fps

Highlight [Max fps] using the FG buttons and press the Frame Count Limiter Off

I button.
Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press the OK
button.
Back Set

If you selected [s] in Step 2: J

Pre-shutter Frames 8
Highlight [Pre-shutter Frames] using the FG buttons Frame Count Limiter 25

and press the I button.

Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the 25

OK button. 8 17

Back Set

4. Choose the maximum number of shots per burst ([Frame

Max fps
♥j

10fps
Count Limiter]). Frame Count Limiter Off

Highlight [Frame Count Limiter] using the FG buttons

and press the I button.

Back Set

To keep shooting as long as the shutter release button is pressed all the way down, select
[Off].
To choose a maximum number of shots, highlight the current setting and press the I
button to display options. Highlight digits using the HI buttons and use the FG buttons
to change.
The maximum number of shots per burst includes shots captured while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. g “Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture shooting)” (P. 107)
Press the OK button to save changes to settings.

5. Press the OK button.

C Custom Menu g will be displayed.

6. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

Burst Shooting Options (gL Settings/

324
gH Settings)
Reducing Flicker (Flicker Reduction)

MENU Q C Q g Q [Flicker Reduction]

When shooting under fluorescent or other artificial workplace or outdoor lighting, you may notice
flicker in the live view display or uneven exposure in photos taken at fast shutter speeds. This item
reduces these effects.

Reducing Flicker in Live View (Anti-Flicker LV)

Reduce flicker under fluorescent lighting and the like. Choose this option if flicker makes the display
difficult to view.

Auto The camera detects and reduces flicker.

Reduce flicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating current with a
50Hz
frequency of 50 Hz.

Reduce flicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating current with a
60Hz
frequency of 60 Hz.

Flicker reduction off.

Off
This option is not available when [On] is selected for [Anti-Flicker Shooting] (P. 327).

1. Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in C Custom Menu g and

1 A1
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority Off
press the OK button. 2 A2 C-AF Release Priority On
A3 jL Settings
A4
jH Settings
B
C1 Flicker Reduction
C2
D1

Back Set

2. Highlight [Anti-Flicker LV] using the FG buttons and press Flicker Reduction
Anti-Flicker LV Auto
the I button. Anti-Flicker Shooting Off

Back Set

[Anti-Flicker LV] options will be displayed.

325 Reducing Flicker (Flicker Reduction)

3. Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the OK Anti-Flicker LV

button. Auto

Automatically reduces flicker.

Back Set

[Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.

4. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

326 Reducing Flicker (Flicker Reduction)

Reducing Flicker in Photographs (Anti-Flicker
Shooting)
You may notice uneven exposure in photos taken under flickering light. When this option is enabled,
the camera will detect the flicker frequency and adjust the timing of the shutter release accordingly.
This feature applies to photos taken with the mechanical shutter.

1. Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in C Custom Menu g and

1 A1
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority Off
press the OK button. 2 A2 C-AF Release Priority On
A3 jL Settings
A4
jH Settings
B
C1 Flicker Reduction
C2
D1

Back Set

2. Highlight [Anti-Flicker Shooting] using the FG buttons and Flicker Reduction

Anti-Flicker LV Auto
press the I button. Anti-Flicker Shooting Off

Back Set

[Anti-Flicker Shooting] options will be displayed.

3. Highlight [On] or [Off] using the FG buttons and press the Anti-Flicker Shooting

OK button. On

Effects of flicker such as uneven

exposures and colors will be
reduced. The shutter release time
lag may become longer.
Valid when using mechanical shutter.
Back Set

[Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.

327 Reducing Flicker (Flicker Reduction)

 4. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.
A 6 icon appears in the display when [On] is selected. FLK

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

C This option does not take effect in modes that use the electronic shutter, including silent modes,
High Res Shot, and Pro Capture modes.
C The camera may be unable to detect flicker at some settings. Normal release timing will be used if
flicker is not detected.
C Normal release timing is used at slow shutter speeds.
C Enabling flicker reduction may cause release lag, slowing the frame advance rate during burst
photography.

328 Reducing Flicker (Flicker Reduction)

Choosing the control panel displays
(K Control Settings)

MENU Q C Q i Q [K Control Settings]

Choose the control panel displays available in each shooting mode. Select each of the shooting modes
and press the OK button to place a check next to each of the displays you wish to have available.

1. Highlight [K Control Settings] in C Custom Menu i and

1 A1
D1. Disp/8/PC
KControl Settings
press the OK button. 2 A2 G/Info Settings
A3 Picture Mode Settings
A4
j/Y Settings
B
C1 Multi Function Settings
C2
D1

Back Set

2. Highlight the desired shooting mode using the FG buttons

1 A1
D1. Disp/8/PC
KControl Settings B
and press I. 2 A2 G/Info Settings P/A/S/M/B
A3 Picture Mode Settings ART
A4
j/Y Settings SCN
B
C1 Multi Function Settings
C2
D1

Back Set

Control options for the selected mode will be displayed.

3. Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the OK P/A/S/M/B

Live Control
button. Live SCP

Selected items are marked with a check (P). The displays

marked with a check will be available in the selected
shooting mode.
Back H

4. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

BThe control panel displays for movie mode can be selected using [n Display Settings] >
[n Control Settings] in the n Video Menu. g n Video Menu > [n Display Settings] >
[n Control Settings] (P. 233)

Choosing the control panel displays (K Control

329 Settings)
Displaying On-Screen Controls
Press the OK button to display a control panel and use the INFO button cycle through the available
displays.

C Only control panels selected in the [K Control Settings] menu will be displayed.

1 2 3
Change Color Saturation
S-IS AUTO Aspect
INFO WB
INFO ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0 S ±0
i-Enhance
±0

0
AUTO
S-AF ±0 Normal
o #
i Standard
4:3
# ± 0.0 o p sRGB
YF S-IS Auto 4K
YF
5184x3888 4K
30p M-IS 30p
1:02:03
4:3 16:9 3:2 1:1 3:4 250 F5.6 1023

INFO

2 3
S-IS AUTO Aspect

WB
AUTO
INFO ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0 S ±0
Natural
±0

P/A/S/M/B o
4:3

YF
#

# ± 0.0 o
S-AF

p
Off
±0 Normal

sRGB
S-IS Auto 4K
YF
5184x3888 4K
30p M-IS 30p
1:02:03
P 4:3 16:9 3:2 1:1 3:4 P 250 F5.6 1023

INFO

4 2 3
S-IS AUTO Aspect
INFO WB
INFO ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0
ART11
Effect Off
AUTO

ART ART
1
Effect
Off
o
4:3
#

# ± 0.0 o
S-AF

p
Off
sRGB
YF S-IS Auto 4K
YF
Pop Art 1 5184x3888 4K
30p M-IS 30p
1:02:03
4:3 16:9 3:2 1:1 3:4 250 F5.6 1023

INFO

5 2 3
Portrait
S-IS AUTO Aspect
INFO WB
INFO ISO
Auto
WB
Auto
A±0
G±0 S ±0
Portrait
±0
AUTO

SCN o
4:3
#

# ± 0.0 o
S-AF

p
i
±0 Normal

sRGB
YF S-IS Auto 4K
YF
5184x3888 4K
30p M-IS 30p
1:02:03
4:3 16:9 3:2 1:1 3:4 250 F5.6 1023

INFO

1 Live Guide (P. 64) 4 Art Menu (P. 73)

2 Live Control (P. 331) 5 Scene Menu (P. 67)
3 LV super control panel (P. 115)

BThe on-screen controls available in movie mode can be selected using [n Display
Settings] >[n Control Settings] in the n Video Menu. g n Video Menu > [n Display
Settings] > [n Control Settings] (P. 233)

Choosing the control panel displays (K Control

330 Settings)
Live Controls
S-IS AUTO
1 Settings
2 Functions
WB
AUTO

1
WKeep Warm Color o 4:3
OFF LF
WB Auto 4K
30p

P AUTO U 2

Available settings
Image stabilizer (P. 134) n mode 3 (P. 238)
Picture mode (P. 154, P. 206) Flash mode (P. 149)
Art filter mode 1 (P. 73) Flash intensity control (P. 153)
Scene mode 2 (P. 67) Metering mode (P. 124)
White balance (P. 129) AF mode (P. 118)
Sequential shooting/self-timer (P. 101) ISO sensitivity (P. 117)
Aspect ratio (P. 138) Face priority (P. 126)
Image quality Movie sound (P. 246)
- Photos (P. 139)
- Movies (P. 242)

1 Displayed in ART mode.

2 Displayed in SCN mode.
3 Displayed in movie mode.

C Some functions cannot be used depending on the shooting mode.

BLive controls are available in 0, P, A, S, M, B, ART, and SCN modes when [Live Control] is
selected in the [K Control Settings] display. g C Custom Menu i > [K Control Settings]
(P. 329)

1. Press the OK button to display live controls.

Press the OK button again to hide live controls.

2. Highlight items using the FG buttons, choose the desired option using the HI buttons,
and then press the OK button.
The setting is confirmed if you leave the camera as-is for 8 seconds.

Choosing the control panel displays (K Control

331 Settings)
Adding information displays (G/Info
Settings)

MENU Q C Q i Q [G/Info Settings]

q Info (Playback information displays)

Use [q Info] to add the following playback information displays. The added displays are displayed by
repeatedly pressing the INFO button during playback. You can also choose to not show displays that
appear at the default setting.

15 Shadow Highlight 15

Histogram display Highlight & Shadow display

Highlight & Shadow display

Areas above the upper limit of brightness for the image are shown in red, those below the lower limit
in blue. g C Custom Menu k > [Histogram Settings] (P. 281)

332 Adding information displays (G/Info Settings)

q8 Info (Magnified playback information
display)
The magnified playback information displays can be set with [q8 Info]. If [8] (Magnify) is
currently assigned to a control (P. 167), you can cycle through the chosen displays by repeatedly
pressing the 8 button during playback. You can also choose to not show displays that appear at the
default setting.

8 8 8

4:3 YF 100-0015
2022.10.15 12:30:00 15 2x 15 2x 2x 15

LV-Info (Shooting information displays)

Choose the info shown in the live view shooting display. g “Switching the information
display” (P. 41)
To add highlights and shadows to the [LV-Info] display, press the I button to place a check next
to [Custom1] or [Custom2]. The added displays are can be viewed by repeatedly pressing the INFO
button during shooting. You can also choose to not show displays that appear at the default setting.
To choose the items displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway, highlight [Image Only] in
the [LV-Info] menu and press the I button.

On Shooting info is displayed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Off Shooting info is not displayed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

LV OFF-Info (Shooting information displays)

Choose a shooting display (P. 41).

333 Adding information displays (G/Info Settings)

G Settings (Index/calendar display)
You can change the number of frames to be displayed on the index display and set to not display
the screens that are set to be displayed by default with [G Settings]. Screens with a check can be
selected on the playback screen using the rear dial.

o o

2022.10.15 12:30:00 20

2022.10.15 12:30:00
4:3 YF 100-0015
20 n 2022.10.15 12:30:00 20 n 2022.10.15 12:30:00 20

1 2 2022.10.15 12:30:00 20

3
4

n o
2022.10
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat

25 26 27 28 29 30 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OK 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29

30 31 1 2 3

5
1 Single-frame playback 4 Index display
2 4 frames 5 Calendar display
3 9, 25, or 100 frames

334 Adding information displays (G/Info Settings)

Choosing the Playback Zoom Ratio
(q8 Default Setting)

MENU Q C Q j Q [q8 Default Setting]

Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up playback).

Recently Zoom in to the most recently selected zoom ratio.

Images are displayed at a zoom ratio of 1:1. A a icon appears in the

Equally Value
monitor.

×2, ×3, ×5, ×7, ×10, ×14 Choose the starting zoom ratio.

Choosing the Playback Zoom Ratio

335 (q8 Default Setting)
Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist)

MENU Q C Q k Q [Selfie Assist]

Choose the display used when the monitor is reversed for self-portraits.

When reversed for self-portraits, the monitor shows a mirror image of the view through the
On
lens.

Off The display does not change when the monitor is reversed.

1. Select [On] for [Selfie Assist] in C Custom Menu k.

2. Turn the monitor towards you.

336 Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist)

Viewing camera images on TV (HDMI)

MENU Q C Q l Q [HDMI]
Use the separately sold cable with the camera to playback recorded images on your TV. This function is
available during shooting. Connect the camera to an HD TV using an HDMI cable to view high-quality
images on a TV screen.

1 Type A HDMI connector

2 HDMI cable
1 3 Type D HDMI connector
4
4 Camera HDMI connector

Connect the TV and camera and switch the input source of the TV.
If [On] is selected for [HDMI Control] (P. 388), the camera monitor will turn off when an HDMI
cable is connected.

BFor information on switching to HDMI input, see the manual provided with the TV.
BIf the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, you will be able to choose the digital video signal
type. Choose a format that matches the input format selected with the TV.
C Depending on TV settings, the image may be cropped and some indicators may not be visible.

C4K The signal is output in 4K digital cinema (4096 × 2160) format.

4K If possible, the signal is output in 4K (3840 × 2160).

1080p If possible, the signal is output in Full HD (1080p).

720p If possible, the signal is output in HD (720p).

480p/576p The signal is output in 480p/576p format.

C Do not connect the camera to other HDMI output devices. Doing so may damage the camera.
C HDMI output is disabled while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
C When [Record Mode] is selected for [Output Mode], movies will be output at the resolution
selected during recording. No image will be displayed if the TV does not support the selected frame
size. g n Video Menu > [n HDMI Output] > [Output Mode] (P. 233)

337 Viewing camera images on TV (HDMI)

C If [4K] or [C4K] is selected, 1080p priority format will be used during still photography.

Using the TV remote control

The camera can be operated by a TV remote control when connected to a TV that supports HDMI
control. g “Using a TV Remote (HDMI Control)” (P. 388)
The camera monitor turns off.
You can operate the camera by following the operation guide displayed on the TV.
During single-frame playback, you can display or hide the information display by pressing the
“Red” button, and display or hide the index display by pressing the “Green” button.

C Some televisions may not support all features.

338 Viewing camera images on TV (HDMI)

Choosing a USB Connection Mode (USB Mode)

MENU Q C Q l Q [USB Mode]

Choose how the camera functions when connected to external devices via USB.

You will be prompted to choose a connection mode each time a USB cable is
Select
connected.

The camera functions as an external storage device. The data on the camera
Storage
memory card can be copied to the computer.

The pictures on the memory card can be viewed or copied to the computer
MTP
using standard software supplied with Windows (P. 371).

The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a webcam for online
meetings or live streaming (P. 374). Video and audio are transmitted directly
Webcam
from the camera via a simple USB connection, obviating the need for special
software or drivers (USB streaming).

339 Choosing a USB Connection Mode (USB Mode)

Live Bulb Update Frequency (Live Bulb)

MENU Q C Q n Q [Live Bulb]

Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live bulb photography in mode B
(bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live bulb photography is in progress,
allowing you to view the results in the display.

B[Live Bulb] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button when the mode dial is
rotated to B and [BULB] is selected for shutter speed. g “Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)” (P. 58)

340 Live Bulb Update Frequency (Live Bulb)

Live Time Update Frequency (Live Time)

MENU Q C Q n Q [Live Time]

Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live time photography in mode B
(bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live time photography is in progress,
allowing you to view the results in the display.

B[Live Time] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button when the mode dial is
rotated to B and [TIME] is selected for shutter speed. g “Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)” (P. 58)

341 Live Time Update Frequency (Live Time)

Choosing the Shutter Speed (Composite
Settings)

MENU Q C Q n Q [Composite Settings]

The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can be chosen in
advance using the menus.

1. Highlight [Composite Settings] in C Custom Menu n and

1 D2
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Bulb/Time Timer 8min
press the OK button. 2 D3 Live Composite Timer 3h
D4 Bulb/Time Monitor –7
E1
Live Bulb Off
E2
E3 Live Time 0.5sec
F Composite Settings
G KFlicker Scan Off
Back Set

2. Highlight an option using the FG buttons. Composite Settings

1sec

Exposure time per image.

Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.

Back Set

Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.

3. Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

C Custom Menu n will be displayed.

4. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

The maximum exposure time can be selected using [Live Composite Timer] in C Custom
Menu n (P. 285). The default setting is [3h].

BThis item applies during still photography in B (bulb) mode. See “Lighten Blending (B: Live
Composite Photography)” (P. 62) for more information on composite photography.
B[Composite Settings] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button when the mode
dial is rotated to B and [LIVE COMP] is selected for shutter speed. g “Lighten Blending (B: Live
Composite Photography)” (P. 62)

Choosing the Shutter Speed (Composite

342 Settings)
Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting
(K Flicker Scan)

MENU Q C Q n Q [K Flicker Scan]

Banding may occur in photographs taken under LED lighting. Use [K Flicker Scan] to optimize
shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.

C This item can be used in S, M, and silent mode and with High Res Shot and Pro Capture shooting.
C The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.

1. Choose shooting and drive modes.

Choose shooting mode S or M.

Choose one of the following drive modes:
- Silent mode (A, C, D, I, J, K)
- High Res Shot (K)
- Pro Capture (u, t)

2. Highlight [K Flicker Scan] in C Custom Menu n and press

1 D2
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Bulb/Time Timer 8min
the OK button. 2 D3 Live Composite Timer 3h
D4 Bulb/Time Monitor –7
E1
Live Bulb Off
E2
E3 Live Time 0.5sec
F Composite Settings
G KFlicker Scan Off
Back Set

3. Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the OK

D2
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Bulb/Time Timer 8min
button.
1

2 D3 Live Composite Timer 3h

D4 Bulb/Time Monitor –7
E1
Live Bulb Off
E2
E3 Live Time 0.5sec
F Composite Settings Off
G KFlicker Scan On Off
Back Set

The camera will return to the previous menu.

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (K Flicker

343 Scan)
 4. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.
The camera will exit to the shooting display. A o icon
will be displayed.

S 128.6 P

5. Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.

Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or the FG buttons. If desired, the
shutter speed can be selected by keeping FG pressed.
You can also rotate the front dial to adjust shutter speed in the exposure increments selected
for [EV Step] in C Custom Menu m.
Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is no longer visible in the display.
Press the INFO button; the display will change and the o icon will no longer be
displayed. You can adjust aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using the front or rear
dial or the arrow pad.
Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the flicker scan display.

6. Take pictures once settings have been adjusted to your satisfaction.

C Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the flicker scan
display. To view these items, first press the INFO button to exit the flicker scan display.

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (K Flicker

344 Scan)
Fine-Tuning Exposure (Exposure Shift)

MENU Q C Q o Q [Exposure Shift]

Fine-tune exposure. Use this option if you want the results of auto exposure to be consistently brighter
or darker.

BFine-tuning is not normally required. Use only as necessary. In normal circumstances, exposure can
be adjusted using exposure compensation (P. 89).
BFine-tuning exposure reduces the amount of exposure compensation available in the direction (+ or
−) exposure was fine-tuned.

Exposure fine-tuning can be applied to the following metering methods.

Metering Fine-tuning amount

A (digital ESP)

B (center-weighted averaging) −1 to +1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV

C (spot)

345 Fine-Tuning Exposure (Exposure Shift)

Shutter speeds when the flash fires (AX-Sync./
ASlow Limit)
MENU Q C Q F Q [AX-Sync.]/[ASlow Limit]
You can set shutter speed conditions for when the flash fires.

Shooting
Flash firing shutter speed Upper limit Lower limit
mode

P
The camera automatically sets [A Slow Limit]
the shutter speed. setting
A
[A X-Sync.] setting
S
The set shutter speed No lower limit
M

Shutter speeds when the flash fires (AX-Sync./

346
ASlow Limit)
Combinations of JPEG image sizes and
compression rates (X Set)

MENU Q C Q G Q [X Set]
You can set the JPEG image quality by combining image size and compression rate.

Compression rate

Image size (pixel count) Application

Super
Fine Normal
Fine

Large (5184×3888) 1 LSF 1 LF 1 LN 1

Middle (3200×2400) 1 Select for the print size

MSF MF MN 1
Middle (1920×1440)

Small (1280×960)
SSF SF SN For small prints and use on a website
Small (1024×768)

1 Default

Combinations of JPEG image sizes and

347 compression rates (X Set)
Saving lens info (Lens Info Settings)

MENU Q C Q p Q [Lens Info Settings]

The camera can store information for up to 10 lenses that do not conform to the Micro Four Thirds or
Four Thirds system standards. These data also supply the focal length used for the image stabilization
and keystone compensation features.

1. Select [Create Lens Information] for [Lens Info Settings] in C Custom Menu p.

2. Select [Lens Name] and enter a lens name. After entering a name, highlight [END] and press
the OK button.

3. Use FGHI to choose the [Focal Length].

4. Use FGHI to choose the [Aperture Value].

5. Highlight [Set] and press the OK button.

The lens will be added to the lens info menu.

When a lens that does not supply info automatically is attached, the info used is indicated by checks
(P). Highlight lenses to which you want to add checks (P) and press the OK button.

348 Saving lens info (Lens Info Settings)

Selecting the display style of the viewfinder
(EVF Style)

MENU Q C Q I Q [EVF Style]

Style 1/2: Similar to film camera viewfinder displays.
Style 3: The same as the monitor display.

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0
WB ISO-A
AUTO 200
1:02:03
1023 P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

Style 1/Style 2 Style 3

Selecting the display style of the viewfinder (EVF

349 Style)
Viewfinder display when shooting using the
viewfinder (Style 1/Style 2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
#
P C AEL
G Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+6 WB ISO-A 1:02:03 20
250 F5.6 +2.0 AUTO 200 1023
21
13 14 15 16 17 18 19

11 12 G
WB ISO-A ●REC 0:00:12 23
F5.6 +2.0 AUTO 200 1:02:03
ISO-A P
# C AEL
G Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+6 WB ISO-A 1:02:03
22 200 24
P 250 F5.6 +2.0 AUTO 200 1023

ISO-A
200
KTEST 25

1 s OVF simulation 1 Active Bluetooth® connection (P. 359) 12

g C Custom Menu I > [S-OVF] (P. 293) 13 Shooting mode (P. 43)

2 Battery level (P. 32) 14 Pro Capture active (P. 107)

3 Flash mode (blinks while flash is charging, lights 15 Preview (P. 167)
when charging is complete) (P. 147, P. 149) 16 Shutter speed (P. 48, P. 51, P. 53, P. 55)

4 AF confirmation mark (P. 43) 17 Aperture value (P. 48, P. 51, P. 53, P. 55)

5 Custom mode (P. 77, P. 79) 18 Exposure compensation value (P. 89)

6 AE lock (P. 100, P. 299) 19 Top: Flash intensity control (P. 153)

7 Live view boost Bottom: Exposure compensation (P. 89)

20 Available recording time (P. 424)
g C Custom Menu j > [Live View
21 Number of storable still pictures (P. 422)
Boost] (P. 280)
22 Level gauge 2 (P. 42)
8 Highlight & shadow control (P. 166)
23 Recording time (displayed during recording)
9 White balance (P. 129)
10 ISO sensitivity (P. 98, P. 117)
(P. 83)
24 Flicker scan (P. 240, P. 343)
11 Card write indicator (P. 23, P. 28)
25 Test shot (P. 169)

1 Shown in viewfinder only.

2 Displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. g CCustom Menu I > [q Half Way
Level] (P. 293)

Selecting the display style of the viewfinder (EVF

350 Style)
Viewfinder Info Display Options (q Info
Settings)

MENU Q C Q I Q [q Info Settings]

Just as you can with the monitor, you can display a histogram or level gauge in the viewfinder by
pressing the INFO button. Choose the information that can be viewed by pressing the INFO button in
the viewfinder display. This item is used to choose the types of display available. It takes effect when
[Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style].
The option selected for [n Display Settings] > [n Info Settings] in the n Video Menu (P. 233)
takes effect in n (movie) mode.

Basic Information The camera displays icons and the like showing camera settings.

In addition to the base display, you can opt to view or hide:

[X]: A histogram superimposed on the display in the viewfinder.
Custom1/Custom2
[Highlight&Shadow]: Tints applied to over- and under-exposed areas.
[Level Gauge]: The level gauge.

Items marked with checks (P) appear in the viewfinder display.

To choose the custom displays available in the viewfinder, highlight [Custom1] or [Custom2] and
press I on the arrow pad.

Viewfinder Info Display Options (q Info

351 Settings)
Button Hold Options (Press-and-hold Time)

MENU Q C Q r Q [Press-and-hold Time]

Choose how long buttons must be pressed to perform resets and other similar functions for various
features. For ease of use, button hold times can be set separately for different features.

Available Features
End LV 8 Reset Y
Reset LV 8 Frame Call EVF Auto Switch
End A (movie teleconverter zoom frame End q8
display) End P
Reset A Frame (movie teleconverter zoom Reset P
frame position) Switch 7 Lock (touch controls)
Reset F Call BKT Settings
Reset 7 (flash compensation) End Flicker Scan
Reset B (highlight and shadow control)
Reset R (color creator)

352 Button Hold Options (Press-and-hold Time)

Correcting Fisheye Distortion (Fisheye
Compensation)

MENU Q C Q r Q [Fisheye Compensation]

Correct distortion caused by fisheye lenses to give photos the appearance of pictures taken with a
wide-angle lens. The amount of correction can be selected from three different levels. You can also opt
simultaneously to correct distortion in photos taken under water.

This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.

C This option is only available with compatible fisheye lenses.

As of October 2022, it could be used with the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm F1.8 Fisheye PRO.

When fisheye correction is performed, the picture is cropped to eliminate

Angle
blacked-out areas. Choose from three different crops.

Choose whether to correct distortion in photos taken under water in addition

Q/P Correction
to the correction performed using [Angle].

1. Highlight [Fisheye Compensation] in C Custom Menu r

1 H1
J1. KUtility
Pixel Mapping
and press the OK button. 2 H2 Press-and-hold Time
I Level Adjust
J1
Touchscreen Settings On
J2
Menu Recall Recall
Fisheye Compensation Off

Back Set

2. Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the I

H1
J1. KUtility
Pixel Mapping
button.
1

2 H2 Press-and-hold Time
I Level Adjust
J1
Touchscreen Settings On
J2
Menu Recall Recall
Fisheye Compensation Off Off
On
Back Set

[Angle] and [Q/P Correction] will be displayed.

Correcting Fisheye Distortion (Fisheye

353 Compensation)
 3. Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press the I Fisheye Compensation
Angle 1
button. j/i Correction Off

Back Set

4. Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

C If you are not taking photos under water, choose [Off] for [Q/P Correction].

5. Press the OK button.

[Fisheye Compensation] options will be displayed.

6. Press the OK button repeatedly to exit to C Custom Menu r.

After confirming that [On] is selected for [Fisheye Compensation], press the MENU button
to exit the menus.
When fisheye compensation is enabled, a r icon will be 1

S-IS AUTO
displayed together with the selected crop.
ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

7. Take pictures.

C Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format. Fisheye
compensation is not applied to the RAW image.
C Focus peaking is not available in the fisheye compensation display.
C AF-target selection is restricted to single- and small-target modes.
C The following cannot be used:
- live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure, the live
ND filter, keystone compensation, the digital teleconverter, movie recording, [C‑AF], [C‑AFJ],
[C‑AF+TR], and [C‑AF+TRJ] AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art filter picture modes, the custom
self-timer, and High Res Shot.

Correcting Fisheye Distortion (Fisheye

354 Compensation)
Connecting the Camera to External
Devices
Connecting to External Devices
A number of tasks can be accomplished by connecting the camera to an external device such
as a computer or smartphone. g “Connecting to Smartphones” (P. 358), “Copying pictures to
a computer” (P. 371), “Connection” (P. 377), “Connecting the Camera to TVs or External Displays
(HDMI)” (P. 384)

355 Connecting to External Devices

Precautions for Using Wi‑Fi and Bluetooth®
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in countries, regions, or locations in which their use is
prohibited.

The camera is equipped with wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features in countries outside
the region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations.

Some countries and regions may prohibit the acquisition of location data without prior governmental
permission. In some sales areas, the camera may consequently ship with location data displays
disabled.

Each country and region has its own laws and regulations. Check them before traveling and observe
them while abroad. Our company assumes no liability for any failure on the part of the user to observe
local laws and regulations.

Disable Wi‑Fi on airplanes and in other locations where their use is prohibited. g “Disabling the
Camera’s Wireless Functions” (P. 357)

C Wireless transmissions are vulnerable to interception by third parties. Use wireless features with this
in mind.
C The wireless transceiver is located in the camera grip. Keep it as far away as practicable from metal
objects.
C When transporting the camera in a bag or other container, be aware that the contents of the
container or the materials of which it is constructed may interfere with wireless transmissions, which
can prevent the camera connecting to a smartphone.
C Wi‑Fi connections increase the drain on the batteries. The connection may be lost during use if the
batteries are low.
C Devices such as microwave ovens and cordless phones that generate radio-frequency emissions,
magnetic fields, or static electricity may slow or otherwise interfere with wireless data transmission.
C Some wireless LAN features are unavailable when the memory card write-protect switch is in the
“LOCK” position.

356 Precautions for Using Wi‑Fi and Bluetooth®

Disabling the Camera’s Wireless Functions
Disable the camera’s wireless (Wi-Fi/ Bluetooth®) functions.

1. Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e Setup Menu and press I.

2. Select [Wireless Functions] and press I.

3. Select [Off] and press the OK button.

C The following functions will be disabled.

- [Device Connection] (P. 359), [Power-off Standby] (P. 362), and [Bluetooth] (P. 361)

BTo disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® only while the camera is off, select [Off] for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings] > [Power-off Standby] in the e Setup Menu. g “Wireless Settings for When the
Camera Is Off” (P. 362)
BTo disable wireless connection standby and terminate wireless transmissions when the camera
is turned on, select [Off] for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Bluetooth] in the e Setup Menu.
g “Wireless Connection Standby Setting for When the Camera Is On” (P. 361)

357 Disabling the Camera’s Wireless Functions

Connecting the Camera to a
Smartphone
Connecting to Smartphones
Use the camera’s wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and Bluetooth® features to connect to a smartphone, where
you can use the dedicated app to enhancement your enjoyment of the camera both before and after
shooting. Once a connection has been established, you can download and take pictures remotely and
add position information to images.
Operation is not guaranteed on all smartphones.

Things you can do with the specified app, OM Image Share

Download images from the camera to the smartphone
Download pictures marked for sharing (P. 190) to your smartphone.
You can also use the smartphone to select images for download from the camera.
Remote shooting from a smartphone
You can remotely operate the camera and shoot using a smartphone.
Beautiful image processing
Use intuitive controls to apply impressive effects to images downloaded to your smartphone.
Addition of GPS tags to camera images
Using the smartphone’s GPS function, you can add position information when taking pictures with
the camera.

For details, visit our website.

358 Connecting to Smartphones

Pairing the Camera and Smartphone
Follow the steps below when connecting the devices for the first time.
Adjust pairing settings using the OM Image Share app, not the settings app that is part of the
smartphone operating system.

1. Launch the copy of the dedicated OM Image Share app previously installed on your
smartphone.

2. Select [Device Connection] in the q Playback Menu and press I.

You can also connect by tapping e in the monitor.

3. Follow the on-screen guide to adjust Wi-Fi/Bluetooth settings.

The Bluetooth local name and passcode, the Wi-Fi SSID and password, and a QR code are
displayed in the monitor.

qw Connection Setup 3/3 1 Bluetooth local name

Scan the QR code, using
the OI.Share app.
Bluetooth Passcode
3 2 Wi-Fi SSID

Bluetooth Name : xxxxxxxxxxx Wi-Fi Password

1 Bluetooth Passcode : 000000

2 Wi-Fi SSID : xxx-x-x-xxxxxxxx 3 QR code

Wi-Fi Password : 0000000000000000

Disconnect

4. Tap the camera icon at the bottom of the OM Image Share display.
An [Easy Setup] tab will be displayed.

5. Follow the on-screen instructions in OM Image Share to scan the QR code and adjust
connection settings.
If you are unable to scan the QR code, follow the on-screen instructions in OM Image Share
to adjust settings manually.
- Bluetooth: To connect, select the local name and enter the passcode displayed in the
camera monitor into the Bluetooth settings dialog OM Image Share.
- Wi-Fi: To connect, enter the SSID and password displayed on the camera monitor into the
Wi-Fi settings dialog OM Image Share.
G1 will be displayed when pairing is complete.
The Bluetooth® icon indicates the status as follows:
- p: The camera is emitting wireless signal.
- q: Wireless connection has been established.

359 Pairing the Camera and Smartphone

6. To end the Wi-Fi connection, press MENU on the camera or tap [Disconnect] on the monitor
screen.
You can also turn the camera off and end the connection OM Image Share.
At default settings, Bluetooth® is kept active even after Wi-Fi connection is terminated,
allowing you to shoot remotely with a smartphone. To set the camera to also terminate
Bluetooth® connection when terminating Wi-Fi connection, set [Bluetooth] to [Off].

360 Pairing the Camera and Smartphone

Wireless Connection Standby Setting for
When the Camera Is On
You can choose whether the camera will be on standby for wireless connection with a smartphone or
optional remote control when the power is on.

1. Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e Setup Menu and press I.

2. Highlight [Bluetooth] and press I.

C Pair the camera with the smartphone or optional remote control before proceeding.
[Bluetooth] cannot be selected unless the pairing has been completed.

3. Highlight the desired option and press the OK button.

The camera will not be on standby for wireless connection and wireless signal will
Off not be emitted even when the power is on. For connection with a smartphone, start
[Device Connection] (P. 359) in the q Playback Menu of the camera.

When the camera is on, it will emit wireless signal and be on standby for wireless
connection.
Onq
You can connect the camera and the smartphone through operation of OM Image
Share and shoot remotely or transfer images.

When the camera is turned on, it will start transmitting wireless signals and (if the
Onr devices have already been paired; P. 377) stand by for connection from a remote
control.

Because the options in the [Bluetooth] menu also serve to indicate Bluetooth® status,
[Stopped] or [Running] will appear alongside the [Off], [Onq], and [Onr] options.

BIf the GPS track log is enabled in the dedicated OM Image Share app, location data
downloaded from the app will be added to pictures taken while [Onq] is selected.

Wireless Connection Standby Setting for When

361 the Camera Is On
Wireless Settings for When the Camera Is Off
You can choose whether the camera will maintain a wireless connection to the smartphone when off.

1. Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e Setup Menu and press I.

2. Highlight [Power-off Standby] and press I.

3. Highlight the desired option and press the OK button.

When you turn the camera off, you will be prompted to choose whether to maintain
Select
the wireless connection to the smartphone.

Off Turning the camera off terminates the wireless connection to the smartphone.

When the camera is turned off, the connection to the smartphone remains active
On and the smartphone can still be used to download or view the pictures on the
camera.

362 Wireless Settings for When the Camera Is Off

Select
When [Select] is chosen for [Power-off Standby], a confirmation Power-off Standby
Activate Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Power-off
dialog will be displayed before the camera turns off if all the Standby so images can be imported
while power is off?
following conditions are met:
[On] is selected for [Wireless Functions], Yes

the camera and smartphone are paired (P. 359), and No

the memory card is correctly inserted. Set

Yes Turn the camera off but leave the wireless smartphone connection active.

No Turn the camera off and terminate the wireless smartphone connection.

C If no operations are performed about a minute after the confirmation dialog is displayed, the
camera will end the wireless connection to the smartphone and turn off automatically.
C If left active, the wireless connection will automatically terminate if:
- the connection remains inactive for 12 hours,
- the memory card is removed,
- the battery is replaced, or
- a charging error occurs during on-board battery charging.
The connection can be restored by turning the camera on.
BNote that if [On] is selected for [Power-off Standby], camera may not turn on immediately when
the ON/OFF lever is rotated to ON.

363 Wireless Settings for When the Camera Is Off

Transferring images to a smartphone
You can select images in the camera and load them to a smartphone. You can also use the camera to
select images you want to share in advance. g “Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 190)
If [Off] or [Onr] is selected for [Bluetooth] (P. 361), select [Onq].
Selecting [Onq] for [Bluetooth] (P. 361) puts the camera on standby, ready for a wireless
connection.

1. Tap [Import Photos] in OM Image Share on the smartphone.

C Depending on the smartphone, a confirmation screen for Wi-Fi connection may appear.
Follow the on-screen guidance to connect the smartphone and the camera.
The images in the camera are displayed in a list.

2. Select the pictures you want to transfer and tap the Save button.
When saving is completed, you can turn off the camera from the smartphone.
[Import Photos] can be used to download pictures to smartphones connected via the
[Device Connection] option in the camera menus even when [Off] or [Onr] is selected
for [Bluetooth] (P. 361).

364 Transferring images to a smartphone

Automatically uploading images while the
camera is off
To configure the camera to automatically upload images to a smartphone while off:
mark pictures for sharing (P. 190),
enable power-off standby (P. 362), and,
if you are using an iOS device, launch the OM Image Share app in advance.

When you mark an image for sharing on the camera and turn the camera off, a notification appears
in OM Image Share. When you tap the notification, images are automatically transferred to the
smartphone.

Automatically uploading images while the

365 camera is off
Shooting remotely with a smartphone (Live
View)
You can shoot remotely by operating the camera with a smartphone while checking the live view on
the smartphone screen.
The camera shows the connection screen and all operations are performed from the smartphone.
If [Off] or [Onr] is selected for [Bluetooth] (P. 361), select [Onq].
Selecting [Onq] for [Bluetooth] (P. 361) puts the camera on standby, ready for a wireless
connection.

1. Launch OM Image Share and tap [Remote Control].

2. Tap [Live View].

3. Tap the shutter button to shoot.

The image taken is saved on the memory card in the camera.

[Live View] can be used to take pictures from smartphones connected via the [Device
Connection] (P. 359) option in the camera menus even when [Off] or [Onr] is selected for
[Bluetooth] (P. 361).
Available shooting options are partially limited.

366 Shooting remotely with a smartphone (Live View)

Shooting remotely with a smartphone
(Remote Shutter)
You can shoot remotely by operating the camera with a smartphone (Remote Shutter).
All operations are available on the camera. In addition, you can shoot pictures and record movies
using the shutter button displayed on the smartphone screen.
If [Off] or [Onr] is selected for [Bluetooth] (P. 361), select [Onq].
Selecting [Onq] for [Bluetooth] (P. 361) puts the camera on standby, ready for a wireless
connection.

1. Launch OM Image Share and tap [Remote Control].

2. Tap [Remote Shutter].

3. Tap the shutter button to shoot.

The image taken is saved on the memory card in the camera.

[Remote Shutter] can be used to take pictures from smartphones connected via the [Device
Connection] (P. 359) option in the camera menus even when [Off] or [Onr] is selected for
[Bluetooth] (P. 361).

Shooting remotely with a smartphone (Remote

367 Shutter)
Adding position information to images
Using the smartphone’s GPS function, you can add position information when taking pictures with the
camera.
If [Off] or [Onr] is selected for [Bluetooth] (P. 361), select [Onq].
Selecting [Onq] for [Bluetooth] (P. 361) puts the camera on standby, ready for a wireless
connection.

1. Before taking pictures with the camera, launch OM Image Share and switch on the position
information addition function.
When you are prompted to synchronize the clocks of the smartphone and the camera, follow
the guides displayed in OM Image Share.

2. Take pictures with the camera.

When it is possible to add position information, 3 will be lit on the shooting screen. When
the camera cannot acquire position information, 3 blinks.
It may take some time before the camera is ready to add position information when it has
been turned on or it has resumed from sleep mode.
Position information will be added to pictures taken while 3 is displayed on the screen.
3 is displayed on the screen when you view a picture that has position information.
Position information is not added to movies.

3. When you have finished shooting, switch off the position information addition function in OM
Image Share.

368 Adding position information to images

Resetting wireless LAN/Bluetooth® settings
To restore [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] to default values:

1. Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e Setup Menu and press I.

2. Highlight [Reset Settings] and press I.

3. Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

BThe following settings will be reset:

- [Wireless Functions] (P. 357), [Bluetooth] (P. 361), [Connection Password] (P. 370), and
[Power-off Standby] (P. 362)
BResetting wireless settings ends pairing between the camera and smartphones. Before
connecting to a smartphone, you will need to pair the devices again (P. 359). Resetting
wireless settings also ends pairing between the camera and remote controls. Before
connecting to a remote control, you will need to pair the devices again (P. 377).

369 Resetting wireless LAN/Bluetooth® settings

Changing the password
To change the password for smartphone connections:

1. Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e Setup Menu and press I.

2. Highlight [Connection Password] and press I.

3. Press the R button as directed by the on-screen guide.

A new password will be set.

You can change both password for smartphone connections and Bluetooth® connection passcode.
Reconnect to the smartphone after changing passwords. g “Pairing the Camera and
Smartphone” (P. 359)

370 Changing the password

Connecting the Camera to a Computer
Copying pictures to a computer

1. Turn the camera off and connect it to the computer.

1 USB port
2 2 USB cable (supplied)
3 Micro-USB connector
1

C The location of the USB port varies with the computer. For more information, refer to the
documentation provided with your computer.

2. Turn the camera on.

The selection screen for the USB connection is displayed.

C If USB connection options are not displayed, choose [Select] for [USB Mode] (P. 339) in the
camera Custom Menus.
C If the camera display remains blank after the computer is connected, the battery may be
exhausted. Use a fully-charged battery.

371 Copying pictures to a computer

 3. Highlight [Storage] or [MTP] using the FG buttons. Press USB

the OK button. Storage

MTP
[Storage]: The camera functions as a card reader. Webcam

[MTP]: The camera functions as a portable device.

Exit

Set

4. The camera will connect to the computer as a new storage device.

C Data transfer is not guaranteed in the following environments, even if your computer is equipped
with a USB port.
- Computers with a USB port added by means of an extension card, etc., computers without a
factory-installed OS, or home-built computers
C Camera controls cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer.
C If the computer fails to detect the camera, disconnect and reconnect the USB cable.
C Files over 4 GB in size cannot be copied to the computer when [MTP] is selected.

372 Copying pictures to a computer

Installing the PC software
Install the following software to access the camera while it is connected directly to the computer via
USB.

OM Workspace
This computer application is used to download and view photos and movies recorded with the camera.
It can also be used to update the camera firmware. The software can be downloaded from our website.
Be prepared to provide the camera serial number when downloading the software.

373 Installing the PC software

Using the Camera as a Webcam (Webcam)
The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a webcam for online meetings or live
streaming. Video and audio are transmitted directly from the camera via a simple USB connection,
obviating the need for special software or drivers (USB streaming).

1. After confirming that the camera is off, rotate the mode dial to n.

2. Connect the camera to the computer.

1 USB port
2 2 USB cable (supplied)
3 Micro-USB connector
1

C The location of the USB port varies with the computer. For more information, refer to the
documentation provided with your computer.

3. Turn the camera on.

C If USB connection options are not displayed, choose [Select] for [USB Mode] (P. 339) in the
camera Custom Menus.
C If the camera display remains blank after the computer is connected, the battery may be
exhausted. Use a fully-charged battery.

4. Highlight [Webcam] using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

The camera is now ready to start filming.
A 5 icon will appear in the display.
Adjust focus and exposure using camera controls.

5. Launch a web meeting or streaming app on the computer. Select the camera name in the app’s
device settings.
The camera will start transmitting audio and video.
Video is transmitted at a frame size of 1280 × 720 ([HD]).
The frame rate for video transmitted with [60p], [30p], or [24p] selected for [nX] >
[Frame Rate] is [30p], while the rate for video transmitted with [50p] or [25p] selected is
[25p].

374 Using the Camera as a Webcam (Webcam)

BThe camera can be used as a webcam even when no memory card is inserted.
BIf an external microphone is connected, it will be used as the audio source.
C Video and audio will not be transmitted to the computer if:
- the mode dial is rotated to a position other than n, playback is in progress, or menus are
displayed.
Using any of the above functions may temporarily disrupt audio and video in some web meeting or
streaming apps.
C While the camera is supplying audio and video to the computer, you will not be able to:
- take photographs or record movies,
- change the options selected for [nX], or
- enable [n Specification Settings] > [n Picture Mode] in the n Video Menu (P. 233)
(selecting [On] will have no effect).
C Exposure and other camera settings cannot be adjusted from the computer.

375 Using the Camera as a Webcam (Webcam)

Using the Remote Control
Names of parts
1 2

5 8

1 Shutter button
2 Data transfer indicator
3 Shutter button lock
4 Mode dial (4 / K / n / CONNECT)
5 Cable connector
6 Battery-compartment lid
7 Battery compartment cover
8 Strap eyelet

376 Names of parts

Connection

Wired connection

Rotate the mode dial of the remote control to 4 and connect the remote control to the camera
via the supplied cable.
Photographs can be taken by pressing the shutter button.
Before recording movies, select [R REC] for [n Shutter Function]. g n Video Menu >
[n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Shutter Function] (P. 233)

C Wireless remote control is not available while the cable is connected.

BTo enable the shutter button for bulb photography or the like, 2
slide the shutter button lock up.
1

Wireless connection
For wireless connection, you must pair the camera and the remote control first.

1. Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e Setup Menu and press I.

2. Highlight [Wireless Shutter Setting] and press I.

3. Highlight [Start Pairing] and press the OK button.

377 Connection
4. When a message is displaying r Wireless Shutter Setting

stating that pairing is in Pairing in progress.

progress, rotate the mode Please perform pairing operation
on the wireless shutter release.
dial on the remote control to
CONNECT and keep it in this
position. Cancel

Pairing starts when it is kept 3 seconds. Keep it in the CONNECT position until pairing is
complete. If you rotate the mode dial before it is complete, the data transfer indicator flashes
rapidly.
The data transfer indicator lights when pairing starts.

5. When a message indicating pairing is complete is displayed, r Wireless Shutter Setting

press the OK button. Pairing is complete.

Bluetooth setting is changed to Onr.

AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF

Close

The data transfer indicator goes out when pairing is complete.

[Bluetooth] (P. 361) will automatically be set to [Onr] when pairing is complete.

C If you rotate the mode dial of the remote control or press the MENU button of the camera
before the pairing completion message is displayed, the pairing process ends. Paired device
information will be reset. Perform pairing again.
C If you rotate the mode dial of a remote control that is not currently paired to CONNECT and
keep it 3 seconds, or when pairing fails, the pairing information from previous connections
will be reset. Perform pairing again.

378 Connection
Deleting pairing

1. Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e Setup Menu and press I.

2. Highlight [Wireless Shutter Setting] and press I.

3. Select [Delete Pairing] and press the OK button.

4. Select [Yes] and press the OK button.

C When you have paired the camera with a remote control, you have to perform [Delete Pairing] to
reset pairing information before you pair the camera with a new remote control.

379 Connection
Shooting from the remote control
Before establishing a wireless connection between the camera and remote control, confirm that
[Onr] is selected for [Bluetooth] (P. 361). When set to [Onr], r appears in the display and
the camera will be on standby for wireless communication with the remote control as soon as it is
turned on.

1. Rotate the mode dial of the remote control to K or n.

2. Press the shutter button on the remote control to take pictures.

When the mode dial of the remote control is set to K (still photography mode): When you
lightly press the shutter button of the remote control down to the first position (press the
shutter button halfway), the AF confirmation mark (N) will be displayed, and a green frame
(AF target) will be displayed in the focus location.
When the mode dial of the remote control is set to n (movie recording mode): When you
press the shutter button of the remote control, movie recording starts. Press the shutter
button of the remote control again to stop movie recording.

380 Shooting from the remote control

Data transfer indicator of the remote control
Lights once Remote control operation is sent to the camera correctly.

Remote control operation is not sent to the camera correctly. Shorten the
Flashes rapidly
distance between the camera and the remote control. If the problem is not
(1 second)
solved, check the setting of the camera.

Flashes rapidly There is a problem regarding the pairing of the camera and remote control.
(3 seconds) Pair the devices again.

This may occur in the following situations.

The battery in the remote control is dead.
Does not light
The mode dial of the remote control is in the 3/OFF position.
The camera and remote control are connected with a cable.

C You can connect to smartphones via [Device Connection] (P. 359) even when [Onr] is selected
for [Bluetooth] (P. 361). However, you cannot control the camera from the remote control when it is
connected to a smartphone.
C Pairing and remote photography are not available when [Off] is selected for [Wireless
Function] (P. 357).
C The camera does not enter sleep mode when a remote control is connected wirelessly.
C The camera will, however, enter sleep mode in accordance with the option selected for [Sleep] if
the mode dial on the remote control is in the 4 position. g C Custom Menu s > [Sleep]
(P. 296)
C The camera will not enter sleep mode when [Onr] is selected for [Bluetooth] (P. 361) unless the
mode dial on the remote control is in the 4 position.
C If you operate the remote control while the camera is in sleep mode, it may take a longer time for
the camera to resume operation.
C The camera cannot be controlled from the remote control while it is waking from sleep. Operate the
remote control after the camera has resumed operation.
C Rotate the mode dial of the remote control to the 4 position when you have finished using the
remote control.

381 Shooting from the remote control

MAC address of the remote control
The MAC address of the remote control is printed on the warranty card provided with the remote
control.

382 MAC address of the remote control

Precautions for using the remote control
Do not tug on the battery compartment cover or use it to turn the battery-compartment lid.
Do not pierce batteries with sharp objects.
Do not drop or swing the remote control while holding the cable.
Moisture on the cable or remote control connectors could interfere with wireless control and render
wired connections unreliable.
Confirm that the battery-compartment lid is free of foreign matter before closing it.
Rotate the mode dial to 4 before connecting or disconnecting cables.

383 Precautions for using the remote control

Connecting to TVs or External
Displays via HDMI
Connecting the Camera to TVs or External
Displays (HDMI)
Pictures can be displayed on televisions connected to the camera via HDMI. Use the television to
display pictures to an audience. The TV remote can be used to control the display while the television
is connected to the camera. No app or other software is required.

You can also film movies while the camera is connected to an external monitor or video recorder via
HDMI.

C HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers. Use an HDMI-certified cable.

Connecting the Camera to TVs or External

384 Displays (HDMI)
Viewing Pictures on a TV (HDMI)
Photos and movies can be viewed on a high-definition TV connected directly to the camera by means
of an HDMI cable. A remote control can be used to operate the display while it is connected to the
camera.

HDMI Output
Choose the signal output to the HDMI device. You can adjust movie frame size and frame rate to
match TV specifications and the video standards supported in your country or region. Match output
settings to the input settings on the TV.

The format for the video signal output via the HDMI connector can be chosen from
the options below.
[C4K]: 4K Digital Cinema (4096 × 2160)
Output Size [4K]: 4K (3840 × 2160) priority
[1080p]: Full High Definition (1080p) priority
[720p]: High Definition (720p) priority
[480p/576p]: 480p/576p

The television remote control can be used to operate the camera in playback mode
HDMI
(P. 388). Choose from [Off] and [On]. When [On] is selected, the camera can be
Control
used for playback only.

Output Choose a frame rate for the signal output via the HDMI connector according to
Frame Rate whether the television supports NTSC (60p) or PAL (50p).

[HDMI Control] and [Output Frame Rate] settings cannot be changed while the camera is
connected to another device via HDMI.
Audio can be output only on devices that support the audio format selected with the camera.
The options available via [HDMI Control] vary with the device connected. See the device manual
for details.

1. Press the MENU button to view the menus.

385 Viewing Pictures on a TV (HDMI)

2. Display C Custom Menu l (Disp/o/PC).
1 D2 8
D4. Disp/8/PC
On
2 D3 HDMI
D4 USB Mode Select
E1
E2
E3
F
G

Back Set

3. Highlight [HDMI] using the FG buttons and press the I

D2 8
D4. Disp/8/PC
On
button.
1

2 D3 HDMI
D4 USB Mode Select
E1
E2
E3
F
G

Back Set

4. Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press the I

Output Size
HDMI
4K
button. HDMI Control Off
Output Frame Rate 60p Priority

Back Set

5. Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons and press

Output Size
HDMI
C4K 4K
the OK button. HDMI Control 4K Off
Output Frame Rate 60p Priority
1080p
720p
480p/576p

Back Set

Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as required.

6. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

386 Viewing Pictures on a TV (HDMI)

Connecting the Camera to a TV
Connect the camera using an HDMI cable.

1. After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the TV using an HDMI cable.

1 Type A HDMI connector

2 HDMI cable
1 3 Type D HDMI connector
4
4 Camera HDMI connector

2. Switch the TV to HDMI input and turn the camera on.

The TV will show the contents of the camera monitor. Press the q button to view pictures.

If [On] is selected for [HDMI Control] (P. 388), the camera monitor will turn off when an HDMI
cable is connected.
For information on switching to HDMI input, see the manual provided with the TV.
Depending on TV settings, the image may be cropped and some indicators may not be visible.
HDMI cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
If [Record Mode] is selected for [n HDMI Output] > [Output Mode] in the n Video
Menu (P. 233), the signal will be output at the current movie frame size. No image will be displayed
if the TV does not support the selected frame size. [4K] and [C4K] cannot be selected for [nX].
The output format used when [4K] or [C4K] is selected in photo mode is 1080p priority.

387 Viewing Pictures on a TV (HDMI)

Using a TV Remote (HDMI Control)
When connected to a TV via an HDMI cable, the camera can be operated using the television remote
control.
The television must support HDMI control. See the television manual for more information.

The television remote control can be used to operate the camera in playback mode. The
On
camera can be used for playback only.

The television remote control cannot be used to operate the camera. Indicators appear only
Off
in the TV display.

1. Press the MENU button to view the menus.

2. Highlight [HDMI] in C Custom Menu l and press the I

1 D2 8
D4. Disp/8/PC
On
button. 2 D3 HDMI
D4 USB Mode Select
E1
E2
E3
F
G

Back Set

3. Highlight [HDMI Control] using the FG buttons and press

Output Size
HDMI
4K
the I button. HDMI Control Off
Output Frame Rate 60p Priority

Back Set

4. Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the OK

Output Size
HDMI
4K
button. HDMI Control Off Off
Output Frame Rate OnPriority
60p

Back Set

5. Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

388 Using a TV Remote (HDMI Control)

 6. Connect the camera and TV via HDMI.
Play pictures back using the TV remote. Follow the guide displayed on the TV screen.
In single-frame playback, use the “red” button on the remote control to choose the
information displayed and the “green” button to switch to the index display.

C Some functions may be unavailable on some televisions.

C The camera monitor turns off while the TV is used for playback.

389 Using a TV Remote (HDMI Control)

Default Settings
Default Settings
Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel (P. 391)
K Shooting Menus (P. 396)
n Video Menu (P. 400)
q Playback Menu (P. 404)
e Setup Menu (P. 405)
C Custom Menus (P. 406)

390 Default Settings

Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

Shooting Mode: P, A, S, M, B
Item Default *1 *2 *3

ISO Auto P P P

Flash Mode A P P P

7 ±0 P P P

Manual Value A FULL (flash set to [AMANUAL]) P P P

K Image Stabilizer S-IS AUTO P P P

n Image Stabilizer M-IS1 P P P

Auto ([On] selected for [N Keep

WB P P P
Warm Color])

WB compensation A ±0 P P ―

WB compensation G ±0 P P ―

Kelvin 5400K ([CWB] selected for [WB]) P P ―

AF Area Center; single P P P

AF Mode S-AF P P P

I Face Priority Face Priority Off P P ―

g/Y F P P P

Metering A P P P

KX LF (High Res Shot: IF+RAW) P P P

391 Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel

 Item Default *1 *2 *3

nX 1 P P P

Picture Mode Natural P P P

Sharpness ±0 P P ―

Contrast ±0 P P ―

Saturation ±0 P P ―

Gradation Gradation Normal P P ―

― ([i-Enhance] selected for

Effect P P ―
[Picture Mode]: E Standard)

― ([Monochrome] selected for

Color Filter P P P
[Picture Mode]: N:None)

― ([Monochrome] selected for

Monochrome Color P P P
[Picture Mode]: N:None)

Aspect 4:3 P P P

Color Space sRGB P P P

Highlight&Shadow Control f (±0) P P P

Movie c On P P P

392 Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel

Shooting Mode: n (Movie)
Item Default *1 *2 *3

[P], [A], or [S] selected for

[n Mode] (movie exposure mode):
ISO Auto (fixed) ― P P
[M] selected for [n Mode] (movie
exposure mode): 200

Flash Mode Flash Off (fixed) ― ― ―

7 ±0 (fixed) ― ― ―

K Image Stabilizer S-IS Auto P P P

n Image Stabilizer M-IS1 P P P

Auto ([On] selected for [N Keep

WB ― P P
Warm Color])

WB compensation A ±0 ― P ―

WB compensation G ±0 ― P ―

Kelvin 5400K ([CWB] selected for [WB]) ― P ―

AF Area Center; 9-target group P P P

AF Mode C‑AF P P P

I Face Priority Face Priority Off P P ―

g/Y F (fixed) ― ― ―

Metering A (fixed) ― ― ―

KX LF P P P

nX 1 P P P

Picture Mode Natural P P P

393 Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel

 Item Default *1 *2 *3

Sharpness ±0 P P ―

Contrast ±0 P P ―

Saturation ±0 P P ―

Gradation Gradation Normal P P ―

16:9 (fixed)
Aspect ― ― ―
C4K selected for [nX]: 17:9

Color Space sRGB (fixed) ― ― ―

Highlight&Shadow Control f (±0) P P P

n Mode P ― P ―

Movie c On P P P

394 Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel

Shooting Mode: RC
Item Default *1 *2 *3

5A group A TTL P P P

5B group B Off P P P

5C group C Off P P P

8 Camera Flash Off P P P

Flash compensation ±0 (TTL, Auto) P P P

Flash level 1/1 (Manual) P P P

A/FP A (Normal) P P P

f optical signal strength Low P P P

Channel 1 P P P

395 Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel

K Shooting Menus
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

Function Default *1 *2 *3

Reset Basic ― P ―

Shooting mode: P
Reset / Assign to Custom Mode ― P ―
Image quality: LF+RAW
Custom
Modes
Custom Mode Save Settings Reset ― P ―

Recall from Custom Mode ― ― P ―

Picture Mode 3 Natural P P P

KX LF (High Res Shot: IF+RAW) P P P

Image Aspect 4:3 P P P

Digital Tele-converter Off P P P

g/Y F P P P

396 K Shooting Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off ― P P

Number of Frames 99 ― P P

Start Waiting Time 00:00:01 ― P P

Interval Length 00:00:01 ― P P

Interval Mode Time Priority ― P P

Exposure Smoothing On ― P P

Time Lapse Movie Off ― P P

Movie
FullHD ― P P
Movie Resolution
Settings
Frame Rate 10fps ― P P

High Res Shot K 0 sec P P ―

High Res
A Charge Time 0 sec P P ―
Shot

Shooting Method Handheld P P ―

Live ND Shooting Off P P P

ND Number ND8(3EV) P P ―

LV Simulation On P P ―

397 K Shooting Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

Bracketing Off P P P

AE BKT 3f 1.0 EV P P P

A–B P P P
WB BKT Off
G–M P P P

FL BKT Off P P P

ISO BKT Off P P P

ART BKT Off P P P

Focus BKT Off P P P

Focus
Off P P P
Stacking

[Off] selected for [Focus Stacking]:

Set number
99 P P P
of shots
[On] selected for [Focus Stacking]: 8

Set focus
5 P P P
differential

A Charge
0 sec P P ―
Time

HDR Off P P P

Number of Frames Off ― P P

Multiple
Auto Gain Off ― P P
Exposure

Overlay Off ― P P

Keystone Comp. Off P P P

398 K Shooting Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

Anti-Shock H H 0 sec P P ―

Silent I I 0 sec P P ―

Noise Reduction I Off P P ―

Anti-Shock
Silent I Mode Settings ― P P ―
H/Silent
I
o Not Allow P P ―

AF
Not Allow P P ―
Illuminator

Flash Mode Not Allow P P ―

399 K Shooting Menus

n Video Menu
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

Function Default *1 *2 *3

n Mode P ― P ―
n Mode
Settings
n Flicker Scan Off ― P P

nX MOV n 4K 30p P P P

Upper
Upper Limit: 6400
Limit / P P P
Default: 200
Default
bISO-
Auto Set
b
ISO- On ― P ―
Auto
n Specification
Settings n Noise Filter Standard P P P

n WB Auto ― P P

n All d A±0, G±0 ― P ―

nN Keep Warm
On ― P P
Color

n Picture Mode Off P P ―

n AF Mode C‑AF P P P

n C‑AF Speed ±0 P P P
n AF/IS
Settings
n C‑AF Sensitivity ±0 P P P

n Image Stabilizer M-IS1 P P P

400 n Video Menu

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

gY Off ― P ―

U U View Selection ― P ―

F Exposure F ― P ―

R R REC ― P ―

V AEL/AFL ― P ―

n Button/Dial/ n Button
P ISO ― P ―
Lever Function

d Y ― P ―

M Y (Electronic Zoom) ― P ―

K Y (WB) ― P ―

W Magnify ― P ―

j AF Stop ― P ―

401 n Video Menu

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

P:
z: F
Position ― P ―
y: F
1

P:
z: c VOL
Position ― P ―
y: c VOL
2

A:
z: F
Position ― P ―
y: FNo.
1

A:
z: c VOL
Position ― P ―
y: c VOL
2
n Dial
Function
S:
z: F
Position ― P ―
y: Shutter
1
n Button/Dial/
Lever S:
z: c VOL
Position ― P ―
y: c VOL
2

M:
z: FNo.
Position ― P ―
y: Shutter
1

M:
z: c VOL
Position ― P ―
y: ISO
2

n Fn Lever Function mode2 ― P ―

AF Mode/AF Target Mode/AF Target

mode2 ― P ―
Point

n Shutter Function 1 ― P ―

n Elec. Zoom Speed Normal ― P ―

402 n Video Menu

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

n Control Settings Live Control, Live SCP ― P ―

n Info Settings Custom 1 ― P ―

Red Frame during

On ― P ―
RREC

Time
n Display Code Drop Frame ― P ―
Settings Mode

Time Code
Count
Settings Rec Run ― P ―
Up

Starting
0:00:00 ― P ―
Time

a View Assist Off ― P ―

Movie c On P P P

Built-in
±0 ― P ―
Recording c
Volume
MIC c ±0 ― P ―

c Volume Limiter On ― P ―

Wind Noise Reduction Off ― P ―

Recording Rate 48kHz/16bit P P ―

c Plug-in Power Off ― P ―

Output Mode Monitor Mode ― P ―

n HDMI Output REC Bit Off P P ―

Time Code On P P ―

403 n Video Menu

q Playback Menu
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

Function Default *1 *2 *3

n On P P P

RAW Data
― ― ― ―
Edit

JPEG Edit ― ― ― ―
Sel. Image
Edit
Movie Edit ― ― ― ―

c ― ― ― ―

Image Overlay ― ― ― ―

Print Order ― ― ― ―

Reset Protect ― ― ― ―

Reset share Order ― ― ― ―

Device Connection ― ― ― ―

404 q Playback Menu

e Setup Menu
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

Function Default *1 *2 *3

Card Setup ― ― ― ―

m ― ― ― ―
m Settings
Time Zone ― ― ― ―

W English ― ― ―

b o ±0, p ±0, Natural P P ―

Image Review Off P P ―

Wireless Functions On ― P ―

Bluetooth Off ― P ―

Wireless Shutter
― ― ― ―
Setting

Wi‑Fi/Bluetooth
Power-off Standby Off ― P ―
Settings

RAW+JPEG 9 JPEG ― P ―

Connection
― ― ― ―
Password

Reset Settings ― ― ― ―

Firmware Version ― ― ― ―

405 e Setup Menu

C Custom Menus
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

a AF/MF
Function Default *1 *2 *3

K AF Mode S-AF P P P

K AF+ MF Off P P P

S-AF mode3 P P P

C‑AF mode4 P P P

MF mode3 P P P
K AEL/AFL mode3
RAF P P P

Half Way AF Operative P P P

1: On
Face Priority AF P P P
V: On

AF Scanner mode2 P P P

K C‑AF Sensitivity ±0 P P P

K C‑AF Center Start q (All Targets) P P P

K C‑AF Center Priority 5, 9, or 25 targets P P P

b AF/MF
Function Default *1 *2 *3

KYMode Settings All; Small; 5-, 9-, or 25-target group P P P

406 C Custom Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

AF Area Pointer On1 P P P

AF Target Mode (q), AF Target

Y Set Home ― P P
Point

Y Select Screen Settings Set 1 P P P

z YMode P P P

y YMode P P P

r tPos P P P

s tPos P P P

Y Loop Selection Off P P P

Y Loop Settings
Via q No P P P

1×1; vertical and horizontal step size:

t Target Mode Settings P P ―
1

K Orientation Linked Y Off P P ―

c AF/MF
Function Default *1 *2 *3

AF Targeting Pad Off P P P

AF Limiter Off P P P

Distance settings Setting 1 P P P

Release Priority On P P P

AF Illuminator On P P P

I Face Priority Off P P ―

407 C Custom Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

AF Focus Adj. 1 Off P P P

1 Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not affect saved values.

d AF/MF
Function Default *1 *2 *3

Starry Sky AF Setting Speed P P P

Preset MF distance 999.9 m P P P

Magnify Off P P ―

MF Assist Peaking Off P P ―

Focus Indicator Off P P ―

MF Clutch Operative P P P

Focus Ring b P P P

Bulb/Time Focusing On P P P

Reset Lens Off P P P

408 C Custom Menus

B Button/Dial
Function Default *1 *2 *3

gY Sequential shooting/self-timer P P ―

U U View Selection P P ―

F Exposure F P P ―

R R REC P P ―

V AEL/AFL P P ―

K Button
P ISO P P ―
Function

d Y P P ―

M Y (Flash Mode) P P ―

K Y (g/Y) P P ―

W Preview P P ―

j AF Stop P P ―

409 C Custom Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

z: F
Position 1 P P ―
y: Ps
P
z: ISO
Position 2 P P ―
Y: WB

z: F
Position 1 P P ―
y: FNo.
A
z: ISO
Position 2 P P ―
Y: WB

z: F
Position 1 P P ―
y: Shutter
K Dial
S
Function
z: ISO
Position 2 P P ―
Y: WB

z: FNo.
Position 1 P P ―
y: Shutter
M/B
z: F
Position 2 P P ―
y: ISO

z: s
Menu ― P ―
y: r/Value

z: Prev/Next
q ― P ―
y: G8

Exposure Dial1 P P ―
Dial Direction
Ps Dial1 P P ―

K Fn Lever Function mode2 ― P ―

AF Mode/AF Target Mode/AF Target

mode2 ― P ―
Point

Fn Lever/Power Lever Fn ― P ―

410 C Custom Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

K Elec. Zoom Speed Normal P P ―

qR Function 4 ― P ―

g Release/g/Image Stabilizer
Function Default *1 *2 *3

S‑AF Release Priority Off P P P

C‑AF Release Priority On P P P

Max fps 6 fps P P P

g/
Frame
F Count Off P P P
Limiter

Max fps 10 fps P P P

B Frame
gL Settings
Count Off P P P
Limiter

Pre-shutter
8 shots P P P
Frames

s Frame
Count 25 shots P P P
Limiter

411 C Custom Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

Max fps 10 fps P P P

g Frame
Count Off P P P
Limiter

Max fps 30 fps P P P

B Frame
Count Off P P P
gH Settings
Limiter

Max fps 30 fps P P P

Pre-shutter
12 shots P P P
Frames
s
Frame
Count 25 shots P P P
Limiter

Anti-Flicker
Auto P P ―
LV
Flicker Reduction
Anti-Flicker
Off P P ―
Shooting

h Release/g/Image Stabilizer
Function Default *1 *2 *3

K Image Stabilizer S-IS AUTO P P P

g Image Stabilizer Fps Priority P P ―

Half Way Rls With IS On ― P ―

Lens I.S. Priority Off P P P

412 C Custom Menus

i Disp/o/PC
Function Default *1 *2 *3

0 Live Guide ― P ―

P/A/S/M/B Live SCP P P ―

K Control
Settings
ART Art Menu ― P ―

SCN Scene Menu ― P ―

q Info Image Only, Overall P P P

Magnify Frame, Magnify Scroll, Select

q8 Info ― P ―
Frame

LV-Info Image Only, Custom 1, Custom 2 P P ―

G/Info
Settings
Informations
On P P ―
during half way

LV OFF-Info Shooting Information P P ―

G Settings 25, Calendar P P ―

Picture Mode Settings All On P P ―

A, i, D, t, h, C, u,
g/Y Settings P P ―
j, l, K

Multi Function Settings All on except WB and ISO P P ―

413 C Custom Menus

j Disp/o/PC
Function Default *1 *2 *3

Manual Shooting Off P P P

Bulb/Time On 2, Frame Rate Priority P P P

Live View Boost
Live Composite Off P P P

Others Off P P P

Art LV Mode mode1 P P ―

LV Close Up Mode mode2 P P ―

LV Close Up
Settings
Live View Boost Off P P ―

q8 Default Setting Recently ― P ―

z Lock Off P P ―
z Settings
Live View Boost Off P P ―

k Disp/o/PC
Function Default *1 *2 *3

Display Color Preset 1 P P ―

Displayed Grid Off P P ―

Grid Settings

Apply Settings to
On P P ―
EVF

Peaking Color Red P P ―

Highlight Intensity Normal P P ―

Peaking Settings

Image Brightness
Off P P ―
Adj.

414 C Custom Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

Highlight 255 P P ―
Histogram Settings
Shadow 0 P P ―

Mode Guide Off P P ―

Selfie Assist On ― P ―

l Disp/o/PC
Function Default *1 *2 *3

o On P P P

Output Size 4K ― P ―

HDMI HDMI Control Off ― P ―

Output Frame Rate 60p Priority ― ― ―

USB Mode Select ― P P

m Exp/ISO/BULB/A
Function Default *1 *2 *3

EV Step 1/3 EV P P P

ISO Step 1/3 EV P P P

Upper Limit: 6400

Upper Limit / Default P P P
Default: 200
K ISO-Auto Set
Lowest S/S Setting Auto P P ―

K ISO-Auto P/A/S/M P P ―

K Noise Filter Normal P P P

415 C Custom Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

K Low ISO Processing Drive Priority P P P

Noise Reduct. Auto P P P

n Exp/ISO/BULB/A
Function Default *1 *2 *3

Bulb/Time Timer 8 min P P P

Live Composite Timer 3h P P P

Bulb/Time Monitor −7 P P ―

Live Bulb Off P P ―

Live Time 0.5 sec P P ―

Composite Settings 1 sec P P ―

K Flicker Scan Off P P P

o Exp/ISO/BULB/A
Function Default *1 *2 *3

Metering A P P P

AEL Metering Auto P P P

Y Spot Metering Spot, Spot Hilight, Spot Shadow P P P

A ±0 P P ―

Exposure Shift B ±0 P P ―

C ±0 P P ―

416 C Custom Menus

F A Custom
Function Default *1 *2 *3

A X-Sync. 1/250 P P P

A Slow Limit Off P P P

7+F Off P P P

A+WB Off P P ―

A RC Mode Off P P P

G X/WB/Color
Function Default *1 *2 *3

X1: LSF
X2: LF
X Set P P P
X3: LN
X4: MN

Middle 3200×2400 P P P
Pixel Count
Small 1280×960 P P P

Shading Comp. Off P P P

K WB Auto P P P

K All d A±0, G±0 P P ―

K N Keep Warm Color On P P P

Color Space sRGB P P P

417 C Custom Menus

p Record/Erase
Function Default *1 *2 *3

File Name Reset P P ―

Edit Filename Off P P ―

dpi Settings 350 dpi P P ―

Copyright Info. Off P P ―

Copyright Settings 1 Artist Name ― ― ― ―

Copyright Name ― ― ― ―

Lens Info Settings 1 Off ― P ―

1 Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not affect saved values.

q Record/Erase
Function Default *1 *2 *3

Quick Erase Off P P P

RAW+JPEG Erase RAW+JPEG P P P

Priority Set No P P P

I EVF
Function Default *1 *2 *3

EVF Auto Switch On2 ― P ―

EVF Auto
Off P P ―
Luminance
EVF Adjust

EVF Adjust o ±0, p ±0 P P ―

418 C Custom Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

EVF Style Style 3 ― P ―

q Info Settings Basic Information, Custom1, Custom2 P P ―

Display Color Preset 1 P P ―

EVF Grid Settings
Displayed Grid Off P P ―

q Half Way Level On P P ―

S-OVF Off P P P

r K Utility
Function Default *1 *2 *3

Pixel Mapping ― ― ― ―

419 C Custom Menus

 Function Default *1 *2 *3

End LV 8 0.7 sec P P ―

Reset LV 8 Frame 0.7 sec P P ―

End A 0.7 sec P P ―

Reset A Frame 0.7 sec P P ―

Reset F 0.7 sec P P ―

Reset 7 0.7 sec P P ―

Reset B 0.7 sec P P ―

Reset R 0.7 sec P P ―

Press-and-hold
Time
Reset Y 0.7 sec P P ―

Call EVF Auto Switch 0.7 sec P P ―

End q8 0.7 sec P P ―

End P 0.7 sec P P ―

Reset P 0.7 sec P P ―

Switch 7 Lock 0.7 sec P P ―

Call BKT Settings 0.7 sec P P ―

End Flicker Scan 0.7 sec P P ―

Level Adjust ― ― P ―

Touchscreen Settings On ― P ―

Menu Recall Recall P P ―

Fisheye Compensation Off P P ―

420 C Custom Menus

s K Utility
Function Default *1 *2 *3

Backlit LCD Hold P P P

Sleep 1 min P P P

Auto Power Off 4h P P P

Quick Sleep Mode Off P P P

Backlit LCD 8 sec P P ―

Sleep 10 sec P P ―

Certification ― ― ― ―

421 C Custom Menus

Memory Card Capacity
Memory Card Capacity: Photos
Figures are for a 64 GB SDXC card used to record photos with an aspect ratio of 4:3.

Number of
Record Image size Compression File File size (MB)
storable still
mode (Pixel Count) ratio format (approx.)
pictures

(Tripod)
10368×7776
Lossless
ORF
compression
(Handheld) (Tripod) (Tripod)
8160×6120 168.2 355
IF+RAW
(Handheld) (Handheld)
8160×6120 1/4 JPEG 117.1 489

Lossless
5184×3888 ORI
compression

(Tripod)
10368×7776
Lossless
ORF
compression
(Handheld) (Tripod) (Tripod)
8160×6120 157.4 359
JF+RAW
(Handheld) (Handheld)
5760×4320 1/4 JPEG 106.3 542

Lossless
5184×3888 ORI
compression

IF 8160×6120 1/4 JPEG 21.7 2529

JF 5760×4320 1/4 JPEG 10.9 5033

422 Memory Card Capacity: Photos

 Number of
Record Image size Compression File File size (MB)
storable still
mode (Pixel Count) ratio format (approx.)
pictures

Lossless
RAW ORF 21.5 2838
compression

LSF 1/2.7 13.1 4209

5184 × 3888

LF 1/4 8.9 6180

LN 1/8 4.6 11909

MSF 1/2.7 5.1 10614

MF 3200 × 2400 1/4 3.6 15258

MN 1/8 1.9 28721

MSF 1/2.7 2.0 27126

MF 1920 × 1440 1/4 JPEG 1.4 37559

MN 1/8 0.9 61033

SSF 1/2.7 1.0 54252

SSF 1280 × 960 1/4 0.8 69752

SN 1/8 0.5 97654

SSF 1/2.7 0.8 69752

SSF 1024 × 768 1/4 0.6 97654

SN 1/8 0.3 244135

The number of storable still pictures may change according to the subject, whether or not print
reservations have been made, and other factors. In certain instances, the number of storable still
pictures displayed on the monitor will not change even when you take pictures or erase stored
images.
The actual file size varies according to the subject.
The maximum number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor is 9999.

423 Memory Card Capacity: Photos

Memory Card Capacity: Movies
Figures are for a 64 GB SDXC memory card.

Frame size Compression Frame rate Capacity (approx.)

C4K — 24p 33 minutes

4K — 30p, 25p, 24p 1 hour 18 minutes

A-I 30p, 25p, 24p 39 minutes

SF 2 hours 35 minutes
FHD
F 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p 4 hours 31 minutes

N 7 hours 37 minutes

A-I 1 hour 18 minutes

SF 5 hours 13 minutes
HD 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p
F 9 hours 52 minutes

N 13 hours 59 minutes

Figures are for footage recorded at the maximum frame rate. The actual bit rate varies with the
frame rate and scene recorded.
When an SDXC card is used, movies over 2 hours are recorded over multiple files (depending
on shooting conditions, the camera may start recording to a new file before the 2-hour limit is
reached).
When an SD/SDHC card is used, movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple files
(depending on shooting conditions, the camera may start recording to a new file before the 4 GB
limit is reached).

424 Memory Card Capacity: Movies

Cautions
Information about Dust and Water Resistant
Features
This camera has a water resistant specification of IPX3 (when used in combination with an IPX3 or
higher water resistant lens supplied by our company).
This camera has a dust resistant specification of IP5X (under our company’s test conditions).

Precautions
Dust and water resistant capabilities may be lost when the camera is subjected to shock.
Examine the following components for the presence of dirt, dust, sand, or other foreign matter:
the seals and surfaces of all covers, including those for the connectors and the battery and card
compartments, the mounting surfaces on the camera and lens, and all connectors for accessories
and the like. Remove any foreign matter with a clean, lint-free cloth.
To ensure dust and water resistant capabilities, close the covers firmly and attach the lens before
use.
Do not operate the camera, open/close the covers, or attach/remove the lens when they are wet.
Water resistant feature is ensured only when compatible lenses/accessories are attached. Check the
compatibility.
For compatible accessories, visit our website.

Maintenance
Wipe off water thoroughly with a dry cloth.
Remove foreign materials such as dirt, dust or sand thoroughly.

Information about Dust and Water Resistant

425 Features
Batteries
The camera uses our lithium-ion battery. Never use any battery other than our genuine batteries.
The camera’s power consumption varies widely with usage and other conditions.
As the following consume a lot of power even without shooting, the battery will be drained quickly.
- Performing auto focus repeatedly by pressing the shutter button halfway in shooting mode.
- Displaying images on the monitor for a prolonged period.
- When connected to a computer.
- Leaving wireless LAN/Bluetooth® enabled.
When using a drained battery, the camera may turn off without the low battery warning being
displayed.
Remove the batteries before putting the camera into storage for periods of a month or more.
Leaving the batteries in the camera for extended periods shortens their lives, potentially rendering
them unusable.
The normal charging time using the provided USB-AC adapter is approximately 4 hours (estimated).
Do not use USB-AC adapters or chargers not specifically designated for use with batteries of the
supplied type. Similarly, do not use the supplied USB-AC adapter with batteries (cameras) other than
those of the designated type.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type.
Dispose of the used battery following the instructions “SCAUTION” (P. 462) in the instruction
manual.

426 Batteries
Using your USB-AC adapter abroad
The USB-AC adapter can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of 100 V to 240 V
AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or area you are in, the AC wall
outlet may be shaped differently and the USB-AC adapter may require a plug adapter to match the
wall outlet.
Do not use third-party travel adapters as the USB-AC adapter may malfunction.

427 Using your USB-AC adapter abroad

Information
Interchangeable lenses
Choose a lens according to the scene and your creative intent. Use
lenses designed exclusively for the Micro Four Thirds system and
bearing the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL label or the symbol shown here.

With an adapter, you can also use Four Thirds System lenses. The optional adapter is required.
When you attach or remove the body cap and lens from the camera, keep the lens mount on the
camera pointed downward. This helps prevent dust and other foreign matter from getting inside the
camera.
Do not remove the body cap or attach the lens in dusty places.
Do not point the lens attached to the camera toward the sun. This may cause the camera to
malfunction or even ignite due to the magnifying effect of sunlight focusing through the lens.
Be careful not to lose the body cap and rear cap.
Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is attached.

Lens and camera combinations

Lens Camera Attachment AF Metering

Micro Four Thirds

Yes Yes Yes
system lens
Micro Four Thirds system
camera
Attachment possible
Four Thirds system lens Yes 1 Yes
with mount adapter

1 Not available during movie recording or with starry sky AF.

428 Interchangeable lenses

MF Clutch Lenses
The “MF clutch” (manual focus clutch) mechanism on MF clutch lenses can be used to switch between
auto and manual focus simply by repositioning the focus ring.
Check the position of the MF clutch before shooting.
Sliding the focus ring to the AF/MF position at the end of the lens selects autofocus, while sliding
it to the MF position closer to the camera body selects manual focus, regardless of the focus mode
chosen with the camera.

1 2

5 3 ∞ mm

5 3 ∞ mm
16

16
1
11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11

1
11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11
2

2
0.5

0.5
16

16
AF/MF MF AF/MF MF
1 Focus ring
2 Focus distances visible

CSelecting [Inoperative] for [MF Clutch] in C Custom Menu d (P. 273) disables manual focus
even when the MF clutch is in the MF position.

429 MF Clutch Lenses

Camera Displays for Lens SET and CALL
Functions
The camera displays “SETN” when the focus position is saved using the SET option and “CALLN”
when a saved focus position is restored using the CALL option.
For more information on SET and CALL, see the lens manual.

SET CALL
S-IS AUTO S-IS AUTO

ISO-A ISO-A
200 200

YF YF
4K 4K
30p 30p

1:02:03 1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023 P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

Camera Displays for Lens SET and CALL

430 Functions
Optional Accessories

Grip (ECG-5)
The grip helps you keep the camera steady when using large lenses.
Make sure to turn the camera off when attaching and removing the grip.

Part names
1 1 Shutter button
2 Front dial
2 3 Removal knob
4 Connector cap
4

Attaching the Grip

Before attaching the grip, remove the connector a
cover (a) from the bottom of the camera and the
connector cap (b) from the ECG-5. Once attached,
make sure the ECG-5 removal knob is tightly
secured. Be sure to attach the connector cover to a
b
the camera and the connector cap to the ECG-5
when the ECG-5 is not in use.

Store the connector cover (a) in the ECG-5

Main Specifications (ECG-5)
Approx. 128.4 mm (W) × 76 mm (H) × 60.2 mm (D) (5.1″ × 3.0″ ×
Dimensions
2.4″) (excluding protrusions)

Weight Approx. 121 g (4.3 oz.) (excluding terminal cap)

Splash resistance (when

Type: Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1
attached to camera)

431 Optional Accessories

 Precautions
Do not use your nail to turn the removal knob. Doing so could result in injury.
Only use the camera within the guaranteed operating temperature range.
Do not use or store the product in dusty or humid areas.
Do not touch the electrical contacts.
Clean the grip and connector using a soft, dry cloth. Do not use damp cloths or organic solvents
such as thinner or benzine.

Designated External Flash Units

When using an optional flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose the flash mode
using camera controls and take pictures with the flash. See the documentation provided with the flash
unit for information on flash features and their use.

Choose a flash unit to suit your needs, taking into consideration such factors as the output required
and whether the unit supports macro photography. Flash units designed to communicate with the
camera support a variety of flash modes, including TTL auto and super FP. Flash units can be mounted
on the camera hot shoe or connected using a cable (available separately) and flash bracket. The
camera also supports the following wireless flash control systems:

Radio-Controlled Flash Photography: CMD, ACMD, RCV, and

X-RCV Modes
The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of radio signals. The range of locations
in which flash units can be placed increases. Flash units can control other compatible units or be fitted
with radio commander/receivers to allow the use of units that do not otherwise support radio flash
control.

Wireless Remote-Control Flash Photography: RC Mode

The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of optical signals. The flash mode can
be selected using camera controls (P. 149).

432 Optional Accessories

 Features Available with Compatible Flash Units
FL-700WR

Supported flash control TTL-AUTO, MANUAL, FP TTL AUTO, FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC, SL
modes MANUAL

GN (Guide Number, ISO GN 42 (75/150 mm 1)

100) GN 21 (12/24 mm 1)

Supported wireless
CMD, ACMD, RCV, X-RCV, RC
systems

FL-900R

Supported flash control TTL-AUTO, AUTO, MANUAL, FP TTL AUTO, FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
modes SL AUTO, SL MANUAL

GN (Guide Number, ISO GN 58 (100/200 mm 1)

100) GN 27 (12/24 mm 1)

Supported wireless
RC
systems

STF-8

Supported flash control

TTL-AUTO, MANUAL, RC 2
modes

GN (Guide Number, ISO

GN 8.5
100)

Supported wireless
RC 2
systems

FL-LM3

Supported flash control

Varies with camera settings.
modes

GN (Guide Number, ISO

GN 9.1 (12/24 mm 1)
100)

433 Optional Accessories

 Supported wireless
RC 2
systems

1 Maximum lens focal length at which unit can provide flash coverage (figures following slashes are
35 mm format equivalent focal lengths).
2 Functions as commander (transmitter) only.

Wireless remote control flash photography

Wireless flash photography is available with compatible flash units that support wireless remote
control (RC). The remote flash units are controlled via a unit mounted on the camera hot shoe. Settings
can be adjusted separately for the camera-mounted unit and units in up to three other groups.

RC mode must be enabled on both the master and remote flash units (P. 432).

Enabling RC Mode
1. Set the remote flash units to RC mode and place them as desired.
Turn the external flash units on, press the MODE button, and select RC mode.
Select a channel and group for each external flash unit.

2. Select [On] for [A RC Mode] in C Custom Menu F (P. 287) and press the OK button.
The camera will exit to the shooting display.
A s icon will be displayed. RC

# S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K
30p

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 0.0 1023

434 Optional Accessories

3. Press the OK button.
The RC mode super control panel will be displayed.
A Mode
TTL +5.0
Manual 1/8 Low
Off – Ch 1
TTL +3.0

1:02:03
P 250 F5.6 1023

The standard LV super control panel can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. The
display will change each time the INFO button is pressed.

4. Adjust flash settings.

Highlight items using the FGHI buttons and rotate the front dial to choose settings.

1 1 Supported flash control modes

A Mode 4 2 Group
TTL +5.0

2
Manual 1/8 Low 5 3 Flash compensation
Off – Ch 1
TTL +3.0
6 4 Flash mode
3 5 Optical signal strength
P 250 F5.6
1:02:03
1023
6 Channel

Choose a group. Changes to settings apply to all units in the selected

Group
group. Choose 8 to adjust settings for the unit mounted on the camera.

Supported
flash control Choose a flash mode.
modes

Flash Adjust flash output. When MANUAL is selected for flash mode, you can
compensation choose a value for manual flash output.

Choose the brightness of the optical control signals emitted by the flash
Optical signal
units. Choose [HI] if you have placed flash units at close to the maximum
strength
distance from the camera. This setting applies to all groups.

Flash mode/ Choose A (standard) or FP (super FP). Choose super FP for shutter speeds
flash level faster than the flash sync speed. This setting applies to all groups.

Choose the channel used for flash control. Change the channel if you
Channel find that other light sources in the area are interfering with remote flash
control.

435 Optional Accessories

 5. Set the unit mounted on the camera to [TTL AUTO].
Flash control settings for the FL‑LM3 can only be adjusted using the camera.

Positioning Remote Flash Units

1. Set the wireless RC flash units to RC mode.
After turning compatible flash units on, press the MODE button and choose RC mode.
Choose a group for each of the compatible flash units using flash controls and match the
channel to that selected with the camera.

2. Position the flash units.

Position the wireless units with the remote sensors facing the camera.

3. Take pictures after confirming that the remote units and the unit on the camera are charged.

Wireless Flash Control Range

The illustration is intended as a guide only. The flash control range varies with the type of flash
mounted on the camera and the conditions in the surrounding area.

Flash Control Range for Camera-Mounted FL-LM3 Flash Units

30°

60° 30°

7m
50°
50°
100°
5m

We recommend that each group contain no more than 3 flash units.

Wireless flash photography is not available in anti-shock mode or in rear-curtain slow sync mode
when a shutter speed slower than 4 s is selected.
Start wait times longer than 4 s cannot be selected in anti-shock and silent modes.

436 Optional Accessories

 Flash control signals may interfere with exposure if the subject is too close to the camera. This can
be mitigated by reducing the brightness of the camera flash, for example by using a diffuser.

Other external flash units

Note the following when using a third-party flash unit mounted on the camera hot shoe:
Using obsolete flash units that apply currents of more than about 250 V to the X-contact will
damage the camera.
Connecting flash units with signal contacts that do not conform to our specifications may damage
the camera.
Select mode M, choose a shutter speed no faster than the flash sync speed, and set [K ISO] to
[AUTO].
Flash control can only be performed by manually setting the flash to the ISO sensitivity and
aperture values selected with the camera. Flash brightness can be adjusted by adjusting either
ISO sensitivity or aperture.
Use a flash with an angle of illumination suited to the lens. Angle of illumination is usually expressed
using 35-mm format equivalent focal lengths.

437 Optional Accessories

Principal Accessories
Converter lenses
Converter lenses attach to the camera lens for quick and easy fish-eye or macro photography. See our
website for information on the lenses that can be used.

Eyecup (EP-16)
You can switch to a large-size eyecup.

Removal

2
1

438 Optional Accessories

Accessories

For the latest information, please visit our website.

Power Supply

Lithium-ion battery Lithium-ion Charger USB-AC Adapter

BLS-50 BCS-5 F-5AC

Viewfinder

Eyecup
EP-16/EP-15

Remote Operation

Remote Cable Remote Control

RM-CB2 RM-WR1

439 Accessories
Lens
Micro Four Thirds system lenses

Four Thirds system lenses

An MMF‑2 or MMF‑3 Four Thirds Adapter is required when

using this camera with Four Thirds system lenses.
There are restrictions on the lenses that can be used with the
adapter. Visit our website for details.

Four Thirds Adapter

MMF-2/MMF-3

Converter lenses
FCON-P01 (fisheye) MCON-P01 (macro)
WCON-P01 (wide) MCON-P02 (macro)

Visit our website for information on compatible lenses.

440 Accessories
Flash

Electronic Flash Electronic Flash Electronic Flash

FL-LM3 FL-900R FL-700WR

Macro Flash Wireless radiowave commander Wireless radiowave receiver

STF-8 FC-WR FR-WR

Grip

Grip
ECG-5

Case/Strap
Camera case
Strap

Connection Cable
USB cable
HDMI cable (available from third-party suppliers)

441 Accessories
Memory Card
SD
SDHC
SDXC

Memory cards are available from third-party suppliers.

Microphone
Microphones are available from third-party suppliers.

Software
Digital photo management and editing software
OM Workspace
Smartphone app
OM Image Share

442 Accessories
Cleaning and storing the camera

Cleaning the camera

Turn off the camera and remove the battery before cleaning the camera.
Do not use strong solvents such as benzene or alcohol, or a chemically treated cloth.

Exterior:
Wipe gently with a soft cloth. If the camera is very dirty, soak the cloth in mild soapy water and
wring well. Wipe the camera with the damp cloth and then dry it with a dry cloth. If you have used
the camera at the beach, use a cloth soaked in clean water and well wrung.

Monitor:
Wipe gently with a soft cloth.

Lens:
Blow dust off the lens with a commercially available blower. For the lens, wipe gently with a lens
cleaning paper.

Storage
When not using the camera for a prolonged period, remove the battery and card. Store the camera
in a cool, dry place that is well ventilated.
Insert the battery periodically and test the camera’s functions.
Remove dust and other foreign matter from the body and rear caps before attaching them.
Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is attached. Be
sure to replace the front and rear lens caps before putting the lens away.
Clean the camera after use.
Do not store with insect repellent.
Avoid storing the camera in places where chemicals are treated, in order to protect the camera from
corrosion.
Mold may form on the lens surface if the lens is left dirty.
Check each part of the camera before use if it has not been used for a long time. Before taking
important pictures, be sure to take a test shot and check that the camera works properly.

443 Cleaning and storing the camera

Inspecting and Cleaning the Image Sensor
This camera incorporates a dust reduction function to keep dust from getting on the image sensor and
to remove any dust or dirt from the image sensor surface with ultrasonic vibrations. The dust reduction
function operates when the camera is turned on. The dust reduction function operates at the same
time as the pixel mapping, which checks the image sensor and image processing circuitry. Since dust
reduction is activated every time the camera’s power is turned on, the camera should be held upright
for the dust reduction function to be effective.

Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing

functions
The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image sensor and image
processing functions. For best results, wait at least a minute after shooting and playback have ended
before performing pixel mapping.

1. Highlight [Pixel Mapping] in C Custom Menu r (P. 295).

2. Press the I button and then the OK button.

The [Busy] bar is displayed when pixel mapping is in progress. When pixel mapping is
finished, the menu is restored.

If you accidentally turn the camera off during pixel mapping, start again from Step 1.

444 Cleaning and storing the camera

Shooting tips and information

The camera does not turn on even when a battery

is loaded
The battery is not fully charged
Charge the battery using a USB-AC adapter or battery charger.

The battery is temporarily unable to function because of

the cold
Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Remove the battery and warm it by putting it in
your pocket for a while.

A dialog prompting you to choose a language is

displayed
The dialog is displayed in the following situations.
The camera is turned on for the first time. Please select your language.
Veuillez choisir votre langue.
You have not chosen a language. Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache.
Por favor, selecciona tu idioma.

See “Initial setup” (P. 34) for information on choosing a language.

No picture is taken when the shutter button is

pressed
The camera has turned off automatically
If [On] is selected for [Quick Sleep Mode], the camera will enter sleep mode if no operations are
performed for a set period. Press the shutter button halfway to exit sleep mode. g C Custom
Menu s > [Quick Sleep Mode] (P. 296)
The camera automatically enters sleep mode to reduce the drain on the battery if no operations are
performed for a set period of time. g C Custom Menu s > [Sleep] (P. 296)

445 Shooting tips and information

 If no operations are performed for a set time after the camera has entered sleep mode, the camera
will turn off automatically. g C Custom Menu s > [Auto Power Off] (P. 296)

The flash is charging

On the monitor, the A mark blinks when charging is in progress. Wait for the blinking to stop, then
press the shutter button.

Unable to focus
The camera cannot focus on subjects that are too close to the camera or that are not suited to
autofocus (the AF confirmation mark will blink in the monitor). Increase the distance to the subject
or focus on a high contrast object at the same distance from the camera as your main subject,
compose the shot, and shoot.

Subjects that are difficult to focus on

It may be difficult to focus with auto focus in the following situations.
- AF confirmation mark is blinking.
These subjects are not focused.

Subject with low contrast Excessively bright light in

center of frame

- AF confirmation mark lights up but the subject is not focused.

Subjects at different distances Fast-moving subject Subject not inside AF area

Noise reduction is activated

When shooting night scenes, shutter speeds are slower and noise tends to appear in images. The
camera activates the noise-reduction process after shooting at slow shutter speeds. During which,
shooting is not allowed. You can set [Noise Reduct.] to [Off]. g C Custom Menu m > [Noise
Reduct.] (P. 284)

The number of AF targets is reduced

The size and number of available AF targets vary with group target settings (P. 91) and the options
chosen for [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 208) and [Aspect] (P. 138).

446 Shooting tips and information

The date and time has not been set
The camera is used with the settings at the time of purchase
The date and time of the camera is not set when purchased. Set the date and time before using the
camera. g “Initial setup” (P. 34)

The battery has been removed from the camera

The date and time settings will be returned to the factory default settings if the camera is left
without the battery for approximately 1 day (in-house measurements). The settings will be canceled
more quickly if the battery was only loaded in the camera for a short time before being removed.
Before taking important pictures, check that the date and time settings are correct.

Set functions are restored to their factory default

settings
Settings altered in AUTO (0) and SCN modes are reset to default values when the mode dial is
rotated to another setting or the camera is turned off.
Settings altered in custom modes (C–C4) are reset to saved values when the mode dial is rotated
to another setting or the camera is turned off. Note, however, that if [Hold] is selected for [Reset /
Custom Modes] > [Custom Mode Save Settings] in 6 Shooting Menu 1 when a custom mode
is selected, changes to settings will automatically be saved to the selected mode. g “Updating
Custom Modes Automatically” (P. 81)

Pictures are “washed out”

This may occur when the picture is taken in backlight or semi-backlight conditions. This is due to a
phenomenon called flare or ghosting. As far as possible, consider a composition where strong light
source is not taken in the picture. Flare may occur even when a light source is not present in the
picture. Use a lens hood to shade the lens from the light source. If a lens hood does not have effect,
use your hand to shade the lens from the light.

447 Shooting tips and information

Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in
the picture taken
This may be due to stuck pixel(s) on the image sensor. Perform [Pixel Mapping]. If the problem
persists, repeat pixel mapping a few times. g “Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing
functions” (P. 444)

Functions that cannot be selected from menus

Some items may not be selectable from the menus when using the arrow pad.
Items that cannot be set with the current shooting mode.
Items that cannot be set because of an item that has already been set:
- Combinations of [i] (P. 101) and [Noise Reduct.] (P. 284), etc.

Functions that cannot be set from the super

control panel
Some functions may be unavailable depending on the current shooting settings.
Check if the same function is displayed in gray in the menus.

The subject appears distorted

The following functions use an electronic shutter:
movie recording (P. 82), silent mode (P. 106), Pro Capture (P. 107), High Res Shot (P. 109), focus
bracketing (P. 216), focus stacking (P. 216), and the live ND filter (P. 213)

This may cause distortion if the subject is moving rapidly or the camera is moved abruptly. Avoid
moving the camera abruptly during shooting or use standard sequential shooting.

Lines appear in photographs

The following functions use an electronic shutter, which may result in lines due to flicker and other
phenomena associated with fluorescent and LED lighting:
movie recording (P. 82), silent mode (P. 106), Pro Capture (P. 107), High Res Shot (P. 109), focus
bracketing (P. 216), focus stacking (P. 216), and the live ND filter (P. 213)

448 Shooting tips and information

Flicker can be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds. You can also reduce flicker using flicker
scan. g CCustom Menu n > [KFlicker Scan] (P. 343), n Video Menu > [n Mode Settings] >
[n Flicker Scan] (P. 240)

Only the subject is displayed and no information is

shown
The display has been switched to “image only”. Press the INFO button and switch to another display
mode.

Focus mode cannot be changed from MF (manual

focus)
The lens you are using may be equipped with the MF clutch mechanism. In this case, manual focus
is selected when the focus ring is slid to the camera body side. Check the lens. g “MF Clutch
Lenses” (P. 429)

Nothing is displayed on the monitor

When something, e.g. your face, hand or strap, comes close to the viewfinder, the monitor turns off
and the viewfinder turns on. g “Switching between displays” (P. 40)

449 Shooting tips and information

Error codes

Monitor indication Possible cause/Corrective action

No card inserted or card not recognized.

Insert a card or remove and reinsert the current card.
No Card

There is a problem with the card.

Insert the card again. If the problem persists, format the card. If the card
Card Error cannot be formatted, it cannot be used.

Writing to the card is prohibited.

The card write-protect switch is set to the “LOCK” side. Return the switch to
Write Protect the unlocked position (P. 28).

The card is full and no additional pictures can be taken.

Replace the card or erase unwanted pictures.
Before deleting pictures, be sure any you wish to keep have been copied
Card Full to a computer.

There is not enough space on the memory card to record additional

pictures.
Replace the card or erase unwanted pictures.
Card Full Before deleting pictures, be sure any you wish to keep have been copied
to a computer.

There are no pictures to play back.

The card contains no pictures.
No Picture Take pictures before beginning playback.

The selected file is damaged and cannot be played back. Alternatively,

the picture is in a format that is not supported by the camera.
View the picture using computer imaging software or the like.
Picture Error
If the picture cannot be displayed on a computer, the file may be corrupt.

450 Error codes

Monitor indication Possible cause/Corrective action

Camera retouch features cannot be applied to pictures recorded with

other devices.
The Image Cannot Be
Retouch the picture on a computer or other device.
Edited

The clock is not set.

Y/M/D
Set the clock (P. 34).

The internal temperature of the camera has risen due to sequential

shooting.
Turn off the camera and wait for the internal temperature to cool.

The internal temperature of the camera has risen due to sequential

Internal camera shooting.
temperature is too Wait a moment for the camera to turn off automatically.
high. Allow the internal temperature of the camera to cool before resuming
Please wait for operations.
cooling before
camera use.

The battery is drained.

Charge the battery.
Battery Empty

The camera is not correctly connected to a computer, HDMI display,

or other device.
No Connection Reconnect the camera.

The lens is locked.

The lens of the retractable lens stays retracted.
Please extend the
Extend the lens.
lens.

An abnormality has occurred between the camera and the lens.

Please check the
Turn off the camera, check the connection with the lens, and turn the
status of a lens.
power on again.

451 Error codes

Specifications

Camera
Product type

Digital camera with interchangeable Micro Four Thirds Standard

Product type
lens system

Lens M.ZUIKO DIGITAL, Micro Four Thirds System Lens

Lens mount Micro Four Thirds mount

Equivalent focal length on a

Approx. twice the focal length of the lens
35 mm film camera

Image sensor

Product type 4/3” Live MOS sensor

Total no. of pixels Approx. 21.77 million pixels

No. of effective pixels Approx. 20.37 million pixels

Screen size 17.4 mm (H) × 13.0 mm (V)

Aspect ratio 1.33 (4:3)

Viewfinder

Type Electronic viewfinder with eye sensor

No. of pixels Approx. 2.36 million dots

Magnification 100%

Eye point Approx. 27 mm (−1 m−1)

452 Specifications
Live view

Sensor Uses Live MOS sensor

Magnification 100%

Monitor

Product type 3.0″ TFT color LCD, Vari-angle, touch screen

Total no. of pixels Approx. 1.04 million dots (aspect ratio 3:2)

Shutter

Product type Computerized focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed 1/8000 – 60 sec., bulb photography, time photography

Flash sync speed Up to 1/250 sec.

Auto focus

Product type Hi-Speed Imager AF

Focusing points 121 points

Selection of focusing point Auto, Optional

453 Specifications
Exposure control

TTL metering system (imager metering)

Metering system Digital ESP metering/Center weighted averaging metering/Spot
metering

Metered range −2 to 20 EV (f/2.8, ISO 100 equivalent)

0: Auto; P: Program AE (program shift available); A: Aperture

priority AE; S: Shutter-priority AE; M: Manual; B: Bulb (bulb, time,
Shooting modes
and composite); C – C4: Custom Modes; n: Movie; ART: Art
Filter; SCN: Scene

ISO sensitivity L64; L100; 200 – 25600 in steps of 1/3 or 1 EV

Exposure compensation ±5.0 EV in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV

White balance

Auto/Preset WB (7 settings)/Customized WB/One-touch WB

Mode setting
(camera can store up to 4 settings)

Recording

SD, SDHC and SDXC

Memory
UHS‑II compatible

Recording system Digital recording, JPEG (DCF2.0), RAW Data

Compatible standards Exif 2.31, Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Sound with still pictures Wave format

Movie MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Stereo linear PCM, 16-bit; sampling frequency 48 kHz (wave

format)
Audio
Stereo linear PCM, 24-bit; sampling frequency 96 kHz (wave
format)

454 Specifications
Playback

Single-frame playback; close-up playback; index display; calendar

Display format
display

Drive

Single frame; sequential; anti-shock; silent; Pro Capture; self-

Drive mode
timer; High Res Shot

Up to 10 fps (i)
Sequential shooting
Up to 30 fps (D, t)

Self-timer Operation time: 12 sec.; 2 sec.; custom

Flash

Flash control mode TTL-AUTO (TTL pre-flash mode); MANUAL

X-Sync. Up to 1/250 sec.

Wireless LAN

Compatible standards IEEE 802.11b/g/n

Bluetooth®

Compatible standards Bluetooth Version 4.2 BLE

External connectors

Micro USB; HDMI (Type D)

Power supply

Battery Lithium-ion battery ×1

Switch to sleep mode: 1 minute; Power OFF: 4 hours

Energy saving function
(can be customized)

455 Specifications
Dimensions/weight

Approx. 125.3 mm (W) × 85.2 mm (H) × 49.7 mm (D) (4.9″ ×

Dimensions
3.4″ × 2.0″) (excluding protrusions)

Weight Approx. 414 g (0.9 Ib.) (including battery and memory card)

Operating environment

−10 °C – 40 °C (14 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/ −20 °C – 60 °C (−4 °F

Temperature
– 140 °F) (storage)

Humidity 30% – 90% (operation)/10% – 90% (storage)

Type: IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX3 (applies if camera is

Water resistance
used with one of our water-resistant lenses)

456 Specifications
Lithium-ion battery
MODEL NO. BLS-50

Product type Rechargeable Lithium ion battery

Nominal voltage DC 7.2 V

Nominal capacity 1210 mAh

No. of charge and discharge times Approx. 500 times (varies with usage conditions)

Ambient temperature 0 °C – 40 °C (32 °F – 104 °F) (charging)

Approx. 35.5 mm (W) × 12.8 mm (H) × 55 mm (D) (1.4″ ×

Dimensions
0.5″ × 2.2″)

Weight Approx. 46 g (0.1 Ib.)

USB-AC adapter
MODEL NO. F-5AC-1/F-5AC-2

Rated input AC 100 V – 240 V (50/60 Hz)

Rated output DC 5 V, 1500 mA

0 °C – 40 °C (32 °F – 104 °F) (operation)/–20 °C – 60 °C (–4 °F – 140 °F)

Ambient temperature
(storage)

SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT ANY NOTICE OR OBLIGATION ON THE

PART OF THE MANUFACTURER.
Visit our website for the latest specifications.

457 Specifications
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface,
and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other
countries.

458 Specifications
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating and maintenance
instructions in the documentation provided with the product.
If the product is used without observing the information given under this symbol, serious injury
WARNING
or death may result.
If the product is used without observing the information given under this symbol, injury may
CAUTION
result.
If the product is used without observing the information given under this symbol, damage to the
NOTICE
equipment may result.

WARNING!
TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT
TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT.

General Precautions
Read All Instructions — Before you use the product, read all operating instructions. Save all manuals
and documentation for future reference.
Power Source — Connect this product only to the power source described on the product label.
Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury, never insert a metal object into the product.
Cleaning — Always unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp cloth
for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid or aerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent to clean this
product.
Heat — Never use or store this product near any heat source such as a radiator, heat register, stove, or
any type of equipment or appliance that generates heat, including stereo amplifiers.
Lightning — If a lightning storm occurs while using a USB-AC adapter, remove it from the wall outlet
immediately.
Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid damaging the product, use only accessories
recommended by our company.
Location — To avoid damage to the product, mount the product securely on a stable tripod, stand, or
bracket.

459 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SWARNING
Do not use the camera near flammable or explosive gases.
Rest your eyes periodically when using the viewfinder.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in eyestrain, nausea, or sensations similar to motion
sickness. The length and frequency of the required rest varies with the individual; use your own
judgement. If you feel tired or unwell, avoid using the viewfinder and if necessary consult a
physician.
Do not use the flash and LED (including AF illuminator) on people (infants, small children,
etc.) at close range.
You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) away from the faces of your subjects. Firing the flash too close to
the subject’s eyes could cause a momentary loss of vision.
Do not look at the sun or strong lights with the camera.
Keep young children, infants away from the camera.
Always use and store the camera out of the reach of young children and infants to prevent the
following dangerous situations which could cause serious injury:
Becoming entangled in the camera strap, causing strangulation.
Accidentally swallowing the battery, cards or other small parts.
Accidentally firing the flash into their own eyes or those of another child.
Accidentally being injured by the moving parts of the camera.
If you find that the USB-AC adapter or charger is extremely hot or notice any unusual odors,
noise, or smoke around it, unplug the power plug from wall outlet immediately and stop
using it. Then, contact an authorized distributor or service center.
Stop using the camera immediately if you notice any unusual odors, noise, or smoke around
it.
Never remove the batteries with bare hands, which may cause a fire or burn your hands.
Never hold or operate the camera with wet hands.
This may cause overheating, exploding, burning, electrical shocks, or malfunctions.
Do not leave the camera in places where it may be subject to extremely high temperatures.
Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate and, in some circumstances, cause the camera to catch
fire. Do not use the charger or USB-AC adapter if it is covered (such as a blanket). This could
cause overheating, resulting in fire.
Handle the camera with care to avoid getting a low temperature burn.
When the camera contains metal parts, overheating can result in a low-temperature burn. Pay
attention to the following:
When used for a long period, the camera will get hot. If you hold on to the camera in this
state, a low-temperature burn may be caused.
In places subject to extremely cold temperatures, the temperature of the camera’s body may
be lower than the environmental temperature. If possible, wear gloves when handling the
camera in cold temperatures.
To protect the high-precision technology contained in this product, never leave the camera in the
places listed below, no matter if in use or storage:

460 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

 Places where temperatures and/or humidity are high or go through extreme changes. Direct
sunlight, beaches, locked cars, or near other heat sources (stove, radiator, etc.) or humidifiers.
In sandy or dusty environments.
Near flammable items or explosives.
In wet places, such as bathrooms or in the rain.
In places prone to strong vibrations.
The camera uses a lithium ion battery specified by our company. Charge the battery with the
specified USB-AC adapter or charger. Do not use any other USB-AC adapters or chargers.
Never incinerate or heat batteries in microwaves, on hot plates, or in pressure vessels, etc.
Never leave the camera on or near electromagnetic devices.
This may cause overheating, burning, or exploding.
Do not connect terminals with any metallic objects.
Take precautions when carrying or storing batteries to prevent them from coming into contact with
any metal objects such as jewelry, pins, fasteners, keys, etc.
The short circuit may cause overheating, exploding, or burning, which burn or damage you.
To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging their terminals, carefully follow all instructions
regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt to disassemble a battery or modify it in any way,
solder, etc.
If battery fluid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes immediately with clear, cold running water and
seek medical attention immediately.
If you cannot remove the battery from the camera, contact an authorized distributor or service
center. Do not try to remove the battery by force.
Damage to the battery exterior (scratches, etc.) may produce heat or an explosion.
Always store batteries out of the reach of small children and pets. If they accidentally swallow a
battery, seek medical attention immediately.
To prevent batteries from leaking, overheating, or causing a fire or explosion, use only batteries
recommended for use with this product.
If rechargeable batteries have not been recharged within the specified time, stop charging them and
do not use them.
Do not use batteries with scratches or damage to the casing, and do not scratch the battery.
Never subject batteries to strong shocks or continuous vibration by dropping or hitting.
This may cause exploding, overheating, or burning.
If a battery leaks, has unusual odor, becomes discolored or deformed, or becomes abnormal in any
other way during operation, stop using the camera, and keep away from fire immediately.
If a battery leaks fluid onto your clothing or skin, remove the clothing and flush the affected area
with clean, running cold water immediately. If the fluid burns your skin, seek medical attention
immediately.
Never use lithium-ion batteries in a low-temperature environment. Doing so may cause generation
of heat, ignition, or explosion.
The lithium-ion battery is designed to be used only for the digital camera. Do not use the battery to
other devices.
Do not allow children or animals/pets to handle or transport batteries (prevent dangerous
behaviour such as licking, putting in mouth or chewing).

461 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

 Use Only Dedicated Rechargeable Battery, Battery Charger
and USB-AC adapter
We strongly recommend that you use only the genuine rechargeable battery, battery charger, and
USB-AC adapter specified by our company with this camera. Using a non-genuine rechargeable
battery, battery charger and/or USB-AC adapter may result in fire or personal injury due to leakage,
heating, ignition or damage to the battery. Our company does not assume any liability for accidents or
damage that may result from the use of a battery, battery charger, and/or USB-AC adapter that are not
specified genuine accessories.

SCAUTION
Do not cover the flash with a hand while firing.
The included USB-AC adapter F-5AC is designed to be used only with this camera. Other cameras
cannot be charged with this USB-AC adapter.
Do not connect the included USB-AC adapter F-5AC to equipment other than this camera.
Never store batteries where they will be exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected to high
temperatures in a hot vehicle, near a heat source, etc.
Keep batteries dry at all times.
The battery may become hot during prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do not remove it
immediately after using the camera.
This camera uses one of our lithium-ion batteries. Use the specified genuine battery. There is a risk
of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type.
Please recycle batteries to help save our planet’s resources. When you throw away dead batteries, be
sure to cover their terminals and always observe local laws and regulations.

SNOTICE
Do not use or store the camera in dusty or humid places.
Use SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards only. Never use other types of cards.
If you accidently insert another type of card into the camera, contact an authorized distributor or
service center. Do not try to remove the card by force.
Regularly back up important data to a computer or other storage device to prevent accidental loss.
Our company accepts no liability for any loss of data associated with this device.
Be careful with the strap when you carry the camera. It could easily catch on stray objects and cause
serious damage.
Before transporting the camera, remove a tripod and all other accessories made by other
companies.
Never drop the camera or subject it to severe shocks or vibrations.
When attaching the camera to or removing it from a tripod, rotate the tripod screw, not the camera.
Do not touch electric contacts on cameras.

462 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Do not leave the camera pointed directly at the sun. This may cause lens or shutter curtain damage,
color failure, ghosting on the image sensor, or may possibly cause fires.
Do not leave the viewfinder exposed to a strong light source or direct sunlight. The heat may
damage the viewfinder.
Do not push or pull severely on the lens.
Be sure to remove any water droplets or other moisture from the product before replacing the
battery or opening or closing covers.
Before storing the camera for a long period, remove the batteries. Select a cool, dry location for
storage to prevent condensation or mold from forming inside the camera. After storage, test the
camera by turning it on and pressing the shutter button to make sure that it is operating normally.
The camera may malfunction if it is used in a location where it is subject to a magnetic/
electromagnetic field, radio waves, or high voltage, such as near a TV set, microwave, video game,
loud speakers, large monitor unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers. In such cases, turn the
camera off and on again before further operation.
Always observe the operating environment restrictions described in the camera’s manual.
Insert the battery carefully as described in the operating instructions.
Before loading, always inspect the battery carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or any other
abnormality.
Always unload the battery from the camera before storing the camera for a long period.
When storing the battery for a long period, select a cool location for storage.
For plug-in type USB-AC adapter:
Connect the plug-in type USB-AC adapter F-5AC correctly by plugging it vertically into the wall
outlet.
As the main plug of AC adapter is used to disconnect the AC adapter from the mains, connect it to
an easily accessible AC outlet.
Power consumption by the camera varies depending on which functions are used.
During the conditions described below, power is consumed continuously and the battery becomes
exhausted quickly.
The zoom is used repeatedly.
The shutter button is pressed halfway repeatedly in shooting mode, activating the auto focus.
A picture is displayed on the monitor for an extended period of time.
Using an exhausted battery may cause the camera to turn off without displaying the battery level
warning.
If the battery’s terminals get wet or greasy, camera contact failure may result. Wipe the battery well
with a dry cloth before use.
Always charge a battery when using it for the first time, or if it has not been used for a long period.
When operating the camera with battery power at low temperatures, try to keep the camera and
spare battery as warm as possible. A battery that has run down at low temperatures may be
restored after it is warmed at room temperature.
Before going on a long trip, and especially before traveling abroad, purchase extra batteries. A
recommended battery may be difficult to obtain while traveling.

463 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Using the wireless LAN/Bluetooth® functions
Turn off the camera in hospitals and other locations where medical equipment is present.
The radio waves from the camera may adversely affect medical equipment, causing a malfunction
that results in an accident. Be sure to disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® functions in the vicinity of
medical equipment (P. 357).
Turn off the camera when onboard aircraft.
Using wireless devices onboard may hinder safe operation of the aircraft. Be sure to disable wireless
LAN/Bluetooth® functions onboard aircraft (P. 357).

Monitor
Do not push the monitor forcibly; otherwise the image may become vague, resulting in a playback
mode failure or damage to the monitor.
A strip of light may appear on the top/bottom of the monitor, but this is not a malfunction.
When a subject is viewed diagonally in the camera, the edges may appear zigzagged on the
monitor. This is not a malfunction; it will be less noticeable in playback mode.
In places subject to low temperatures, the monitor may take a long time to turn on or its color may
change temporarily.
When using the camera in extremely cold places, it is a good idea to occasionally place it in a warm
place. The monitor exhibiting poor performance due to low temperatures will recover in normal
temperatures.
The monitor of this product is manufactured with high-quality accuracy, however, there may be a
stuck or dead pixel on the monitor. These pixels do not have any influence on the image to be
saved. Because of the characteristics, the unevenness of the color or brightness may also be found
depending on the angle, but this is due to the structure of the monitor. This is not a malfunction.

Legal and Other Notices

Our company makes no representations or warranties regarding any damages, or benefit expected
by using this unit lawfully, or any request from a third person, which are caused by the inappropriate
use of this product.
Our company makes no representations or warranties regarding any damages or any benefit
expected by using this unit lawfully which are caused by erasing picture data.

Disclaimer of Warranty
Our company makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or implied, by or concerning
any content of these written materials or software, and in no event shall be liable for any implied
warranty of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose or for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including but not limited to damages for loss of business profits, business
interruption and loss of business information) arising from the use or inability to use these written
materials or software or equipment. Some countries do not allow the exclusion or limitation of
liability for consequential or incidental damages or of the implied warranty, so the above limitations
may not apply to you.

464 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

 Our company reserves all rights to this manual.

Warning
Unauthorized photographing or use of copyrighted material may violate applicable copyright laws. Our
company assumes no responsibility for unauthorized photographing, use or other acts that infringe
upon the rights of copyright owners.

Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of these written materials or this software may be reproduced or used in
any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording or the use
of any type of information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of our
company. No liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained in these written
materials or software, or for damages resulting from the use of the information contained therein. Our
company reserves the right to alter the features and contents of this publication or software without
obligation or advance notice.

Trademarks
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Apical logo is a registered trademark of Apical Limited.

Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds, and the Micro Four Thirds and Four Thirds logos are trademarks
or registered trademarks of the OM Digital Solutions Corporation in Japan, the United States, the
countries of the European Union, and other countries.
Wi‑Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi‑Fi Alliance.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by OM Digital Solutions Corporation is under license.
The standards for camera file systems referred to in this manual are the “Design Rule for Camera File
System/DCF” standards stipulated by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
All other company and product names are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of their
respective owners. “™” and “®” symbols may sometimes be omitted.

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC
STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A

465 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

The software in this camera may include third party software. Any third party software is subject to the
terms and conditions, imposed by the owners or licensors of that software, under which software is
provided to you.
Those terms and other third party software notices, if any, may be found in the software notice PDF file
stored at
https://cs.olympus-imaging.jp/en/support/imsg/digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm

466 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

date of issue 2022.10.

https://om-digitalsolutions.com/

© 2022

WD880000